Home

User Manual

1. reactivate please restart monitoring Disable alarm region B 5 Aut W Unattended Object Manual O Missing Object Delay Timets 3 Bami 5 Cancel TES Mo Figure 1 65 Figure 1 66 E Luminance Change Detection This option may suspend object detection when the lighting condition is poor so as to avoid false detection Use the slide bar to adjust the level of detection Page 64 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System from 1 to 5 The higher the level is the more sensitive the system is to luminance change When luminance change reaches the level you set the system will stop object detection Sensitivity Use the slide bar to increase or decrease detection sensitivity if necessary Delay Time This option allows you to specify the duration of an object missing or unattended to invoke the detection Unattended Object The duration is from 3 to 1800 seconds with 3 seconds as default For example suppose you choose 12 seconds When an unattended object appears in the camera view for 12 seconds its location will be highlighted Missing Object The duration is from 3 to 1800 seconds with 3 seconds as default For example suppose you choose 9 seconds When a defined object disappears from the camera view for 9 seconas its location will be highlighted Invoke Alarm Enables the computer alarm when any unattended and or missing objects are detected Click the button next to the item to assign a wav sound file
2. Yes Sw Type System iad iV Message Start Time lv Message Time C Date Time Both RET aie 112 30 11715 2006 11 33 57 1111812006 12 30 00 Date C Time Both A a a F 7 canal 11 15 2008 11 33 57 m 1118 2008 11 33 57 cae Start Time 11 15 2006 11 33 57 Remove Selected Command Export Import Message Time 1141512006 11 33 57 Add New Command o g Type Message System Read Yes 4 e Al Yes Figure 9 23 Eventlog Filter Filters Read Searches the events read in Center V2 Clipboard Searches the events with alarm reports Flag Searches the events flagged important Clip Searches the events containing video attachments ID Searches the events from a specific subscriber Type Message Searches the events based on the nature of events Searches the events by keywords Message Time Searches the events by the arriving time or date to Center V2 Start Time Searches by the starting time of the events occurred at the subscriber site Applying Multiple Filters Click the Add New Command button to add a new filter command When you click OK all events matching the defined commands This option allows you to define several filter commands for search will be listed on the Event Log Browser Removing Filters Select the filter comman
3. Cross over RS232 GV System USB dongle Printer 2 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD to the POS system It will run automatically and a window appears Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System 4 Select the Software POS Driver Only for Graphic mode POS System and follow on screen instructions to complete the installation 5 Goto Windows Start point to Programs select DVR POS and then click DVR POS Driver The following window appears MEE Start Service E End Service ok connected Figure 3 1 POS Data Sender 6 Click Start Service and then select the COM port to send graphic data to the GV System Note The GV System must be configured and ready for this application To set up the GV System see Setting a POS System below Page 129 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application Setting a POS System To connect a POS system to GV System follow these steps 1 Click the Configure button point to POS Application Setting and then select POS Device Setup The POS Sever Setup window appears POS Server Setup x Per Modity delete Text Setup cancer Figure 3 2 POS Server Setup 2 Click the New button in the upper part of the window The following dialog box appears Printer Type Seria Port Device Pos 1 Mapping camerat y Camera camera 1 POS Module Epson COM Por com 9600 Mone 8 1 e Cash Drawer open signal Modue 1
4. Initial Screen Select screen divisions at startup Polling Time Specify the camera polling time from 1 to 60 seconds Server Status Refresh Time Specify the refresh time to update the host information Camera Status Refresh Time Specify the refresh time to update the camera information Folder Path Specify a path to save recorded files Max Video Clip Specify the maximum time length of each recorded file to be 30 or 60 minutes The default time length is 30 minutes Caption Select what kind of caption to display on the monitoring window ID camera ID Name camera name No no display Enable DirectDraw The DirectDraw is enabled by default Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted frames In this case disable this function Fast Key Click the View button to display the fast key table of the Multi View Refer to Fast Key Reference later in this chapter Page 227 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Creating a Quick Connection to a Host Server To create a quick connection to a new host server click the Edit Host button No 8 Figure 6 29 This displays the following window Host List Host Informations Host Protection Host 1 Single Host C Multiple Host Host Name Host 2 IP Address 127001 User Name Supervisor Password e Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Port esso HTTP Port fso Server Dectection DYR C video Server Change P
5. M iO Alarm Notify M Alert Sound Auto Snapshot File Path cawinntaviFiles Browser aroei Figure 6 23 Alarm Notification Motion Notify The Viewer will pop up as soon as motion is detected I O Alarm Notify The Viewer will pop up as soon as I O devices are triggered Alert Sound Enable the computer noise alarm on motion and alarm activation Auto Snapshot The program will take a snapshot every 5 seconds on motion and alarm activation m File Path Assign a path to save the snapshots 2 Click OK to apply the above settings Minimize your IE browser to test the pop up function Exporting Video Click the File Save button No 6 Figure 6 20 to save video in a client PC Files saved in AVI format are playable at third party viewers PTZ Control Click the Camera Select button to select one PTZ camera and then click the PTZ Control button No 3 Figure 6 20 to bring up the PTZ control panel Page 216 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Figure 6 24 PTZ control panel One PTZ camera only allows one user to control at a time If several users are trying to control the same PTZ camera at the same time the Single View viewer will give the priority to the first login user and then to the next user in queue Each user will be given 60 seconds to control the PTZ camera The Timer at the upper right corner informs the user of the remaining time of control or the total waiting time
6. Module 1 Output Alert Message Notfor sale conc Figure 3 13 Eg To trigger an alarm when the defined text is detected during the transaction click the Loss This dialog Enable Alarm Check this item to send out an alarm when the identified text is detected Alarm Output and output device Alert Message alarm is triggered 4 Click OK to save the above settings Check this item and use the drop down lists to select the connected module Type the message for the E mail or SMS alerts to be sent out when the When the defined text is identified in the transaction data the identification appears not only on the Main Screen but also on the POS Live View window It is also recorded in the System Log cv 800 LL EH EE EH EEE is Note ont WS OE D07 mae TTE Dim Page 140 BOA a maid SU A a 15 j a ID Time paes a E Login coa POS 1 Device1 POS9 it Content 2006 5 00 Figure 3 14 33 12 7 2006 3 34 91 33 12 7 2006 3 34 51 33 12 7 2006 3 34 92 33 12 7 2006 3 34 92 33 12 7 2006 3 34 53 33 12 7 2006 3 34 93 2 33 12 7 2006 3 34 54 133 12 7 2006 3 34 54 1 33 12 7 2006 3 34 99 33 12 7 2006 3 34 95 me 33 12 7 2006 3 34 56 33 1217 2006 3 34 56 127 C 33 12 7 2006 3 34 56 33 12 7 2006 3 34 96 33 12 7 2006 3 34 97 33 12 7 2006 3 34
7. Connect to Remote Viewlog Service 2 IP Address Port 5552 Default ID Guest Password Save Password Host Type Add current entry to Address book under this group Address book Connect Cancel Figure 6 48 Page 239 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 5 Type the IP Address ID and Password of the remote GV System Keep the default port as 5552 or modify it if necessary 6 Inthe Host Type field select DVR 7 Click the Connect button When the connection is established you will see the video player ViewLog appears on the screen Then you can access all ViewLog features for playback POS Live View on WebCam Through WebCam Server it is possible to monitor the surveillance sites of POS or access control systems You can access not only live video but also transaction data or cardholder information 1 Open a browser and type the address of the remote GV System The Compression Selection page Figure 6 16 appears Select POS Live View and click the Submit button The remote POS Live View window appears 3 Click the Play button and type the valid user name and password to start the connection The Remote POS Live View Window 1 50 1 00 Play ITEM YOID Ice Cream 5 00 74 40 74 40 38 04 74 40 ITEMS PURCHASED 31 Thank You FOR TESTING AND SAVING WITH US Figure 6 49 Page 240 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam The controls on the remot
8. No Name Description 1 Open Opens an event log 2 Reload Selects Reload All Table or Reload Current Table to refresh loaded data Filter Defines the search criteria 4 Backup Selects All Tables to back up all log data or selects Current Table to back up the current log table you are at 5 Print Prints the current log table 6 Monitor Table Displays the monitor log 7 System Table Displays the system log Page 156 10 11 12 Login Table Counter Table POS Table POS List Exit Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Displays user s login logout log Displays the counter log Displays the POS log Accesses one POS channel for log data Exits the browser In the Advanced Log Browser Window double clicking the Monitor Log list or the POS Log list will allow you to view related video in Quick Search Screen as shown in Figure 4 17 Quick Search is a very useful tool for searching and playing back video files that were based on motion detection alarm or POS events The following figure and table give you an overview on Quick Search s features and functional buttons Yv ITEMS PURCHASED 2 Camera 3 Thank You FOR TESTING AND SAVING WITH US St STORE Rg 1 Ch 1234 Tr 2063 Ca a 16 21 KREEE 05 05 04 3 412005 E faas H a ALYPSO EMO VERSION CALYPSO 3 2 K lt tran K Void D EEA day hr min sec Figure 4 17 Quick Search The controls on the Quick Search window
9. Trigger Setting le Trigger Associated Outputs Default OK Cancel Figure 2 17 Display Setting You can define the nature of I O devices by colors Note that the setting only affects the Detail style of the Advanced l O List No 4 Figure 2 13 Alarm Level Click the Alarm Level drop down list and select one of the six default colors Fire Smog Vibration Intruder Motion and Emergency For the Level Undefined option select Text Color or Background Color and then click the Input Output drop down list to change its color Trigger Setting m Trigger Associated Outputs Triggers outputs in cascade mode see Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers above Page 116 Chapter 2 I O Applications Configuring the Advanced I O Panel On the panel toolbar click the Configure button and select Panel Setting This dialog box appears Panel Configure x General Startup T Show Quick Link F Start Monitoring Schedule Layout Show Host Name i Use User defined Text Level 1 Level 1 Fire coca Figure 2 18 Startup Show Quick Link Opens the Quick Link window at panel startup Start Schedule Monitoring Starts Mode Schedule at panel startup For details see Setting up Mode Schedule below Layout E Show Host Name Displays the host name of each I O device on the Advanced l O List m Use User defined Text Allows you to modify the text of Alarm Level Figure 2 17 Page 1
10. Figure 6 8 Port The default communication port is 8866 Rpb port This port is used for remote playback feature The default value is 5511 Max connection Specify the number of users that can connect to this server Set the number between 1 and 20 For the details on the mobile phone applications see Remote Viewing with PDA and Remote Viewing with Mobile Phone later in this chapter Page 205 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam IP White List Settings The feature lets you create a list of IP addresses only which are allowed to connect to the WebCam server To enable the function follow the steps below 1 On the main screen click the Network button and then select WebCam Server to display the Server Setup dialog box Figure 6 1 2 Inthe General tab check the Enable IP white list option and then click the Edit button This IP White List window appears IP White List xj 123 12 0 0 12312 040 Y 0 0 0 Add Modify Delete OK Cancel Figure 6 9 IP White List 3 Click Add to enter an IP address or a range of IP addresses For this example only the IP range from 123 12 0 0 to 123 12 0 10 is allowed to connect to WebCam 4 Click Modify to change a created IP address Click Delete to delete a created IP address Click OK to apply the settings UPnP Settings WebCam Server supports UPnP technology Universal Plug and Play to allow automatic port configuration to yo
11. Figure 9 20 Settings for Panic Button Panic Button Assigns an installed input device to be the panic alarm button m Trigger by I O Assigns an input module and a pin number Output Module Enables an assigned output module when the panic button is pressed For this example when the panic button Module 1 Pin 1 is pressed the output module Module 3 Pin 4 will be triggered simultaneously Send which Camera s to Center V2 Select which camera video should be sent to Center V2 when the panic alarm button is pressed Connective Port The communication ports used by Center V2 Itis recommended to keep all defaults unless otherwise necessary Page 304 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Detecting Input Status The feature is designed to monitor all inputs for a change of state whenever the subscriber starts the Center V2 monitoring A change from the previously defined state N O to N C or N C to N O will activate an alarm condition Click on the Connect to Center V2 dialog box Figure 9 15 For details see Detecting Input Status in Chapter 2 Event Log Browser The Event Log Browser allows you to locate a desired event coming from subscribers On the Center V2 window click the Event List button No 5 Figure 9 1 and select View Event Log to display the following window Tip You can quickly access the Event Log of a specific subscriber instead of filtering all events Right click one subscriber on
12. ID RemotePlayback Password ALL AL e Save the Connective Record Path CiDbocuments and SettingsttestbADesktopiRPI Port 5066 Default b End connection when idle more than 30 minutes Maximum Users 16 W Enable IP white list Edit hMaxirmurn Speed 100 KBytes Sec e Enhance network security Cancel Figure 4 32 Auto Run when Start Windows Automatically starts RPB Server at Windows startup Enter an ID and a password that are allowed to use the server Save the Connective Record Check to create a log that keeps the login and logout status of the server Type a storage path in the Path field Port The default port is 5066 To automatically configure the port on your router by UPnP technology click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings Chapter 6 in the User s Manual End connection when idle more than x minute s Stops the connection after the assigned idle minutes Maximum Users One RPB Server allows the maximum of 16 connections You can determine the maximum number of client PCs allowed to log in your RPB Server Enable IP White List Check the item and click Edit to create a list of IP addresses only which are allowed to access the RPB server For the setting details see P White List Settings in Chapter 6 Bandwidth Control Check to prevent overloading on slow network You can set the bandwidth from O to 100 000 Kbytes to transfer in one second Enhance network security
13. Image Ratio and Position Changes the size of the image and its position on the page This option is only available in Single View mode Preserve aspect ratio Click to maintain the aspect ratio when resizing an image m Align to center Click to change the position of the image on the page Page 153 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Text Stamp and Position Select whether to include the host name camera name date and or time stamp on the printed image Select Print note to include a note below the image Under the Print note field type the text of less than 64 characters Stamp position icons Sets the position where the stamp is printed Set Font tab Click to select the font type for the stamp 3 Click OK to save the settings or Print to print out the page Object Search This feature allows you to perform two functions 1 Detect motion missing objects or unattended objects within a certain region of a recorded file 2 Perform the counting function within certain regions in a recorded file The following gives an example of motion detection For details on missing objects unattended objects and counting refer to Configuring Object Counting and Detecting Unattended and Missing Objects in Chapter 1 1 Select a desired video file from the Video Event list for the search Or select multiple files by clicking on each file while keeping pressing CTRL on the keyboard 2 Click the Tools button No 15 Figure 4 2
14. OSD Setting gt if Show Camera Number color Y Cancel Figure 1 96 Use the drop down list to select the TV monitor and press the 4 direction buttons U L R and D to adjust the positions of the divisions on the monitor screen To display the camera number on the TV monitor select the desired TV monitor and check the Show Camera Number option To display the camera numbers on all connected TV monitors check the Show Camera Number option and then click the finger button To change the color of the camera number indicator on the TV monitor use the Color drop down list to select the desired color DIV 1 16 In the TV Quad Setting window see Figure 1 94 there are screen division options You can modify the channel sequence by typing the number directly on each division Click OK or Apply Current TV Setting to apply your configurations Page 87 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Right Arrow Button Sets the channel sequence of each scanned page Click the arrow button to display this dialog box Div 16 Page setting Ed E Ea Default Empty page Cancel Figure 1 97 Screen Division Displays the channel sequence You can modify the sequence by typing the number directly on each division lt gt Buttons Navigates pages Empty page Clears up the channel sequence on the open page Setting Pop up Camera Windows The pop up camera windows on the screen notify users of the curr
15. The System Idle Protection allows the administrator to work on the system without the worry of logout or leaving the system not recording anymore This feature can automatically logout the administrator login a user with no access rights and or start recording Auto Logout Administrator If the administrator does not press the mouse or press a key within a set period of time the system will automatically log him her out 1 Click the Configure button and then select System Idle Protection Setting This dialog box appears System Idle Protection l x System Idle Protection Supervisor fe Auto Monitoring Monitor All le Auto Network Service of Startup Setting Figure 1 101 Page 91 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 2 Enable the Auto Logout or Switch to Startup Login User if available option and then select Supervisor or Supervisor Poweruser from the drop down list 3 In the System Idle Over field type the idle time from 10 to 300 seconds after which Supervisor or Poweruser will be logged out Auto Login User without Access Rights When the system is started up after an idle time a specified user with no access right will login This allows the user to see the system is on and working but at the same time does nothing with the system The feature must work with the Startup Auto Login function 1 Click the Configure button and select System Configure 2 Inthe Startup section enabl
16. Backup Servers You can configure up to two backup servers in case of the primary Center V2 server failure Whenever the primary fails the backup server takes over the connection from subscribers providing uninterrupted monitoring services 1 To import the subscribers accounts from the primary server to the backup server click the Import Export Address Book bution No 6 Figure 9 2 on the Address Book toolbar and select Import to transfer the address book data 2 On the Center V2 window click the Preference Settings button No 10 Figure 9 1 and select Automatic Failover Support This dialog box appears Page 322 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 gt Automatic Failover Support LE Server F Server Port Port ideo L Please add one or more Center Server for redundancy ka purpose in case this server is not available or was offline Figure 9 41 3 Click the Add button to add one server This dialog box appears Automatic Failover Support Server F U server Port Port ideo Serwer Figure 9 42 4 Type the IP Address of the backup server Keep the default port settings or modify them if necessary 5 Click OK Note Once the primary server is ready to resume the services it is required to close the backup server so the connection from subscribers can move back to the primary Page 323 Chapter 10 Short Message SEPrviCe ccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2D INStalliIngG SMS
17. e Video Lost Bit Depth 24 Width 270 and Height 576 To customize the screen image follow these steps 1 Inthe FBR window Figure 11 34 click the Select Skin Style icon point to DVR and then select Custom Logo This window appears Custom Logo Selection Introduction File Path Startup Splash DYR CommRes Splash bmp Non Active Video DYR CommResicamlogo bmp Video Lost DYR CommRes Lost bmp Cancel Figure 11 35 Page 365 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities 2 Click a desired screen image to be replaced with an imported image 3 Exit the FBR program and start the GV System to see the change Customizing the Features Not every feature may be of equal interest to you You can now specify which features are to be displayed at system startup 1 Inthe FBR Window Figure 11 34 click the Customize Features icon to display this dialog box Customize System Functions I xX Feature Description Devices Applications with lO Module installed ee ee VWiave in Device POS Device Monitor Schedule Configure VievyLog Camera Scan Network Det aut Cancel Figure 11 36 Devices Expand this folder and select the device applications you want to enable in the GV System Functions Expand this folder and select the functions you want to enable in the GV System The gray checked boxes indicate that the functions are enabled by default No changes can be made to these func
18. omes Figure 5 3 Backup Information Page 184 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files Click OK if all the information stated is correct This pastes all copied files to the CD writer When the following message appears click OK DMBackUp xj a J Please paste the backup log Files to CDR wWriter program Figure 5 4 Open your CD writer program Right click anywhere on the program interface to call up a menu and then select Paste O x E Nero Express Disc Content Add data to your disc D Add Delete AD Play Select All Add Files Ctrl D Create Folder Total space used S00ME eae ME DOME 400ME 60016 al dee aer As al Figure 5 5 Pasting files Page 185 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files 7 After pasting you can see backup files pasted onto the CD writer program k Nero Express Disc Content Add data to pour disc Le My Disc Bitmap d 79KB Bitmap 1 24 20 79KB Bitmap 1 24 200 a 1824 ViewLog_B FOKB Bitmap 1 24 200 1024 ViewLog_B 79KB Bitmap 1 24200 gt A 1024 ViewLog_F 31KB Bitmap 7 28 200 Pol 1024 viewLog F 31KB Bitmap 7 26200 S 1024 ViewLog_F 31KB Bitmap 7 28 200 B 1024 ViewLog_F 31KB Bitmap 7 28 200 A 1024 ViewLog_F 31KB Bitmap 7 28 200 SA 1024 ViewLog5d 2MB Bitmap 11 14 20 24 V
19. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Total data list 18 Figure 9 21 Event Log Broswer Page 305 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 The buttons on the Event Log Browser No Name Description 1 Open Opens an event log 2 Reload Refreshes the event log manually 3 Start Stop Synchronous EventLog Refreshes the event log automatically 4 Filter Defines the search criteria 5 Refresh the Filter Result Refreshes the filter result 6 Backup Exports the current event list and video files 7 Page Setup Creates header and footer on the printout of Event Log 8 Print Prints the current event list 9 Exit Exits the browser Opening the Event Log Click the Open button No 1 Figure 9 21 to launch the following Open DataBase dialog box Define a time period select the type of log and click OK for search Events matching the search criteria will be loaded to the Event Log Browser window Open Database xX Selectthe period of database to open H6r2004 62004 Mote Select only between 1 52 days Open Type Option f System Log C Backup Log Path CaCentery2iEventLogi E Cancel Figure 9 22 Open Database Filtering the Event Log Click the Filter button No 4 Figure 9 21 to bring up the following Event Log Filter window This option allows you to perform a search based on criteria Page 306 e Read Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 x Match whole word T
20. Account Settings Chapter 10 Short Message Service Click the Account Setting button No 3 Figure 10 1 to display the following window Account Settirig e 8 X 2 4 Address Book E Group 1 2 a fis a E 3 Account Information Motity Yes Mobile 1 006 92063291 7 Mobile 2 BE6 935261 462 Mobile 3 286 930715856 Login IF 127 0 0 1 Login Time 152006 4 06 52 Phi 8 Statistics Group 1 Client 93 5000 Figure 10 6 Account Setting The controls in the Account Setting window No k BjOoO0j n CO Y O Ol Name Add A Group Add A Client Delete A Group Client View Edit A Client Find A Client Address Book Account Information Statistics Description Creates a group Creates a client Deletes a created group or client Highlight one client and click the button to view or edit its information Searches a client Lists the created groups and clients Displays the highlighted client s account information Displays the number of created groups and clients The SMS Server can serve up to 5000 clients at one time Page 331 Chapter 10 Short Message Service Creating a client 1 Click the Add A Client button No 2 Figure 10 6 This dialog box appears Login ID Host 1 Password Cancel Information Country Code Mobile Number fata a 22318098 056 28759603 8586 9354231 Telephone 2228098 FAX 2228097 E mail gvi mgeovision com tw Addres
21. Audio Encoder Bit rate kbps AMF Figure 6 7 RTSP TCP Port The default communication port is 8554 Max Connections Specify the number of users that can connect to this server Set the number to be between 1 and 20 RTP RTCP UDP Port The number of ports is limited to 80 in order to enhance the security of the WebCam server during the connection with the 3G enabled mobile phones The default range of ports is 17300 to 17380 Video Bitrate kbps Select a proper bit rate for video file transmission Larger bit rate means better quality but it also required larger bandwidth m Video Size Select QCIF 176x144 or sub QCIF 128x96 for transmission Larger video size means better quality but it also requires larger bandwidth m FPS Specify the number of frames to be transferred per second Page 204 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Audio E Encoder For narrowband users select AMR and for wideband users select AMR WB Bitrate kbpts Select a proper rate for audio file transmission Note To enable 3G services on your mobile phone consult your network operator Mobile A separate Mobile Server is provided to integrate the configurations of the mobile phone applications Server Setup General Server Video sudo JPG 3GPP Mobile Ca Port atalala Fpb port 3311 Max connection 20 Max FPS 10 For Sen SSYjew Ya Getz MS view Cancel Default
22. Camera 1 sensitivity 1 E MMMmmm Setregion 2 f Mask region B v Luminance change detection Betault Figure 1 87 Advanced Motion Detection Setup Select the desired camera from the drop down list and then check Enable 4 To set detection sensitivity in a specific area select a sensitivity level by moving the slide bar and then drag an area on the image You will be prompted to click Add to save the setting This setup has sensitivity levels from 1 to 5 with 4 as default 5 To create several areas with different sensitivity levels repeat Step 4 If you want to ignore motion in a certain area click Mask Region and then drag an area on the image 7 If you want to ignore motion when the lighting condition is poor check Luminance Change Detection 8 Click OK to save your settings Note 1 This feature must work with the recording mode of Motion Detection click the Configure button point to System Configure click the Camera tab check Rec Video and then select Motion Detect Figure 1 8 2 If you have set up Motion Sensitivity and Mask Filter in the System Configure settings Figure 1 8 note that the configurations of Advanced Motion Detection have priority over these settings Page 80 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Hard Disk Calculator Before actual recording the Hard Disk Calculator allows you to know the required hard disk space and frame size for different types of codecs and qu
23. Dele beta ES Eta te te te tale ba lite Mala lst bela AA MA AO 2006 Dec gt Change to minute mode 10 54 00 10 54 59 Bl Change to hour mode 10 00 00 10 59 59 a Poon te wa We Fa a es OA 3 ls ls le 7 le la o fi fiz fia fia Jis is az 18 19 fzo 21 22 233 24 31 A A E A A A 4 r y Get Event ltem 100 Display Audio Information Rewind Play Close Figure 4 7 Page 148 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files 3 Select a date from the calendar e The date with recorded events is displayed in GREEN color e On the right panel the BLUE blocks indicate which camera has recorded events on the selected date and at which hour 4 Move the mouse pointer on the desired BLUE block and right click it to have the sub Timelines of hour mode and minute mode Three types of timeline modes are available m Change to day mode The default mode displaying at which hour the events have been recorded m Change to hour mode Opens the sub Timeline displaying at which minute the events have been recorded m Change to minute mode Opens the sub Timeline displaying at which second the events have been recorded 5 Click on the BLUE block of the desired time and then click Play or Rewind for playback Exporting Video You can export a certain time period within a video event and play it back at the place where ViewLog is not available The maximum length of the exported file is 1 hour 1 Locate a desired file from the
24. Output Module Activates the output device when any unattended and or missing object is detected Click the button next to the item to assign an installed output module and a pin number Demo Click to see the demonstration from actual DVR applications Page 65 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Object Tracking and Zooming Object Tracking provides you the real time tracking and automatic magnification of a single moving object by the combination of one PTZ camera and one stationary camera If only one PTZ camera is available it can be applied for Object Zooming letting you configure four critical views for real time zooming The Object Tracking and Object Zooming functions can be combined together by completing both settings Object Tracking For the tracking function you need one PTZ camera applied for tracking and one stationary camera set for a fixed view Currently GV System only supports Sensormatic PelcoSpetra and Messoa PTZ Install the PTZ camera and the stationary camera in the best possible closing position so the focus of both could be similar PTZ Setup Before configuring the Object Tracking function first configure the PTZ device 1 Click the Configure button and then select System Configure to display the System Configure window 2 Inthe PTZ Control section click PTZ Device Setup and select Sensormatic Ultra IV PelcoSpetra 3 or Messoa SDS600 series Here we use Sensormatic as example PTE C
25. Setting the Pop up Map Function The E Map Viewer window can be set to pop up with the flashing icon indicating that a camera or an input device is triggered To set up the function follow the steps below 1 Click the Popup Settings button No 1 Figure 7 4 Select desired cameras and input devices for the application and specify Dwell Time for the interval between two pop up maps Click the Toggle Popup button No 2 Figure 7 4 to enable the function Minimize the E Map Viewer window Once any camera or input device is triggered the map will pop up on your screen immediately Starting E Map from a Remote Site Activating and configuring E Map over a web browser is possible by the WebCam server To do so follow the steps below 1 At the local server equipped with the GV System click the Network button and select WebCam Server to display the Server Setup dialog box Click OK to start the WebCam server 2 Atthe client PC open the web browser and type the address of the local server Once the connection is established the WebCam Compression Selection window will appear 3 Select EMap and click Submit to display the E Map window on the client PC Page 261 Chapter 7 E Map Application The Remote E Map Window IP Address 127 0 0 1 Change Es New Map Anew York E Taiwan Kaohsiung Taipei p ye Output 1 Camera 1 1 Oi ti ian Camera 4 a Camera 2 Input 1 Camera 7 Qu A
26. 1 Authorized Password E Enhance network security Enable IP White List Endit server Setting Auto start service when server startup e Motif when DWF disconnected from server Figure 11 29 Sever Setup Network Setting The default port number is 3663 Using UPnP for automatic port configuration to your router click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings in Chapter 6 Authorized ID and Password The ID and password entered will be those for the local DVRs to log in the server m Enhance network security Enable to enhance network security on Authentication Server E Enable IP White List Create a list of IP addresses allowed to connect to Authentication Server For details see P White List Settings in Chapter 6 Server Setting Auto start service when server startup Starts automatically the service when Windows Starts m Notify when DVR disconnected from server Notifies the Authentication Server with a pop up window when the DVR and server loss connection Click OK to apply above settings Click the Start Stop Service button No 5 Figure 11 25 to start the connection Page 360 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Connecting GV System to the Server To configure the GV System in order to access the Authentication Server remotely through a network connection follow these steps 1 Click the Configure button point to Password Setup and then select Remote Authentication Setup This dia
27. 1 logout 1 26 2005 1 47 19 PM Login Logout 1 1P 127 0 0 1 login 1 26 2005 1 47 21 PM System System Change server setting Server Setting 1 26 2005 1 48 28 PM 1 Connection The connection of client 1 1P 127 0 0 1 is abnormal 1 26 2005 2 09 50 PM 1 Login Logout 1 1P 127 0 0 1 logout 1 26 2005 2 09 50 PM 1 Login Logout 1 IP 127 0 0 1 login 1 26 2005 2 10 05 PM 1 Login Logout 1 1P 127 0 0 1 logout 1 26 2005 2 10 21 PM Figure 10 9 Password Security To prevent unauthorized users from changing your settings set up an administrator password To apply the password security follow these steps 1 Click the Exit button No 6 Figure 10 1 and then select Change Password to set a password 2 Click the Exit button and select Logout Administrator to lock the SMS Server window 3 When you want to log in click the Exit button and select Login as Administrator A valid password is required Connecting GV System to SMS Server To connect the GV System to the SMS Server follow these steps 1 Inthe Main System click the Configure button and then select System Configure to display the System Configure window 2 Inthe Send Alerts Approach section click the right arrow button to display this dialog box Send Alerts Approach Setup i X Alternative Alert Approach f SWS Interval 10 a Main Account Setting Test Account Figure 10 10 Send Alerts Approach Setup 3 Check the Alternative Alert Ap
28. 11 System Settings Startup Setting m Extended Server Activates Extended Server on TwinDVR startup WebCam Server Activates WebCam Server on TwinDVR startup System Setting m TwinDVR resume Resumes TwinDVR connection when the system shuts down unexpectedly Page 347 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Watermark Viewer You can make a watermark proof to protect videos from unauthorized alteration or manipulation In Main System click the Configure button select System Configure and then check Use Digital Watermark Protection option This allows all recorded videos to be marked with a permanent and inseparable image The watermark is invisible to naked eyes In order to see it the video stream must be open in a watermarking verification program by following these steps 1 Goto the system folder and locate WMProof exe File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Back gt r wi a Search Io Folders z Address D 1GY650 Go SJ AAN dll S zc_5122 d l zoomin gif unanel w zoomout gif GS xsvr exe 3 ZuMJMux dll Figure 11 12 2 Double click to open the program This displays the following Watermark Viewer window fe ven ooo 00 gt es A r a Check sum Original Extracted C C File Name Fass Failed Checksum F Multicam logicamOdicamodd 20h Event20051 2061408260 Pass Fimulticara logicamOdicamoad 1 206 Event20051 2061411480 Pass Fimulticarn logi
29. 97 33 12 7 2006 3 34 98 33 12 7 2006 3 34 98 33 12 7 2006 3 34 99 33 12 7 2006 3 34 59 dd ea s ea 39 008 m 116 kelloga s cereal 2 99 117 kraft cheese 1 99T 118 treeton juice 2 99T 119 krispy donuts 0497 120 farmeriohn hotdog 10 121 Void me farmeriohn hotdoa 10 124 Req4582 16 Item 125 Total 21112170 126 Cash 211170 70 7 Change 49 00 000 2006 12 07 15 37 28 8 001 2005 09 14 17 54 Sho 002 1 000000 208 Paq 003 coke 6pack 1000 004 minute maid 1001 005 oreo cookie 10007 006 farmeriohn hotdog 10 O07 fosters coffee 1000 ilky way chocolat 10 06660 ros 6 112 minute maid 1U6 1 113 oreo cookie 1000T 114 quaker oatmeal 1 50T 115 campell soup 1 99T 116 kellogg s cereal 2 99T 117 kraft cheese 1 99T 118 treetop juice 2 99T 119krispy 0 49T 120 farmerjohn hotdog 1000T 121 Void 122 farmerjohn hotdog 1000T 123 124 Reg4582 16 Item 125 Total 211121 70 126 Cash 211170 70 127 Change 49 00 000 200611 2 07 15 37 28 890 001 2005 09 14 17 54 Shop 01 002 1 000000 208 Page 1 003 coke Bpack 1000T 004 minute maid 100 T 005 oreo cookie 1000T 006 farmerjohn hotdog 1000T 007 fosters coffee 1000T 008 milky way chocolat 1000T 009 Void You can set the maximum of 32 keywords for identification Chapter 4 Playing Back Video FIleS 142 Playing Back ON VIEWED a 142 Playback screen kayit eanna A 145 Playpack DORIA ds 146 PATO B Playpack
30. Channel Status window Camera Polling Function To add cameras to the polling group 1 Click the Add Channel button and then click the monitoring windows The selected windows will be framed in red color 2 Click the Video Polling button The application will rotate the selected cameras in the specified time To configure the polling time see Figure 6 34 To remove one camera from the polling group click the Remove Channel button and then click its monitoring window Two Way Audio The two way audio in Multi View functions similarly to the one in Single View MPEG4 Encoder Viewer See Two Way Audio earlier in this chapter for further details Page 226 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Multi View Configuration Click the Configure button No 7 Figure 6 29 to display the following window Startup Initial Screen Division Default Video Polling Folling time 30 Sec Default server Status Server Status Refresh Time Never gt Minute Default Camera Status Camera Status Refresh Time Never y Minute Default Save Folder Path E1456 Browse Max Video Clip 30 Minute Default Enable DirectDraw M Enable DirectDraw Enable De Block Enable De Interlace FP i0 Name Auto Search Port Setting TORPIP 5201 Multicast 5200 Video Server 15001 Full Screen Quality Best Quality Fast Key Audio View Fast y OK Figure 6 34 The Configure Window
31. Counter Application Object Monitor and POS Application separately Note To select the type of notification see Send Alerts Approach earlier in this chapter Page 12 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System EventLog Size Determines the amount of time from 1 to 5 minutes of each event file If you select 5 Min a 30 minute event will be chopped into six 5 minute event files if you select 1 Min a 30 minute event will be chopped into thirty 1 minute event files To decide what to set up here consider how often you back up your event files and how intensive the activity is in your surveillance area Smaller file size makes backup process faster Camera Scan Select to rotate through screen divisions Click the drop down list and specify the amount of time that elapses before switching to the next screen division group Press the Arrow button to select the mode of screen divisions Video Record Click to watermark all recorded videos Watermark is a way to verify the authenticity of video streams and to ensure that they have not been tampered with or modified in any way Adjusting Individual Camera Select any camera tab to make change only to the selected camera Choose the Configure button System Configure Camera XX XX represents camera number to display this dialog box System Configure Camera E Camera 3 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 LO Device HotLine Net
32. Enable to enhance Internet security Please note when the feature is enabled the subscribers using earlier version than 7 0 cannot access the RPB any more Page 171 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Working with Remote Playback Client at the Client PC RPB Client software is to be installed at the client PC and the software is included in the Surveillance System Software CD Install and execute Remote Playback Client Site Camera views from different servers may be displayed in a single 16 channel screen view Clicking the Page Select button turns the screen view to the next page Maximum two pages total 32 channels may be displayed in one RPB Client TEST48 Camera 4 A i TEST48 Camera 3 ni we 5 TEST48 Camera ye i ls f ji f mp B Figure 4 33 Page 172 The controls in the RPB Client No Name O O NJNJ DO OI BA ODIN O i i i i NI O O1 amp PO Camera Name Camera View Connect Disconnect Download Play Remote Video Play Local Video View List Connection Record Address Book Preference Setting Save As AVI Save As BMP Exit Scroll Bar Playback Panel Page Select Screen Division Connecting to RPB Server Click the Connection button on RPB Function Panel No 3 Figure 4 36 Connect to dialog box Enter the login information Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Description Indicates the
33. Figure 1 105 2 Check Lock Sensitive Fast Key and check the fast keys you want to disable To restore the fast keys uncheck them again 3 Click OK to apply your settings Page 95 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Fast Key Reference This option lets you view the fast key windows of Main System and PTZ Control giving you an instant reference Click the Configure button point to Tool Kit and then select Fast Key List to display the fast key table of Main System Click Close to display the table of PTZ Control Main System Jos Space Bar Page 96 Key Esc Num 1 9 0 and F1 F6 or Alt 01 Alt 16 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 A a R r Ctrl R M m T t W w i V v S S G g C c Ef L O 0 Q q Ctrl Q W E A S D Z X Z Z X X K k Page Up Page Down Ctrl Num 1 9 0 and F1 F6 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Function Return to the default screen Switch the camera channel Start Stop monitoring Start Stop monitoring schedules Open the System Configure Setup dialog box Open ViewLog Start Stop the camera scan function Enable Disable all network connections Display the version information Restart by Last Settings Restart by Startup Settings Start Stop modem connection Start Stop TCP IP connection Start Stop WebCam connection Start Stop IP Multicast connection Start Stop connection to Center V2 Start Stop TwinServer Start Stop connectio
34. Figure 2 26 Note Highlighting Advanced I O List in the Advanced I O List you can import another image System Wide Triggers The System Wide feature gives privileges to remote applications such as Center V2 and VSM to force the outputs in the Main System for cascade triggers For this example the System Wide feature is enabled in Output 1 When the VSM operator manually forces Output 1 Output 2 3 and 4 will be triggered in a cascade series If the System Wide feature is disabled the operator can only force Output 1 without cascade triggers e Elevators Output 1 System Wide Output 2 Output 3 Output4 Figure 2 27 To enable this feature right click an output at the top level and then select System Wide Output Page 121 Chapter 2 I O Applications The Advanced Logical Input Status in Mutlicam Option If you already set a specific input to trigger a specific output in the Main System you can decide whether to apply the simple input trigger output setting in the Advanced l O Panel For example you have set a simple access system in the Main System Input 2 card reader triggers Output 3 the door opens But to tighten security you may set a group Garage in the Advanced I O Panel alarm and Output 3 the door opens in a cascade series Input 2 ug Name Input 2 Monitor Input Rec ideon W Invoke Alarm Invoke to Send Alerts Signal Type G L
35. Function Key Esc Enter Back Space Num 1 9 O and F1 F6 Ctrl Num 1 9 O and F1 F6 Ctrl F8 Ctrl B Ctrl D F7 F8 F9 F10 Alt M Alt N Alt P B b D d F f K k P p Q q Page 180 Exit Play Pause Rewind Pause Stop Switch the camera channel Switch the audio channel Display Hide the Basic Search dialog box Display Hide the Backup dialog box select an event on the Event List Display Hide the Delete dialog box select an event on the Event List Switch between single and mutli views Display Hide the Advance Search dialog box Display Hide the Event List window Connect to Remote ViewLog Service Turn the sound on off Go to the next event Go to the previous event Display Hide the Backup dialog box Display Hide the Delete dialog box Start Stop full screen view Display the Fast Key Reference table Print the image Switch the screen division R r S S Page Up Page Down Home End K Delete Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Reload video event list Display Hide the Save AVI File dialog box Move one frame back Move one frame forward Go to the first frame Go to the last frame Zoom in Zoom out Increase playback speed Decrease playback speed Delete events Page 181 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files 183 Backing Up Files Using Backup SySteim cccccceceeeeesssssseeeseesssseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeneessenneeeeneees 183 Ba
36. Login Host Name TEST101 TEST 102 TEST 103 TEST 104 TEST 105 TEST 106 togn Togu Figure 7 6 Logging in different hosts Page 263 Chapter 7 E Map Application Configuring the Remote E Map Window Click the Configure button No 7 Figure 7 5 to display the following dialog box Download EMap files Lise local EMap files l CiProgram Fileswed 0MEMapires Program Fileswed 0MEMapires Figure 7 7 The Configure window Download EMap files Click to download E Map files from the local server to the client PC This option can reduce network load when you want to view E Maps of multiple hosts Use local EMap files Once downloading E Map files to the client PC you can use these E Map files for connection Hide Tree List Check to hide the tree list Enable DirectDraw The DirectDraw is enabled by default Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted frames In this case disable the feature Motion I O Input Alert Sound Check this option and assign a wav file to alert the operator when motion is detected or I O devices are triggered Camera Blink I O Blink When cameras or I O devices are triggered their icons on the E map flash Uncheck this option if you don t want to see the flashing icons EMap Auto Popup When cameras or I O devices are triggered the related map will pop up on the screen instantly Check this option and minimize the Remote E Map win
37. MI ia 147 Seal Ching a Video EVE ia 147 Timeline Se arcada ado 148 EXPONO VISO iii A AAA AAA AS AA AS 149 SAVING MAJE S uo tio pela ceca sio clicar 152 PANUNG MATES dida 153 ODE a ne E 154 Searching and Playing Back Motion Alarm and POS Event ooooocccnccccnccnnoncccnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 156 A 158 Recycling Option for Video Files orinar A ated 164 Unmarking All Never Recycling FlagS occcccoccccconcccccocconcconnnnconnononnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnos 164 Reserving Never Recycling F AgS ooccccooccnococonnonoconcnnnononononannncnnonnnnnnnannnnonannnnonannaninnns 164 Playing Back over Local Area Network LAN cccccssssseeseeseeseeeseeeeeeaseeeeaseeseeeseeseeeaeessoens 165 Playing Back over Internet Using Control Center Server sseccsseeeeeeeeseesseeeeeeeeeeenneeeeees 167 ACCESSING the Remote VIEW LOG cua bauidady bexioadgieeal pact bcuidaae tev eadd ieidindcvateate 167 VIEWING GONMECHON SLAM Sica sire ice daa 168 RESUMO Baca il aa aS 168 Playing Back over Internet Using Remote Playback cccccsssssseeeesesesseeeeeeeenseeseeeenseeeeees 170 Working with Remote Playback Server at the Server PC cccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaes 170 Working with Remote Playback Client at the Client PC cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 172 TOUEN Sereen SUD OOM ainda 179 Fast Key ReTerencO ii is 180 Page 141 Recorded files can be played back using five different
38. Net Card Box and GV IO Box Check whether the power adapter is properly connected to GV IO Box 4 Amessage No PTZ Device Installed or Default PTZ Device not Activate appears gt Make sure the Active option is enabled in Main System See PTZ Control Panel in Chapter 1 When multiple PTZ cameras are installed make sure to activate each PTZ camera individually Page 372 Troubleshooting Software 1 How to upgrade to the latest version gt Download the latest version from GeoVision website http www geovision com tw english 5 O asp 2 Recycle mode doesn t work and recording stops gt Exit Main System and run RepairLog500 exe from the system folder to fix this problem gt Check Properties of the folder used for saving video files Make sure the Read Only option is disabled 3 Passwords are lost Cannot access my GV System gt See Setting Up for Password in Chapter 1 for details 4 A message Directdraw overlay fail appears gt Make sure your VGA card meets the GV System s minimum requirement that is NVIDIA GeForce ll MX 32MB gt The driver included in your VGA card package may not be the latest and might not support Directdraw Visit related websites and upgrade your VGA driver to the latest version gt Disable the Directdraw feature if you do not wish to upgrade your VGA card or driver See Configuring Global Recording Parameters in Chapter 1 5 Shifted horizontal lines appear
39. Option tab to display this window SMS Setup Connection Setup Mobile Setup SMS Option SMS Alert Setup SMS Alert Interval 1000 Min Figure 9 35 7 Inthe SMS Alert Setup field set the interval between 0 and 1440 minutes For details on SMS Server see Chapter 10 Short Message Service in this manual Connecting to SMS Server On the Center V2 window click the SMS button No 6 Figure 9 1 and then select Connect to SMS Server for connection Page 316 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Sending SMS Once the connection of SMS Server and Center V2 is established there are several ways to send SMS messages to subscribers See the Center V2 window for the following selections Click the SMS button No 6 Figure 9 1 and select Send Short Message This sends SMS to an individual subscriber manually On the Subscriber List No 4 Figure 9 1 right click one subscriber and select Send Short Message This sends SMS to an individual subscriber manually On the Event List double click one Event Type except Attachment to call up a message window Click the Send Short Message icon on the window This sends SMS to an individual subscriber manually Right click one display channel and select Send Short Message This sends SMS to an individual subscriber manually Click the Preference Settings button No 10 Figure 9 1 and select Notification to display the Alarm Settings wind
40. Quo Input 2 Input 3 VIVID Figure 7 5 The Remote E Map Window The controls in the Remote E Map window No Name 1 Login 2 Host Information Previous Home Next ViewLog Configure Tree List IP Address 10 Flashing Icon O CO NI OO oO AJ 11 Output Icon 12 Camera Dome Icon Page 262 Description Click to login up to 500 host servers Click to view the information of incoming events upon motion detected and I O devices triggered Click to go to the previous E Map file Click to back to the top of the tree view Click to go to the next E Map file Click to access the Remote ViewLog function Click to configure the Remote E Map window The list displays all created E Map files and folders Displays the IP Address of the connected host The flashing icon represents a triggered camera or I O device Click to manually force the output device Click to view the live video associated with that camera dome Chapter 7 E Map Application Logging in Different Hosts When the client PC connects to the WebCam server all the E Maps saved in the local server will be downloaded to the client PC with the E Map files of 500 hosts at most The E Maps created for remote hosts can only function on WebCam after you log in these hosts You can login 500 hosts at a time Click the Login button No 1 Figure 7 5 to display the following Login window Fedlogin x Host Login Host Logout Host Mame Auto
41. Schedule iia ada 50 HO A A A A 50 SA AA A A E 50 PTZ COntrol Parla A A a a AAA A A AA 51 AUto SWiehihgP TZ Control Panel dia lr idiota todic ies 52 PTZ AUTO MalON aid aa 53 TOUGH SCIECI SUPPO aiiai iiaeaa ll aia 54 PUZ ane lO Controlan aa adicta 54 TOUCH Screen Pa noel use 55 Retrieving Images Using Object INdeX ccccccseesseeeeeeenseeeeeeeesseeeeeoeenseeeeeoeenseeeseonanseeeseoensseessoes 56 ODI SCE MMS le SA 56 KIVE 1 Game nramntees ty ene etree rte Nee ie are re tert cane ne ne Aa aE aia 57 OBEC index Sede doit dead dele 58 Face Detecta 60 Detecting Unattended and Missing Objects ccoonnnncicconncccccccnccancnncnnonanoncnnnnnnncnrnnnnannnrrenananrrnnnnnns 61 Detecting Unattended ODbjectS occcccccccccoconncnnnccncononnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnncononnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenanennnss 61 Detecta MissM ODIECIS nein a 63 ODject Tracking and ZOOMING syssel naaa aaia eaaa a aaau 66 ODECE NACK rreja a a E 66 Starting ODect Tracking erae e N aa en e 70 ZOOMING e e a E T tecalanatcs 70 AU A ete 71 Staring OB SCLLO0O0 MINO ata cas 73 CONTIQUEINO Hybrid Cam ras is 74 Privacy Mask Protectio cian 75 Seno WO PAVO Mas e i de iS 76 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas oooooooonnccnccccconnonccononocononnancnnnnnnonannncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 76 Scene Change DeEteCuOMn aii a neni hte aen 78 Advanced Motion DEE CON ancianidad 80 Hard DISK Calculator up ea aa aaae Taaa a a aa E aa 81 DSP SPOFMONNOr CONTONE cani id
42. Server button and then select Use Multicast Mode The Multicast mode is now activated The Multicast Server is to instruct TwinDVR to obtain video streams from the virtual buffer If there are five TwinDVRs connected to the network all TwinDVRs will be required to select the Use Multicast Mode option TwinDVR Settings Network Card Settings In Figure 11 8 click the Setting button and then select Network Setting to display the following dialog box The Network Setting option is only necessary when your TwinDVR has more than one network card Check Assign IP and select one network card This will automatically bring up Blind IP of the network card The network card will be used for connecting to TwinServer the other network card will be assigned for connecting to Internet If you want the TwinDVR to automatically reconnect to TwinServer check Retry until connected and set the time interval TwinD R Setting Network Setting Bind IP 192 168 0 108 e Assign IP bis 5 0 driver Connection Broken Retry Interval 10 canes Figure 11 10 TwinDVR Setting Page 346 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities System Settings In Figure 11 8 click the Setting button and then select System Configure to display the following dialog box The option is only available when TwinDVR is connecting to TwinServer System Configure X Startup Setting W Extended Server le WebCam Server System Setting cance Figure 11
43. System iy H video Log Customize menu Figure 11 20 Password Click to change the password For the option of Allow Removing Password System see Setting up Password in Chapter 1 Export Token This option is discussed in Token File for Save Mode later in this chapter System Menu The menu lets you rename system programs Select a desired program and click the Edit button to change its name Customized Menu The menu lets you add other programs to the Programs menu Click the Add button to display the following window In the Target field type a path or click the button next to the field to assign a path Then enter the program name comment or even change an icon for the program Finally click OK to add the program Page 354 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities AAA Name Paint Target Cw NNT systema AAMS PAINT EKE T Comment Microsfat Paint My Change Icon cres Figure 11 21 Desktop Type Select Windows or GV desktop Multicam from the drop down menu The selected desktop will launch the next time when you log in to PC Log Off Click the Log off button to log off GV desktop A valid ID and password are required Shut Down Click the Shut Down button to shut down your computer A valid ID and password are required Task Manager Click the Task Manager button to view the programs currently running on your computer When you minimize a program it will be hiding and working
44. Use the directional zoom in zoom out focus in focus out buttons to control the PTZ camera The Timer has the same functions as the one in the Single View MPEG4 Encoder Viewer The supervisor is given the highest priority to control PTZ in Multi View and won t be restrained by 60 second time limit When the supervisor logs in Multi View the Timer will show 999 Page 224 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam The Option button lets you direct the PTZ camera to a preset position and configure the speed of the PTZ camera up to five levels Switch eji E Timer The Option button Figure 6 31 PTZ control panel Output Control 1 2 3 Click the I O Control button No 5 Figure 6 29 Turn the switch to ON position Select a module from the drop down list Each module provides 4 to 16 connected relay output devices Click the Output x button to enable the output device Switch O EI 7 WI tc E Imer Module 1 y Figure 6 32 I O Control Panel Page 225 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Channel Status Information When choosing a camera from the Host Server window or the monitoring window the general information of the selected camera will be displayed in the Channel Status Window as shown below Host name Camera name IP Address of the GV Server Bandwidth used for delivering this video Displayed frame rate of the video Status Figure 6 33 The
45. W Enable Mask Figure 1 71 Select Define Object Size from the drop down menu Use the mouse to outline the max and min object sizes for tracking separately Every time when finishing the outlining you will be prompted to enter Maximum Object Size or Minimum Object Size See the illustration below Maximum Object Size Minimum Object Selection Els Zoom In Object Live tunia ee a E am W Enable task Figure 1 72 Click the Object Tracking item and specify Track Time sec Track Time sec indicates the tracking duration in seconds Selection Object Tracking Track Time sec C Zoom In Object E Figure 1 73 Page 69 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 10 11 When the PTZ is tracking you can still control it to zoom in a desired area Click the Zoom in Object item and specify Idle Time sec Idle Time sec indicates the zooming duration in seconds lf a target appears after the specified idle time the PTZ will start tracking If not the PTZ will remain on the zoomed place selection Object Tracking Idle Tirmetsecy f Zoom In Object 10 Figure 1 74 Click the Test button to check your settings There are two major settings you have to observe in the testing 1 Tracking Observe if the target showing in the defined detection region is being tracked with a highlighted mask and magnified automatically in the left screen If not increase the sensitivity degree 2 Zooming Use the m
46. a desired camera for setup Or click the finger button to apply the displayed settings to all cameras Standard ideo Attributes x Camera 1 Brightness Ma Contrast liza Mas Mas Saturation 120 120 120 120 Hue Detautt E Cancel Figure 1 36 AGC Auto Gain Control Adjusting AGC help boost weak video signals or reduce strong video signals and gives optimized image quality The adjustment could be done manually or automatically When a video signal is weak for example due to distance adjusting the brightness or contrast of the video source will NOT help the situation Adjust AGC and see the difference Depending on the model purchased this feature may or may not be available Page 37 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System In the Auto Gain Control window click Auto for auto adjustment click Default to apply default values or click Apply to apply the displayed settings The default value is set to 1 15V 115 but you may move the slider bar to adjust between 0 3V 30 or 2 5V 250 Advanced Video Attributes This feature lets you know the image size after quality and image adjustment Mulitcam Advanced Yideo Attributes x Mutticam WebCam Centerv2 Control Center Camera 1 r T Codec Selection ceo Mpeqd At Original Image eal laos Image E Advanced Setting Brightness m E Recording Quality 4 F contrast Image Size Saturation ca Defaut Ke
47. alarm and output will be activated and the event will be recorded in System Log for later retrieval Detecting Missing Objects To detect any object missing from the camera view follow the steps below 1 Sr PL e w by 7 8 Follow the step 1 to 4 in the above Detecting Unattended Objects section to display the Video Object Setup window Figure 1 62 In the Camera field select a desired camera for configuration Select Missing Object from the drop down list Click the Accept check box to make other options available Click the Define Object button Use the mouse to outline regions on the object s you want to detect It is recommended to outline several regions within the object s to increase detection sensitivity Notice that the outlined regions should not be larger than the object s Every time when finishing an outlining you will be prompted to select Add Region See the illustration below Add Region Delete Region Figure 1 64 Outlining regions on objects Click the Done button to finish the defining Click the Save Reference Image button to save the image as a reference view Page 63 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 9 To setup other options see Other controls in the Video Object Setup window below 10 Click the OK button to apply the settings and close the window 11 Start camera monitoring for the application When any object which you have outlined the regions for disappears from the
48. applications Indicates the GV System s name usually named by its geographical location Enables the connection to remote applications Rotates through the screen divisions Brings up these options Video Audio Log System Log Search POS Data POS Live View Live Object Index Search Object Index and E Map Accesses System settings Sets up recording schedule Starts monitoring Selects the desired camera number for main division view Selects screen divisions Brings up these options Login Change User Logout Minimize Restart Multicam and Exit Page 5 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Press F7 on the keyboard or click the Monitor button to start recording By default every camera records with the following settings e In Motion Detection mode e With the 320 x 240 resolution e With Geo Mpeg4 codec When working with the system you will undoubtedly want to change the settings as you go along The buttons provide quick access to several popular Main System settings Click any button to see the menus to these settings Let s start with the Configure button System Configuration Click the Configure button and select System Configure You may configure cameras and global recording parameters in this dialog box Changes made to the General Setting tab would apply to all available cameras attached to the system while changes made to each camera tab apply only to the individual camera In I O Device tab you could ad
49. button for the next page Search Click the button to launch the search window Exit Click the button to close the window Note Every time segment is a 30 minute interval as shown in Record list in Figure 1 60 Page 59 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Face Detection The Face Detection enables the GV System to identify and record human faces This feature captures human faces only ignoring other body parts objects or background views Moreover it can capture each face separately when a group of people comes in the view together 1 On the main screen click the Configure button and select Object Index Monitor Setup The Camera Applied Object Index Monitor dialog box appears 2 Select the desired cameras for setup and then click the Configure tab The Video Object Setup dialog box Figure 1 57 appears 3 Inthe Object Index tab select the desired camera from the drop down list and enable Camera for setup 4 Inthe Setup section check Face Detection and click OK to save the configurations Start the monitoring of configured camera s On the main screen click the ViewLog button and select Live Object Index When the faces are detected the thumbnail images will appear on the Object Index Live Viewer Object Index Live Yiewer tos sf Camera 1 Camera 1 17 57 08 17 58 25 of gt Camera 1 Camera 1 17 58 29 17 58 44 Camera 1 Camera 1 17 59 09 17 59 13 Figure 1 61 6 Double clicking one of image
50. camera view for 3 seconds its location will be highlighted the selected alarm and output will be activated and the event will be recorded in System Log for later retrieval Other controls in the Video Object Setup window Show Reference Image Click to view the saved reference image m Never Recycle When the item is checked the events of unattended and missing objects won t be recycled by the system Embed Alarm Region into Recorded Video This option will contain the flashing alert boxes in the recorded files so you can easily find out suspicious events during playback Note that if you are used to searching suspicious events with Object Search do not enable this option These flashing boxes can cause false alarms m Live Disable Alarm Region When an unattended or a missing object is detected this option allows you to close the flashing alert box automatically or manually Click the button beside to display the Object Index Live Viewer window Figure 1 58 Select to close the flashing box automatically or manually Under Delay Time s specify the duration of an unattended or a missing object to invoke a warning message Figure 1 59 The range of delay time is from 1 to 99999 seconds Closing the flashing box will disable object detection and alarm settings no matter automatically or manually To reactive please restart monitoring Mote Closing the Flashing Alert Region will disable object detection To
51. date tree and video event list No 3 amp 4 Figure 4 1 2 Select the screen division from the View Mode button No 5 Figure 4 1 3 Click the Save AVI File button No 9 Figure 4 2 This window appears Alternatively press S on the keyboard to call it up Page 149 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Save Avi File Avi View Setting Stait Time 15 26 42 1 End Time 15 26 58 ee gt Set Lacation CAUGYBOOW ile20151027152642 Avi r Export with new Privacy Mask region s Remove Recoverable Privacy Mask region s C Un recoverable ID 1 Recoverable Password coa Figure 4 8 Save AVI File 5 Drag the timelines to define a starting and ending time of the file If the video event has the Privacy Mask settings and you want to retrieve the recoverable block out area s in the exported file type a valid ID and password in the Decode Video Protection field If you want to remain the recoverable block out area s in the exported file leave the field blank For details on Privacy Mask see Privacy Mask Protection in Chapter 1 7 Click the button in the Set Location section to assign a saving path Click the Setting tab to configure the exported video See AVI File Settings below Click OK to export and save the file Privacy Mask Settings In case you forget to set the Privacy
52. domain name Dynamic DNS supports Windows XP Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 only but not supports Windows 95 98 or ME Dynamic DNS uploads IP address over the Internet through ports 80 and 81 If your GV System is connected behind a router or firewall make sure ports 80 and 81 are open Dynamic DNS will only upload global IP addresses If your GV System is using virtual IP NAT port mapping should be done first Installing Dynamic DNS To install Dynamic DNS follow these steps 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD to your PC It will automatically run and a window appears Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item Select Dynamic DNS Service and follow the on screen instructions Page 338 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Registering Domain Name with DDNS 1 SA Go to Windows Start point to Programs select DDNS and then run Dynamic DNS Service to bring up the DNSClient dialog box Click Register and the following Dynamic DNS register page will appear Type a username in the Username field Username can be up to 16 characters Username will accept a z 0 9 and but will not accept space or as the first character Enter a password in the Password field Passwords are case sensitive and must be at least 6 characters Re enter the password in the Re Type password field for confirmation In the Word Verification section type the code within the box In this example the code y
53. has wireless LAN adapter properly in place with access to the Internet 1 Execute G View V2 in your PDA 2 Click the Connect button located at the lower left corner This displays the Login screen Type the IP address of the GV System you wish to connect enter a valid username and password and then click the OK button If logging in successfully you will see video streaming to your PDA Clicking the Stop button can exit the G View application T welcome Griew P Tx ok E Gview Live Re Tx ok IP Address geo mobile diprnap co Port s966 User Mame i Password GView 2 SnapShot Path Figure 6 51 Starting G View Figure 6 52 Entering GV server Info Page 244 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Other Functions The major functions of G View V2 include live video monitoring PTZ control zooming control and snapshot View Screen PTZ Screen E Y j Er L we eception eception TOBE Sane Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Buttons Description a Click it to stop the connection Click it for Focus in and Focus out control Click it for Zoom in or Zoom out control Click it to select the camera preset positions gt Click it to adjust the image quality K Click it for I O Module Setting or to force outputs Click it to start or stop recording Click it to display the camera status The supervisor is given the highest priority to control the PTZ camera and wont be restrained by 60 second ti
54. information DirectX 9 0C is also included in the Surveillance System Software CD Startup Auto Login Select and press the Arrow button to assign an ID used at system auto startup After the setup the system will automatically login using this ID at next startup without asking for ID and Password For related settings see Launching GV System from System Tray later in this chapter Panel Resolution Select the resolution from the drop down list that best fits your computer monitor screen Page 8 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Mini View for Remote Desktop Squeezes all video channels into a single 320x240 view Since you may use Microsoft Remote Desktop a feature that comes with Windows XP Professional Edition to set up the Main System through network it is important to get smallest size possible data to transfer over network 1 Click the Configure button and then select System Configure 2 In the System Configure dialog box select Mini View for Remote Desktop in the Startup section and then click OK to apply the setting Restart the Main System To switch between the mini and normal view click the Configure button and select Mini View Switch 123 4 5 6 7 8 910 111213141516 AN a AAA Figure 1 4 Mini View Location Name The given name maximum 14 characters is displayed in main screen as the name of the server Log Storage Selects storage type recycle or not recycle and location E Available Sho
55. input 1 e Lise Codepage Mapping 437 OEM United stated El Trace mode Add Cancel Figure 3 3 POS system settings Page 130 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application Printer Type Select Serial Port Parallel Port or TCP IP Port that the POS system belongs to For TCP IP Port applications see GV Data Capture V2E User s Manual NW Device Assign the POS system to a camera screen POS 1 displays the images and data on the Camera 1 screen POS 2 on the Camera 2 screen and so on Click the button next to the item to rename the device POS Module Select the printer attached to the POS system If it s not Epson select General for other brands If the printing is in the graphic mode choose GraphMode For Graphic mode applications see the POS System Connection section above COM Port Select the COM port that the POS system is connected to The parameter button Click the button to configure Baud Rate Data Bits Parity and or Stop Bits to match those of the POS system or keep them as defaults m Cash Drawer Open Signal This option is only available when an input module is configured in the Main System Assign the input module connected to the cash drawer Every time when the cash drawer is opened a signal will be sent to the Main System and recorded in System Log for later retrieval m Use Codepage Mapping This feature is to support special characters and symbols display For details see Codepage Mappin
56. is 135 Codepage Man DUNG sosiniaarisinniiiias 136 Searching POS DA e ad 137 POS LIVE Vi Wes ao 137 TSP OS LIVE View WNdOW Uan 137 Seting WO Live VIC Wise 138 POS COIOr TEX rraipena E T id 139 Setting Up POS Color TOXtb oooocccnnncccccocononcnnccoconononccnnnnnnonnnnnnncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnns 139 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video File S ccsccsscseseeeseenseeseenseeesseees 142 Playing Back OM VIOWLO ld usina 142 Playback Sreem ay OU AI PI o O no O A at cote tadaen a alae 145 Playback Conto IBULOMS irte tics 146 AOB e o a 147 A O ee ee 147 Timelme S Sara doi deca dad 148 EXPO RINa MAS ts 149 o etg enters scl coterie deans E A E E E E 152 PANUNG IMA CS nenita ooo odo a idas 153 UN nee CR Oa a RRR Pm aS a Yc a ae neo ee eee ene eo 154 Searching and Playing Back Motion Alarm and POS Event ccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 156 A A nee eee 158 Recycling Option for Video Files senienas a aa eae 164 Unmarking All Never Recycling Flags cccccssssssssseceeccsseeessseececeseeeesseeeeeeesseneusseeeeeeeessnasseeeeess 164 Reserving Never Recycling Flags ccccscccccsssececseseeeceeseeceeasececsaseeecseuseeeesgeeessageesetegseneseseneees 164 Playing Back over Local Area Network LAN ccccsessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeseoaas 165 Vil Playing Back over Internet Using Control Center Ser Vet oooooccccccconnnconnccoococonnnconnnon
57. like to unmark all the never recycling flags in certain cameras follow the steps below 1 Shut down ViewLog and Main System if they are running 2 Goto the Windows Start menu select Programs point to the GV folder and then click Repair Database Utility A valid ID and a password are required 3 When the Select Camera for Repair Database dialog box appears select the cameras of video files that you want to unmark their never recycling flags Click OK to open the Repair Database dialog box See Figure 5 14 in Chapter 5 Click the Use Default Path button to unmark all the never recycling flags Reserving Never Recycling Flags If you like to reserve all the never recycling flags you marked on video events even after repairing the database check Reserve Never recycle Flag on the Repair Database window before making repairs See Figure 5 14 in Chapter 5 Page 164 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Playing Back over Local Area Network LAN Using LAN ViewLog it is possible to play back video files across the Local Area Network LAN This application provides access to file locations and allows playback in any local computer Same tasks would be accomplished by using Windows My Network Places but in a much more complicated process Before you start make sure both your system folder and to be view video files are made available to network users done through the proper setup in Windows Sharing And Security After the folde
58. logs To activate the log click the Configure button and then select System Log Setting to display the following dialog box Activate System Log M General Event M LoginiLogout Event 4 Monitor Event W POS Event W Counter Event Interval of Motion Event eo SEC Interval of Input Event 60 SEC Default Video Player Monitor Table ViewLog POS Table Quick Search Import Previous Days of maa i Fi Live Log Browser Available 1 05 GE E we Keep Day s e Recycle Figure 1 24 General Event Record system startup exit network server start stop and recording start stop Login Logout Event Record local user login logout GV System and WebCam Server Monitor Event Record motion triggered and O triggered events For this feature you must also enable Register Motion Event in Figure 1 12 and Register Inout Event in Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 POS Event Record POS transaction data Counter Event Record counting results Interval of Motion Event Specify the log interval between motion triggered events This setting could prevent the System Log growing too big when trying to log all events under a motion intensive surveillance area Interval of Input Event Specify the log interval between l O triggered events Page 25 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Default Video Player Monitor Table Specify the playback software for playing back monitor events For the details of each playback application
59. meer ren mee tee nee et nee ener 236 searching ObDect md na ta ad iia 236 Advanced aldeas 237 Remote ViewLog on WebCaM ooccnccccoccnncccccconcccnocononnnncnnnonononnnnnnncnnnnnonnnncnnenennnss 239 POS Live View on WebCaM occccccooccncccccccnccccnonononnoncnnnononcnnnnnnnonnnnnonennnononnnncnnanennns 240 The Remote POS Live View WINdOW ooooocccnnncccccccnoncccnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnononannncnnnnonnnnnnanennnnnnnnss 240 Stanton da 241 Mobile Phone ADDICA ION o 242 A at iets cee eee ce ct a a ete ane ems cee ene cheese aan eee 243 Mode POMC A A as een cn ae ek eee icc 248 WINCOWS MADAME o a EEE O Ed o ca 249 Symbian SMA doi 251 Fast Key Reference o ooocccooccccoccccocncconcnonncocnnnnnonncnonncnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnronnncnnnnnss 253 The Muti VIEW WINGOW ii A a Uaudevngeinae Gia 253 PTZ CONTO MUN VIEW saurin a a iio letal 254 Page 196 With Microsoft Internet Explorer at the remote PC it is possible to view live videos download and play back video files manage systems within the security network control PTZ camera and l O devices via the WebCam server Before starting the WebCam make sure your system meets the following minimum requirements OS Windows 2000 Windows XP Server 2003 CPU Pentium 4 2 0G Memory 256MB RAM Hard Disk 60GB VGA NVIDIA GeForce ll 32MB 1024x768 screen resolution Network TCP IP Web Browser IE6 0 Netscape Navigator with limited functionality DirectX Version 9 0 or ab
60. methods to create a multiple host the manual creation of a multiple host the quick creation of Click the Edit Host button No 8 Figure 6 29 to display the Edit Host window Figure 6 35 and then click the New button to create a new host Check Multiple Hosts to display the following window Host List Host Information Multiple Hosts Host Protection Single Host J Multiple Hosts Hast Name Multiple Hosts Password 1 18 Edit 9 E 2 158 Edit 10 18 3 158 Edit 11 8 4 18 Edit 12 18 5 18 Edit 13 8 6 18 Edit 14 8 7 18 Edit 15 18 8 18 Edit 16 18 Export Import New Delete save OK Figure 6 36 Creating a multiple host In the Host Name field enter a desired name to identify the multiple host To set up each camera channel of the multiple host click the Edit tab one at a time Alternatively you can click and drag the created camera channel from the Host Server window Figure 6 30 to each Edit tab When you click the Edit tab you will see the following window e DVR Video Server IF Address 127 0 01 ser Marne Hosti Password er Camera Ma li Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Fort esso Figure 6 37 Camera Setting Delete Cancel i xl Page 229 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 7 Enter the IP address user name and password of a remote host In the Camera No drop down list
61. microphone on and off Ctrl L Turn the speaker on and off F7 Start all recording Zoom in the selected monitoring window Zoom out the selected monitoring window Page 253 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam PTZ Control in Multi View Print Soro Pause 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 lt Back insert Home a Tabo w e r T vfu 1 ofeft 1 e SACOGOUECE smz x o vjejn m lt gt gt sna v om a space ar at on Key Function Home Zoom in End Zoom out Insert Focus in Delete Focus out Right Left t Up y Down Page 254 Chapter 7 E Map Application ccccceceeeeseeeeesees LDO Ne a Edicto 256 ne E Map Editor VINO Wisin ii e 257 Creating an E Map File ninia cs 258 Creating an E Map File for a Remote Host cccccccccccocnnccnnnccccnononncnnnnnnnononancnnnnonnonananennnnnnnss 258 Starting E Mail leds 260 Setting the Pop up Map Function cccccccccccccnnnccnnncccccnnonnccnnnnononnnoncnnnnnonnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 261 Starting E Map from a R mo te Mesias dto 261 The Remote E Map Window ccccoocccccccccncccocccnonononnnccnonnnnonannonononnncnnnnnnnnonannnnonannnnnnnnnnnnss 262 Logging In Different FIOSES iia 263 Configuring the Remote E Map Window ooocccnnnccccccccnnccnnnccccnononncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnononnonanennnnnnnss 264 Viewing OSE INIO MAIN 265 Accessing Remote ViewLog iia tained taukadavainiacisaddaanectanahucotsiaackchiesiareleiaaatysanes 266 E MaD SVE au
62. of configuring and managing many I O devices Its major features are e Trigger I O devices without starting I O monitoring e Group I O devices for cascade triggers e Monitor different I O cascade configurations at different times of the day e Quickly access triggered I O devices by a Quick Link window The Advanced l O Panel To open the panel click the I O button on the main screen and then select Advanced I O Panel a 10 Central Panel e aje a 7 t Mode Defaut 8 a Standard VO List E TEST27 1 Modules 0 42 Module 1 a e Input Input 3 2 Input 4 8 Output O Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Figure 2 13 The controls on the Advanced I O Panel No Name Description 1 Configure Accesses Panel and Schedule settings 2 Mode Schedule Starts stops Mode Schedule 3 Toggle Quick Link Displays the Quick Link window for quick access to triggered I O devices 4 Advanced I O List Style Displays the Advanced I O List in various styles View Edit Icon and Detail 5 Expand Tree Row Expands tree branches 6 Collapse Tree Row Collapses tree branches 7 Mode Configures various cascade modes 8 Standard I O List Displays connected I O modules 9 Advanced O List Groups I O devices in cascade mode Page 113 Chapter 2 I O Applications Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers You can group I O devices by function or geography Further the group allows cascade triggers meaning that the trigger actions of one trigge
63. of the functions in IP Multicast are much the same to those in Remote View For details on using functions in screen views refer to Playing with Screen View Window Functions earlier in this chapter to set the Preference dialog box refer to Preference Settings for features available for full screen refer to Full Screen View Video files are also played back in Q View refer to Playing Back Video Files in Q View Note Since Q View only saves one most recently viewed video file in the Temporarily Record Buffer following message may appear when try to record a second file Camera 1 Record file not saved yet Never prompt if record files not be saved Cancel Figure 8 14 This message is to remind you that the video file previously played back has not been saved Clicking Continue would overwrite the previous file To always save viewed video files to a permanent location use Play Save button in screen view instead of the Rec button Page 2 9 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 282 IAS tAllING Center VZ arica diia 282 The Genter V2 WIN O Wisin iris 283 Creating a Subs criber ACCOUNT ainia an 285 Greatng o A a A 286 o a a e a a a a 287 Attachment Mode SENOS as 288 Changing the Color of Channel Heading cccccccccccocnnccnnncccnnnononcnnnnnnnonanncnnnononononanncnnnnnnnss 289 Creating a Subscriber Schedule tuinen nananana aa aaa il 290 Scheduling Aler INOUE CAUOM esuma e a E E E RS 292 CONTIQUENO GENET
64. play back with audio check Voice as shown below Please note not all GV cards support the audio function Playback Scroll Play Home Page 146 Speed A to B Mode Figure 4 4 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files A to B Playback Mode When playing video events you can set a starting and an ending frame for auto playing 1 To set the starting frame A click the A to B Mode button Figure 4 4 The message A to B Mode Set A appears on the screen 2 To set the ending frame B click the A to B Mode button The message A to B Mode Set B appears on the screen ViewLog will start playing the set frames A to B repeatedly To stop the playing click the A to B Mode button the message A to B Mode Cancelled will appear Searching a Video Event ViewLog offers two search methods the Basic and the Advanced allowing you to locate a video event within a certain date time or camera Basic Search 1 Click the Advance button No 7 Figure 4 1 and select Basic Search to display the following dialog box Alternatively press CTRL F8 on the keyboard to call it up Event Time Search Eens 15 28 33 Close Depiction ViewyLog Using Event time selector it it possible to jump straight to video archive from a specific point in Time Figure 4 5 Specify a desired date and time Click the Search button for the search If the specified time can t be found a prompt will appear for you to select
65. recycled by the system when disk space is full Video Lost Trigger I O Activates the specified output module if any camera loses its video signal Page 109 Chapter 2 I O Applications Momentary Mode Pushbutton switches that are normally open and stay closed only as long as the button is pressed Momentary switches allow turn on or turn off from multiple locations For example certain premises have a designated entry exit door When the staff enters the entry door the system starts monitoring When the staff leaves from the exit door the system stops monitoring Maintained Mode Push on push off button switches that stay open until thrown and then stay closed until thrown again Maintained switches are convenient for only one switch location For example in the business hour when the door is opened the system stops monitoring in the non business hour when the door is closed the system starts monitoring Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings The option lets you instantly deactivate all the prior alarm and alert settings Output Wave Alarm Send Alerts when an assigned input module is triggered Open the l O Application window Figure 2 8 and find the following section M Deactivate notification when selected pin is Obl Moa 1 Input Fin 1 Deactivate Notification Trigger by Motion Deactivate Selected Motitication e Output e Wave Alarm i c Figure 2 9 Deactivate notification when sele
66. select Disable To restore the service right click the desired client and then select Enable SMS Log Setting SMS Log Click the SMS Log Setting button in the SMS Server window No 2 Figure 10 1 and select SMSLog Setting to display the following dialog box The settings are similar to Event Log Settings in Figure 9 21 in Chapter 9 Viewing SMS Log Click the SMS Log Setting button in the SMS Server window No 2 Figure 10 1 and select View SMSLog to display the SMS Log Browser The browser is the same as Event Log Browser in Figure 9 18 in Chapter 9 except the following two unique features SMS Event Log Clicking the SMS Event Log button el on the toolbar you can monitor senders ID mobile numbers text messages sent and failed SMS This can be beneficial as you may charge your clients by the amount of SMS messages they sent Event lists From 1 11 2005 to 1 26 2005 SMSLog Browser File Tools View Help ABV A Go ie Mobile Number SMS Contents Send SMS Time Status DYR1 DYR1 centerv2 centerv2 centerv2 centerv2 sm sm sm sm 1 System Event Log 001555123456 586932073920 1555123456 1555654321 41555123456 1555123456 1555123456 41555123456 41555123456 41555123456 1555123456 8860935806947 1 13 2005 15 18 30 5M5 Alert From DYR TEST 79 Camera 3 Motion 1 13 2005 15 25 25 SMS Alert From DYR TEST79 Camera 3 Motion video Lost Test message test message TPE Camera 1 d
67. select Virtual Wo Device ey Video Server 100 Device Remove Modity GY video Serve WS 02 192 166 0 OK mpata a Name Signal Type e Input 1 a MN Monitor Input W Rec Video ES Sec Camera 1 119 notiry M Invoke to Send Alerts W Invoke Alarm iw Output Module W Register Input Event Output 1 al Mame Output 1 Force Output Signal Type F a a 3 S Cancel Figure 2 33 For details on the GV Video Server and GV Wiegand Capture see their own User s Manuals Page 126 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application 128 POS 39 Stem COMMCCUOR iia ad 128 ROS DAS O desa 129 Seting a POS SUSTO Mir td aaa iaai naai 130 Superimposing POS Data onto Camera Screen cooonncnnnncconccnnnnconnncnnocnnnnanannncnrnrnnnannnnrrrrrnnnnanans 131 POS Fed Eterna 133 ADNOKMal TRANSACTION Ale Sii a 135 Codepage Mapping irai aaa aaa a aaa in ld 136 Searching POS Dalai 137 POS LiVe Vie Wisin as 137 THE POS IVE VIEW WINDOW crits ads 137 SetING LI OLIVE VICW a 138 POS COLO TEX Ens aida 139 Setting US POS Color Tex lid 139 Page 127 A POS system may be integrated to a GV System through the GV Data Capture box Through the integration you can investigate a transaction with transaction data overlaying on video footage by either live viewing or playing back POS System Connection POS systems vary in different forms with a receipt printer attached internally or externally also cal
68. select one desired camera channel from the remote host 9 Letthe port settings match those of the remote host or keep them as defaults 10 Click OK The icon of the created multiple host in the Host Server window is yellow while others are blue Quick Creation of a Multiple Host 1 Click on a desired monitoring window which will be highlighted in the red frame 2 Click and drag a camera from the Host Server window The selected camera then displays in the highlighted monitoring window Repeat the step 1 and 2 to configure other monitoring windows for different cameras 4 Click the Save Camera to Multiple Host button No 24 Figure 6 29 to create the multiple host Camera Status To show the camera status of the selected GV Server click the Camera Status button to display the following window Camera ON indicates the camera is active No Privilege means you re not authorized to view this camera Clicking the View button will bring up a small window displaying the selected camera s video Clicking the Refresh button will refresh the information in this window Host Informations Host Name 2 dipmap com IP Address 2 dipmap com User Name ET Camera Status Refresh F Camera Camera ON View T Camera 9 Camera ON View T Camera 2 Camera ON View Te Camera 10 Camera ON View F8 Camera 3 Camera ON View a camenti Camera ON view T Camera 4 Camera
69. server its operation is similar to the TCP server setup described above The default port number for Multicast server is 3650 Note GV System automatically checks the dynamic IP of your PC every one minute This ensures connection of remote applications including Remote View IP Multicast WebCam and Remote Playback HotLine Option If motion persists decides how often specified in minutes the system should send a notification to you before the motion ends HotLine Attach Audio Message Specifies how many times to repeat the audio message when a telephone call is made to you Selecting Screen Layout This feature gives you the option of screen layout for the 8 12 and 16 screen divisions 1 Click the Configure button and then select System Configure The System Configure window appears 2 In the Startup section click the Arrow button next to the Panel Resolution item to call up the following window The left mode is the default layout the right is the enhanced layout Page 21 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Quad enhanced x 12 Channel 16 channel Figure 1 19 For the enhanced layout click the Activate Quad Enhanced option and click OK 4 Restart the GV System to apply it Note 1 When the enhanced screen layout is applied the camera 1 view will show on the central screen when the popup feature is enabled the pop up view will show on the central when the camera scan feature is enabled t
70. side that allows you to access to some of the basic functions Start Monitor Stop Monitor Preferences View Log Date Time HDD Space Figure 8 12 IP Multicast It is possible to monitor several GV Systems within a LAN network through the use of IP Multicast An IP Multicast allows maximum of ten connections ata time After the Live X button pressed IP Multicast automatically connects to the Main System within the LAN network fa MultiCast Remote Surveillance System 5 2 Channel Camera Preference Browse Log Help a e Q 09 i ES Search Back Foryverd Go To Stop Lock Camera Live Channel Live 1 TEST 24 y Camera 1 p Camera 2 Digital Zp Camera 3 SU alan Le Live 2 Live 3 Live 4 Live 5 Live 6 Live 7 Live 8 Live 9 Live 10 Server IP Port a PEPE altel y Live 1 192 168 0 222 Digitel z SE lend Live 2 0 0 0 0 0 ta Live 3 0 0 0 0 0 Pi Live 4 0 0 0 0 0 Lie5 0 0 0 0 0 Lie6 0 0 0 0 0 Live 7 0 0 0 0 0 ara e444 4 Wo a Figure 8 13 Page 2 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications Setting Up IP Multicast The IP Multicast software is included in the Surveillance System Software CD The application is to be installed at the client PC within LAN network access PC requirements are the same as those for Remote View described in the previous section Starting IP Multicast 1 Make sure both the client PCs and the server PC are properly set up in local area ne
71. the PTZ camera view Sensitivity Use the slide bar to adjust the detection sensitivity E The drop down menu Click the drop down menu to define detection region and object size Page 67 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Selection Object Tracking Click to specify the tracking time Zoom in Object Click to specify the idle time Live Tuning Adjust directions and the desired level of zooming Enable Mask Click to display the mask on the defined detection region 1 Click to display the following window select the PTZ brand and the hardware address and click OK to apply the settings El Device Sensormatic Ultra vi Cancel Figure 1 70 2 Choose the corresponding camera screens of the PTZ and stationary camera For this example the images of the PTZ camera show in the camera 2 screen while the images of the stationary camera display in the camera 1 screen 3 Adjust the screen view of the PTZ camera with the slide bars of Pan Tilt and Zoom Let the PTZ camera view similar to the stationary camera view 4 Click the Save button to save the both views as image references Adjust Sensitivity or keep it as default Select Define Detect Region from the drop down menu Use the mouse to outline a detection region in the right screen you will be prompted to enter Detect Region See Figure 1 71 Page 68 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System selection f Object Tracking Zoom In Object Live tuning E
72. the day s you want the mode to run Click OK to apply the settings and click Save to return to the panel 4 To start the mode schedule click the Mode Schedule button No 4 Figure 2 13 and then select Mode Schedule Start Page 119 Chapter 2 I O Applications Quick Link The Quick Link provides a quick access to triggered I O devices It is a separate window to display all group icons The group icon flashes when any included I O device is triggered Clicking the flashing icon will bring you to the I O location in the Advanced l O List gt To open the Quick Link window click the Toggle Quick Link button No 3 Figure 2 13 gt To set the Quick Link window at panel startup see the Show Quick Link option in Figure 2 18 1 0 Central Panel x ol a aa E Mode Defaut bs Entrance 2 Standard 1 0 List Ei Advanced lO List es Exit E B TEST27 1 Modules H Entrance 3 88 Module 1 565 Input 1 GE Lowry e Input 1 a Input 2 e Exit 2 Input 3 E Input 3 Le Input 4 Lf Gutput 4 a Output 1 B Output 2 a Output 2 8 Output 3 y Output 3 Ed Lobby a Output 4 Output d Output 2 Figure 2 22 Forcing Output To manually force an output click one output and select Force Output gt Inthe Standard I O List you can force the output individually gt Inthe Advanced I O List considering cascade triggers you can only manually force the output at the top level e g Figure 2 23 Other outputs
73. the default equivalent To side OxA3 Page 136 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application Searching POS Data You can locate any desired POS data and videos during a transaction In the Main System click the ViewLog button and then select Search POS Data to display the Quick Search window When the Quick Search starts the latest transaction video and data will always be displayed For the Quick Search feature see Figure 4 16 in Chapter 4 POS Live View The POS Live View can display transaction data in a separate window instead of overlaying data on the main screen lt features Fast access to transaction data without opening System Log The View is designed for high screen resolution of 1280 x 1024 When your monitor supports 1280 x 1024 and the main screen is set to 1024 x 768 you can juxtapose the main screen and the POS Live View The POS Live View Window On the main screen click the ViewLog button and then select POS Live View ITEM YOID Egg roll TEM VOID Figure 3 10 Page 137 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application The controls in the POS Live View Window No Name Description 1 Previous Transaction Goes to the previous transaction data 2 Next Transaction Goes to the next transaction data 3 Freeze Suspends the current transaction data display Clicking this button again will restore to the live display 4 Live View Menu Accesses the settings of POS Live View Exit Closes the POS Li
74. the subscriber s site without interrupting the monitoring For example when an alarm is triggered at the subscriber site the Center V2 operator can turn it off remotely before arriving at the site Meanwhile GV System still remains on monitoring E Send to Center V2 when I O is Triggered Notifies Center V2 when any selected input is triggered With Camera s Sends the camera video to Center V2 when the selected input is triggered Click the Set Camera s button to assign cameras for the application Event Type Ifthe subscriber wants Center V2 always to get notified of the input trigger select Emergency Ifthe subscriber wants Center V2 to get notified of the input trigger only when an assigned input is triggered select Normal Right Arrow button Sets the delay time to notify Center V2 of input trigger This feature is only available when the Normal type is chosen Page 302 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Exit Delay While the system is activated this feature provides an interval of time for the subscriber to exit the premises During this time the specified input e g an exit entry door is inactive Once the exit delay expires the input will be fully armed Entry Delay While the system is activated this feature provides an interval of time for the subscriber to entry the premises During this time the specified input e g an exit entry door is inactive so that the subscriber can disarm the system I
75. then select Video Source Inthe Video Resolution field select 640 x 240 or higher resolutions and then click OK to apply Codec WebCam provides three codec options Geo Mpeg4 Geo H264 and Geo Mpeg4 ASP Allowed PTZ camera The option allows you to control selected PTZ cameras at a remote computer Click the button and select the desired PTZ cameras to work on WebCam Page 200 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam RPB 22 Server Setup Audio JPG 3GPP mobile General Server Video FPA Max Channelt 1 10 Max speed 100 kByle sec Cancel Defaut Figure 6 4 Server Setup RPB This feature is used to prevent overloading on slower networks m Max Channel s Specify the number of channels allowed to download to a client PC Bandwidth Control Enable and specify the rate of data to be transferred over network The option effectively controls the bandwidth being used by the WebCam server Audio Connecting Audio Devices Via WebCam you can access live audio at a remote site and talk to the server site This feature is useful when the remote site requires speaking to the personnel at the server site in case of emergency Before using this feature make sure all the necessary hardware are in place 1 If you purchase a BNC connector GV System connect the audio extend card to the system see Chapter 2 in the Installation Guide If you purchase a D type connector GV System audio extension cable lin
76. times 1 Select the desired RPB Server from the drop down selection field 2 Select the required camera from Select Camera s window or click Select All Cameras button to select all cameras 3 Specify the time range Click OK to start the search Note Awarning message may appear if the downloaded file size is greater than the designated storage space Playing Local Video After loading the video files from the server PC to the client PC click the Play Local Video button No 6 Figure 4 36 to play back the files at the client PC through the RPB Client View List The list keeps record of connection activity and it is available in four listing options Channel List Lists all RPB Servers and their respective cameras Click the Up and Down buttons to move up and down the list The Disconnect button ends the connection of the selected camera The Exit button closes the list while all connections remain Connection List Indicates the number of files currently engaged in the connecting activity The number shown in the Total Works field drops as connection completes Click the Work List to show the type of connecting activity engaged listed in the Type field Click the Back button to go back to the list the Disconnect button to end the connection the Exit button to close the list Page 175 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Download List Displays a list of files that is currently being downloaded to the RPB Client Th
77. to the Host Server window refer to Creating a Quick Connection to a Host Server later in this chapter Page 223 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Host Auto Search gt IEA E Host 2 1 Camera Elo 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera Server Icon Camera Icon Figure 6 30 The Host Server Window Working with Hosts on the Same LAN With UPnP technology MutliView can detect all hosts on the same LAN without the need of user configuration 1 On the Host window click the UPnP Device tab for detection The blue icon means WebCam Server is activated at the host while the white icon means WebCam Server is not enabled 2 Double click one host for connection A valid ID and password are required Note For UPnP detection the host needs to open TCP port 5201 and the MultiView site needs to open UDP port 5200 Exporting Video You can save live videos in a client computer The files in AVI format are playable at the third party viewer Click the Save button and then select all or several cameras to start recording For the folder path see Figure 6 34 Taking a Snapshot from a Live Video Click a desired channel and then click the Snapshot button to take a snapshot of live video PTZ Control 1 Selecta PTZ capable camera from the monitoring window or double click it on the Host Server window Click the PTZ Control button No 4 Figure 6 29 Turn the switch to the ON position
78. used once while the same output can be used repeatedly Page 114 Chapter 2 I O Applications Editing a Group To modify group settings right click a group and select View Edit This dialog box appears Group Information xj Group Mame A Entrance Cancel Group Motity Setting fw Invoke Alarm Buzzer l l e Enable advanced logical input in Multicarn Current Pin Setting Input 1 Input Level User defined e Trigger Associated Outputs Change Icon Default Icon E Entrance 6 4 Input 1 Figure 2 16 Group Name As described in Figure 2 15 Group Notify Setting As described in Figure 2 15 Current Pin Setting To enable this option highlight an I O device from the group list at the bottom m Trigger Associated Outputs Triggers outputs in cascade mode Click the Finger button to apply the change to all I O devices at the same group Change Icon To enable this option select one of two displayed icons Normal or Trigger Click the Change Icon button to change an icon Click the Finger button to apply the change to all I O devices at the same group Page 115 Chapter 2 I O Applications Editing an l O Device In addition to editing groups you can also edit the settings of individual I O device Right click an I O device and select Setting This dialog box appears Pin Setting Input Display Setting input Text Color f Background Color Alarm Level Level Undefined
79. video Demo Show Reference Image W Live disable alarm region P lv Luminance change detection 3 sensitivity 3 Delay Timetseci gt A IY Output Module Figure 1 62 Object Monitor 5 Inthe Camera field select a desired camera for setup 6 Select Unattended Object from the drop down list 7 Click the Accept check box to make other options available 8 Use the Mask Filter function to ignore any motion detection within a certain area if necessary 9 Click the Define Object button 10 Use the mouse to outline the max and min detection regions separately on the screen Every time when finishing an outlining you will be prompted to select Maximum Size or Minimum Size See the illustration below Minimum Size Cancel Figure 1 63 Defining the min and max detection size Page 62 11 12 13 14 15 16 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Click the items of Show Max and Show Min in the lower of the window one by one to check your defined sizes Click the Done button to finish the defining Click the Save Reference Image button to save the image as a reference view To set up other options see Other controls in the Video Object Setup window later in this chapter Click toenefithe OK button to apply the settings and close the window Start camera monitoring for the application When an unattended object appears and remains stationary for 9 seconds its location will be highlighted the selected
80. 005 16 41 20 984 e le 12 9 2005 16 41 22 250 e 1219 2005 16 41 29 828 Option V Play All Events V Show Mask Find and Stop In 0 Out 0 amp Show 2 l ES Figure 4 14 11 Expand the event folders to see the video segments inside Or enable Show Small Pictures at the upper of window to access the thumbnail view Page 155 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files 12 Select one video segment and then click the Play button in the Object Search window to play it back Or click the Open ViewLog button to play it with ViewLog Searching and Playing Back Motion Alarm and POS Event 1 Click the Tools button select Advanced Log Browser from the menu and the following dialog box will appear Advanced Log Browser Open Database selecta period to open 1110 2006 m 1962006 Import Database Range 1 7 Days Cancel Figure 4 15 2 Specify a time range click the OK button and all events within the specified range will be displayed on this Advanced Log Browser window E Event lists From 17 10 2006 to 1 16 2006 Acleanceid Log Browser E aa p sa x A A a a Z 7 Device Information Event 17107 2006 2 19 35 PM Camera 1 Motion 110 2006 2 21 32 PM Camera 1 Motion 10102006 2 29 76 PM Camera 2 Video Lost 10102006 2 29 76 PM Camera 3 Video Lost 10102006 2 29 76 PM Camera 4 Video Lost Figure 4 16 Advanced Log Browser The buttons on the Advanced Log Browser
81. 10 Application x a x Module 1 JE Clear All Input 4 i M Deactivate notification when selected pin is OM e Preset Go by lia Moa 1 Input Pin 1 lvecs rl Deactivate Notification R sa 1 Trigger by motion Alarm On Preset1 gt Deactivate Selected Notification Alarm Off Presti y Output fi Wave Alarm e 5 cm Pr ne Send Alert Tel Ebtail ShMmS Es Alarm Gn Dwell Time jv video Lost Trigger 1 0 10 Sec Never Recycling Input Triggered M Events Moa 1 Output Pin 1 Momentary Mode StartSstop Pin iv Start stop Camera Monitor by 110 ho 4 Pin 4 e Start Stop 10 Monitor by 1 0 Mod 1 Pin a Figure 2 8 I O Application The options here allow you to specify how the PTZ camera and the GV System will respond to an l O triggered event Click the Arrow buttons and select a module and its input to set up Preset Go by I O Enable the option and select your PTZ camera from the drop down list Addr Specify the address of the PTZ camera Alarm On Turns the PTZ camera to a preset point when the input is triggered Alarm Off Returns the PTZ camera to a preset point when the triggered input is off Alarm On Dwell Time Specify the amount of time the PTZ camera stays at Alarm On preset point before returning to the Alarm Off preset point Never Recycling Input Triggered Events When the item is checked the files of input triggered events won t be
82. 11157006 2 44 45 PM 11157006 7 14 35 PM System Start Live View 1 Camera 1 111152006 2 47 00 PM 16 RR AAA E N 18 LE 20 21 22 17 Figure 9 1 The Center V2 Window The controls on the Center V2 window No Name Description 1 Monitoring Window Displays live video 2 Status Panel Indicates the date time remaining disk space and the total number of online channels versus available channels 3 Find A Subscriber Type the desired ID in the Current Subscriber field and click this button to search 4 Subscriber List Displays subscribers ID names and online status Blue Icon Indicates the subscriber is online White Icon Indicates the subscriber is off line Alarm Icon Indicates either motion has been detected or the I O has been triggered at the subscriber s site 5 Event List Accesses Event Log and Event List 6 SMS Configures the SMS service 7 I O Device Configures and forces output devices at Center V2 Page 283 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Screen Division Host Info Preference Settings Exit Accounts Refresh Channel Next Page Previous Page Flag Clipboard Clip ID Event Type Message Message Time Start Time In the 1024 x 768 resolution you can select 6 15 or 24 screen divisions for a single monitor 9 25 or 36 screen divisions for dual monitors In the 1280 x 1024 resolution you can select 6 12 or 24 screen divis
83. 16 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Note The delay time functions in Invoke to Send Alerts and Output Module allow you time to deactivate prior alert and output settings To deactivate these settings you may stop monitoring or enable the assigned input module set at Deactivate notification when selected pin ON in Figure 2 9 in Chapter 2 Video Resolution Allows you to adjust video characteristics such as brightness contrast saturation and hue Setting Up Day Night Recording Mode Day Night Recording allows you to set up different recording modes for different time frames of the day Each day can be divided to 4 time frames each represented by 1 Span up to 4 Spans Click the Day Night Recording Mode button in Figure 1 12 and this dialog box appears Day Night Rec Mode Setup f i l Time Span Setup WM Spani Jam ooon fv amomo motion Detect WM Spana jamosoo fiviamaiozo Round the clack Iv Spans Pm 1300 vi Pme motion Detect M Spans PM 20 00 I Pm 21 00 Round the clack e Weekend Apply Round the clack E Sunday amp Saturday sunday Only Cancel Figure 1 13 1 Enable Span1 and specify the Start time in the first time field click the check box in the second time field and specify the End time Use the drop down list to select recording mode for the Span 1 Repeat above steps to set up multiple spans if required 4 If you do not wish to apply your set
84. 17 Chapter 2 I O Applications Setting Up Mode Schedule The Mode Schedule allows you to monitor different I O cascade configurations at different time For example you may want I O cascade triggers one way during business hours and another way for non business hours Modes can be switched automatically at a scheduled time Creating a Mode 1 Click the Mode drop down list No 7 Figure 2 13 and select More Edit This dialog box appears Advanced 1 0 Modes Advanced VO Settings Save Mewhlode 1 Cancel Add Delete Rename Figure 2 19 Click Add and name the created mode You can create up to 100 modes Click Save to return to the panel 4 Select the created mode from the Mode drop down list and create the groups in the Advanced I O List For details see Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers Page 118 Chapter 2 I O Applications Creating a Mode Schedule Define the times and days you like the panel to switch modes 1 On the panel toolbar click the Configure button and select Schedule Setting This dialog box appears Add Modity Delete save Cancel Figure 2 20 2 Click Add to create a schedule This dialog box appears Schedule Information Mame Schedule 1 Mode Defaut Time 40 00 00 a 23 00 00 F Days Figure 2 21 Name Type a name for the schedule Mode Select a mode from the drop down list Time Define a time period you want the mode to run Days Check
85. 1800 MHz from the drop down list of Select Band Click OK to apply above settings Page 327 Chapter 10 Short Message Service Server Settings Click the Server Setting button No 4 Figure 10 1 to display the following Server Setting dialog box There are three major tabs in the dialog box 1 General 2 Message Filter and 3 Notify General le Server Setting xx General Message Filter Notify Metuork Pot 6886 Default P Security M Enhance network security Startup M Auto Start Service when Server Startup M Minimize to System Tray after auto start service W Auto save the PIN number after start service Cancel Figure 10 3 Server Setting General Network Define the port of the SMS Server or leave it as default To use UPnP for automatic port configuration to your router click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings in Chapter 6 Security Enable to apply enhanced Internet security Please notice when the feature is enabled the subscribers using earlier version than 8 0 cannot access the SMS Server anymore Startup Auto Start Service when Sever Startup Automatically starts SMS services when the program starts Minimize to System Tray when auto start service Minimizes the SMS Server window to system tray when it starts Auto save the PIN number after start service Automatically saves the PIN number when SMS services start Page 328 Chapter 10 Short Mess
86. 2003 9 39 20 PM 1 Success Local 12 19 2003 10 55 37 AM quest Success Local 12192003 10 55 33 AM Success Local 12192003 10 55 36 AM 1 Success Local 12192003 10 55 53 AM quest Success Local 12192003 10 55 56 54 Success Local 12 79 2003 10 55 58 4M Success Local 12192003 10 56 07 4M Success Local 12192003 10 56 05 4M Success Local 12 19 2003 10 56 09 4M Success Local 5 2 3 2 3 4 A E i a 9 Figure 1 42 ID Shows the event ID number Time This column shows the time when Login event occurs User Login This column shows the ID of the login user User Logout This column shows the ID of the logout user Status This column shows whether login or logout attempts were successful or failed Mode This column shows the following two messages E Local Appears if a user login to or logout from the Main System E WebCam Mpeg4 Appears if a remote client login to or logout from the WebCam server Note This column shows the IP address of the client server Counter This function shows the information and result of GV System s counter function Page 44 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Live Log Browser q Monitor System Login Counter Start Time 12 19 2003 10 47 09 AM 1213922003 10 47 09 AM 12719 2003 10 47 09 4M 12719 2003 10 47 09 AM 12719 2003 10 47 21 AM 12 19 2005 10 47 27 4M 12 19 2003 10 47 21 AM 12719 2003 10 47 21 AM 12 19 2003 10 52 47 4M 1213922003 10 54 47 Atl 121942003 10 52 47 A 121942003 10
87. 3300 GKB SPD 221 Sensormatic Ultra IV JEC Dome Sony EVI D100 D100T JVC TK S576B TK S655 TOA CC551 Kalatel Cyber Dome VIDO Dome Kampro Technology K ZC23 YAAN Dome Kenko DMP23 H1 HiSharp HS CC610 Pelco D Pelco P LG LPT OS553HQ Note GV System only supports original factory models Other brands of cameras claiming of the same protocol compatibility may not work properly with GV System GeoVision takes no responsibility of such incompatibility Page 99 Chapter 2 I O AppliCati0NS ccccccccncncncccnnnncnanra oo LOL Setting Up VO DEVICES isai 101 PANG MCG Clr er E E ant man aiiceh Comet in anh deswansh bond ank comamtnen assuage hiviced 104 Keeping Last Togdle Status q is 106 O ControlPaN inst a ist 108 VO A ea ete oh tea a ecu veteran Scale shatbebate alaa 108 YO OulourGomtrol Panel eiii dao iii iodo 108 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Alarm Event cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 109 Deacivatino Alarm and Alert SCuminOS criar io oie 110 Detecting IN PULSE as 111 VO Enable Sel israel detras 112 AVANCE VO PAM el usiccrcninona or adds 113 Advanced TO PAN sia a A NAAA A 113 THe ACV ane Pala 113 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggers assainies aa e e a 114 Gontiguring the Advanced VO Panel cio A AA A 117 Setting UD Mode Schedule censor ido 118 A RATO 120 ici A A A A ee nee ene 120 Editing Background Madina 121 System Wide A e s a e 121 The Advanced Logical Input S
88. 36 Shop 01 Start Transaction POS 1 Camera 1 3 1218 2003 9 36 36 PM 1 000000 08 Page 1 POS 1 Camera 1 4 12182003 9 36 36 PM farmerjohin hotdog 3 4397 POS 1 Camera 1 p 12182003 9 36 37 PM krispy donuts F 0 49T POS 1 Camera 1 6 127182003 9 36 37 PM treetop juice 239T POS 1 Camera 1 P 12182003 9 36 30 PM kraft cheese 41 997 POS 1 Camera 1 a 12182003 9 36 39 PM kellogg s cereal 2 3997 POS 1 Camera 1 12182003 9 36 39 PM campell soup 41 997 POS 1 Camera 1 1218 2003 9 36 40 Phi quaker oatmeal 41 507 POS 1 Lamera 1 1218 2003 9 36 41 PM oreo cookie F2439T POS 1 Camera 1 1218 2003 9 36 41 PM minute maid 1 31 POS 1 Camera 1 Figure 1 44 ID This column shows the event ID number Time This column shows the time when POS event occurs Content This column shows the action taken in the POS device Event This column shows the following messages m Start Transaction Appears when sales transaction starts Stop Transaction Appears when sales transaction ends Page 45 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Void Transaction Appears if an item is being void from the sales transaction Cash Drawer Open Appears if the cash drawer is opened m Filter 1 15 Appears if the sales transaction matches the defined condition 1 to 15 Note This column is currently not being used Importing Exporting Filter Configurations You can import and export the Filter configurations in the Advanced Log Browser 1 Click the Advanced Log Browser butto
89. 4 ASP Advanced SetinOS semanas ad ib 18 Configuring Hotline Network NotificatiON ooooooocoooonccoonononncnonncnnnnononncnonnononnoonononnncnnnncnnnnos 19 Selecta Screen La OU da 21 Launching GV System from System TA img bbwoannwindion 22 gamera A E PS lead aeahadaniid hen ceeshara datas iael 23 SetmaUb AUO REDOO eraser ad 24 Logging System Activities into System LOJ oooccncoccncnonacncononanaconancnnconananononnncnononnnnononnnnconnnnnncnnnnss 25 Popping Up a Camera Window on Motion Detection ocooococcnoonccoonncconnncconanononancconn conan ncnnnanonns 26 Different Text Alignment for Each Channel ocooononocononocnconoonccoonnnononanononanononanononn conc ccoo nncconnnccana nono 27 Gontiguring Object SOU A rada 28 Mappa FTA Gamers sa iii da 30 Fa ZS LONG Protec 30 Seta URSS WO usina Oe at eC PT ee 31 Sending Alerts thru E mail ACCOUN S urticaria 34 CHOOSING VIS OS ON Oa E A enn ae 36 Op mizng System PEMOlMannC E sea AA 37 Adiusting Video ATTIDULES ss brida indias 37 SWICNINg 10 FUleSCreen VIEW ddr 39 Mori PAUICIO Grit she ceese a A ols ttaeanendetnent quate halal alastuta voniaiatadala 39 SlOPpING VIdEO Lost VALCO seis essa cries a erie AA 40 D activating Video Lost DB a de e 40 Star Stop MOMMONIM O ura ici 40 Playing Back VICO FeS uni A A ENa aaan 41 ASA AA e e da e O a ee a 41 SISI Mii A A A A AD o Ada 42 Recording Schedule ao usina 48 a A O cea a eet a 49 Special Days
90. 4768 cancel Figure 4 9 Date Time Select whether to include date and or time stamps And select the stamp color Page 151 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Normal Audio Export This option is only available when your audio channels are set up Time Merge Check to save a full length video with recorded and non recorded periods The non recorded period will display a blank blue screen This option is designed to accurately reflect your recording status NW Saveas EXE Check to save files as EXE format Enable this feature if you want to play back video at the computer without installing GV System This format allows you to auto play the files with any third party player Add Water Mark Check to export the watermarks This option is only available when the feature is set ahead Deinterlace Check to export the videos with deinterlacing AVI Size Select the screen size of the saved file Camera s Select which camera file for exporting 2 Click OK to apply above settings Saving Images You can save the current camera view as an image file 1 Click the Save As Image button No 10 Figure 4 2 This dialog box appears My Documents is My Computer Save in O My Documents gt e A eX E a B My Music Ets 5 My Pictures My Recent Documents Deskto My Network File name Places Save as type Windows Bitmap bmp Cancel Stamp Text on the Imag
91. 50 HO A bene i O A A A A AA 50 AA A ee ee ee 50 PTZ Control Panne nun a ida ARE 51 AUO Switching P TZ Control Panel Sisi ld das 52 PIZ AUTO Mal ld das 53 TOUCH Screen SUPPO usado ideada tds iia 54 FEZ anc VO Control rana 54 Touch Screen Panel cd 55 Retrieving Images Using Object IndeX ocoonnnnccconncccccccconccncooncnnnanconcnnannconennnanncrrnnnnannrrrnnnnnnnernnnnans 56 ODISCI NGSX SOTA us odios 56 LVAD SCE TG ONG oi ares oases can ceed A 57 Ob ect Index SS aro at a a ed e da il el biases dc 58 Face Detecta 60 Detecting Unattended and Missing Objects ooonnncccconicnnccccnnccanconcnnnnnncncnnannnonnnnnnnnnrrrnnanannnrnnnnnns 61 Detecting Unattended ObjectS c oocoonnccnnnccccccononccnnnnnonononccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannncnnnnnss 61 Detecting WISSING O DISCUS ni acess coca a a det ice acai detec 63 Object Tracking and ZOOMING nissan ii ci 66 ONE o e a S 66 Starting Ob Sc Traci oo i 70 ls deateraleta anche catia E E 70 OD ELLIS areas 71 Starting ODJECE ZOOMMAG riesia a lso aiii a 73 Contiguring Hybrid CAMAS capis a a N a 74 Privacy MASK Protectio aia a 75 SEMO UDA PRIVACY Mask stas iii eii llo lito la 76 Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas oooooooccccncccccconooncconnncnnnononnncnnnonnnnannncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 76 Scene Change Detector si 78 Advanced Motion DELS CUOM cana 80 Hard Disk Galculator usina A a da dc ai 81 DSP Shot Montor Control Prusia ardid 82 Spot Mentor CONTONE a
92. 52 47 Atl End Time 121942003 10 47 18 AM 121942003 10 47 18 AM 12719 2003 10 47 16 4M 12719 2003 10 47 18 AM 12 19 2005 10 52 43 AM 12 19 2005 10 52 43 4M 121942003 10 54 43 AM 12 19 2005 10 54 43 AM 121942003 10 54 28 AM 12 19 2005 10 54 20 Al 12 19 2005 10 54 28 AM 12 19 2003 10 54 28 AM Device Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 In O 1 O FO a0 4 Be 18 28 10 10 Out 0 0 xy POSO1 POSO FOSOS POso4 Figure 1 43 ID This column shows the event ID number Start Time This column shows the time when GV System s counter function is activated End Time This column shows the time when GV System s counter function is terminated Device This column shows the camera that performs counter function In This column shows the In result of GV System s counter function Out This column shows the Out result of GV System s counter function POS This function shows the POS event information Double click on the log list will allow you to view related video in ViewLog or Quick Search depending on the video player you selected in the Activate System Log dialog box See Figure1 24 ax Manitor Sy Stem Login Counter l POSO POSOS POSO4 ID Time Content Event Device Camera Note a 1218 2003 9 36 36 PM 2003 12 18 21 36 Shop 01 POS 1 Camera 1 2 1278 2003 9 36 36 PM 2003 12 18 21
93. 7 View Edit A Client 8 Delete An Area Client 9 Add A Client 10 Add An Area 11 DVR List 12 Connected DVR List 13 DVR Information Description Exits this window Logs out Administrator Changes Password exports account information Sets up the Authentication Server Log and opens the log browser Configures passwords and grants permissions to clients Configures the Authentication Server Starts Stops the Authentication Server Finds an existing client Select a client from the DVR List and click to view edit it Deletes an existing group or client Creates a client account Creates an Area group Lists the created clients and area groups Lists the connected GV Systems Lists the information of the selected GV System Creating a DVR List You can arrange your clients GV Systems into different groups for a better management Tocreate a DVR list follow these steps 1 To create a group click the Add An Area button No 10 Figure 11 25 2 To create a client under the group click the Add A Client button No 9 Figure 11 25 This displays the Client Information dialog box Client Information x Marne IPEA Els 0939234690 Figure 11 26 Client Information 3 Type the client s information The Name must match that of local GV System 4 Click OK Page 358 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Editing a User The Authentication Server operator can create users can grant deny or modify permissio
94. 73 Playing with Screen View Window FUNC IONS ccoooocccccnnccccccccnnnccnnnnonononnncnnnnonononannnnnnnnnnnnnnancnnos 273 Playing Back Video Files IMQ VIEW socias idas 274 Preierence SEMI tE 274 Remote PZ amd VO FUN o E 275 o secivtiede taaties lubes stasicaeaubaGutasearle sueenscesaterudbecbade tanacsedsariueeantteatenseasetes 277 A IMG 1G ia ardid 277 Seta OPAC ASS ascetics da 278 JC on e 278 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 csseeceseeeeseeeess 202 installing Center V2 usina 282 The Center V2 Win Ow ca ia ia dde 283 Creating SUDSCrIDEr ACCOUN soiis i a a a a S 285 Greating a SUD SO Dr a a a a UE oa 286 SUDSCHDEF SEINO sii A 287 Attachment M de Settings erinan a e Ra E 288 Changing the Color of Channel Heading coooccccccnncccccconccnnnnccnnnnnanncnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnononnnnanennnnnnnnss 289 Creating a Subscriber Schein Cinder ed le teeiaduiectin i iwetieds 290 Scheduling Alen Noticas certienectincte tenant tienen leanne eae 292 SONTIGUTING Center V2 id aii 293 Connecting to Center V2 oa ii 298 Normal MOS SC o 298 Panic BUlton Sel tdo 304 Dereci MPU olalu Sui cds 305 EVENT LOT Bro WS dic 305 Opening ne Event LO a io 306 Fenno Ne EVENT OO rms allan ciao 306 EVent Log SENINGS scraps d 307 A e e OE E Em o a r O 308 Monitoring and Managing SUDSCYribels cccceessssesseeeseeeesseeeeeoenseeeseenseeeseoenseeeeseoenseeessooenes 309 MOWING OST AS a 309 VO Enable Seti sidecar 309
95. 9 18 6 Change Camera Switches camera channels 7 PTZ Control Includes PTZ Control Panel and the PTZ Automation function Page 310 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Camera Monitor Use the Camera Monitor window to define the following Enable and disable live display The subscriber must give the privilege first See the Allow Center V2 to View Live Camera option in Figure 9 17 Define the interval between incoming events triggered by motion detection and video lost On the Subscriber List No 4 in Figure 9 1 right click one online subscriber and select Camera Monitor The Camera Monitor window appears Camera Monitor Camera Mame Liwe Suspend Suspend Status Camera 1 Play 0 0 Camera 2 stop 0 0 Camera 3 stop 0 0 Video Lost Camera 4 stop 0 0 Video Lost Video Lost Camera 1 Suspend Motion Monitoring o Miri o OK suspend Video Lost Monitoring o Win Ea Cancel Figure 9 28 Live drop down list Highlight one camera and select Play enable live display or Stop disable live video Suspended Motion Monitoring Highlight one camera and set the interval between incoming events triggered by motion detection Alternatively you can right click one live camera channel on the monitoring window and select Suspend for the same setting Suspend Video Lost Monitoring Highlight one camera and set the interval between incoming events triggered by video lost Status column Displays th
96. 9001800 MHz SMS Status iueue 0 Send Success 0 Failure 07 Figure 10 1 The SMS Server Window The controls in the SMS Server window No Name Description 4 D O 2 O0 Dn The following window appears Start Stop Service Starts or stops the SMS Server SMS Log Setting Sets up the SMS Log Account Setting Creates and edits accounts Server Setting Sets up the SMS Server Device Setting Sets up the GSM GPRS modem Exit Logs out administrator changes password or exits the SMS server Page 326 Chapter 10 Short Message Service SMS Server Setup Before starting the SMS service you must configure these three settings 1 Device Settings 2 Server Settings and 3 Account Settings Device Settings 1 Click the Device Setting button No 5 Figure 10 1 and then select GSM Module The following dialog box appears x COM Port ET gt Detect Device Information Mame Telit Model GMBB PES Slit Ready Select Band 1900MHz Figure 10 2 GSM Module Setting 2 Select the COM port connecting to a GSM GPRS modem 3 Click the Detect button to detect the modem gt Ifthe connection between the modem and the computer is established the message will show in the Device Information field Name Manufacturer Module xxx SIM Ready gt Ifthe connection fails the display will be shown as No usable device in COM xxx 4 Ifyou are using a tri band modem select 1900 or
97. 92 168 0 108 E Fort 650 Default a Y Assign IP Realtek RTL8139 Family PC Attach Text Message I Assign IP Realtek ATL8139 Family PC pma Defeat 22 eneee Fe e Hotline Alerts Interval ls Miri HotLine Attach Audio Message Play Rec Browse Audio Message Play Repeat 10 Times E l E A When Recelwed HotLine Alerts Format PCM 8 000 42 8B1t mono Please Press before Hang up the Call Figure 1 15 Modem Configure If you have installed modem in this PC select the corresponding device and port then press Detect button to test your modem Note Internal modems PCI or ISA are not recommended Page 19 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System HotLine Notice x The event can be set to trigger phone calls or pagers up to three 3 units A text message may be sent to the pager Enter the telephone number HotLine Alert 1 e Add to HotLine Alerts List f Attach Text Message 31 1 911 911 911 Default Attach Audio Message telephone icons Enter the text message gb Play Rec Browse Format PCM 8 000Hz 8Bit mono Figure 1 16 ok Click a telephone icon Enable the Add to Pager Tel hotline Notice List option Type the telephone or the pager number in the field w N Enable Attach Text Message and type the text messages to be sent to a pager The system allows you to send a custom sound file to telephone Your computer must ha
98. ACCOUN SANOS li ualaar easels 331 SMS OG AAA AA a a 333 SUNE OMS LOG riadas 333 Viewing SMS LOQ cccccccccessseceecceessecceceeseececseuseeeeecseaeceeesseaeeceeessaaeeeesssaaeeeeessaaeeeeesssaaeeseessssaaass 333 Password SOCUENY rinan aa a aa a aa aa a a ai a a a l aE 334 Connecting GV System to SMS Servel srania a aa 334 DE ING Mobile NumMDErS arias ande ae 336 xii Chapter 11 USC UNIOS aiii SOO Dynamic DNS si a di LI 338 ASTM Dynamo DN Sa aaa A Godan eace dint ead vation Gaads 338 Registering Domain Name with DDNS cccccccssseeeecceeseeeecceeeeeeeecsaaeeeeeesseauseeesseseeeessaaseeeess 339 TWIND VR AA A AEE E EE 341 Starting TwinServer cccccccccccccccceeeessseseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaaeaaessdeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaauasseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaesaaaaggs 342 HAMIN WANA ITN claps Pc sce aa A 344 LUI TWIT We axbeda e a eiea E e UN 344 WIND R SONOS serina a N 346 Watermark VIEWE o O 348 TWIN View DISPARA a inate eiareriys 350 Windows LOCK Ds IO Tona 352 MEGV desktp SCION tilo 352 GV desktop Features ccccccccssssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeasesdeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaauaaaasaseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseenaaaeaaagas 353 Authentication Se Vean ii ic 357 STAINING TNE Servers stc us il llei or cole 357 Mi VVIN COW tasinkoa ae a a a E a 357 Creating a DVR LISa E O EOI a e ai 358 Editing a USEF rasore aaa 359 Staring the Sera SAS 360 Connecting GV System to the S rvel ccccccccccccccseessssseseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaa
99. Address i Monitor Input V Rec Video 5 Sec Camera 7 IV Invoke Alarm Notify x IV Invoke to Send Alerts D 4 Output Module Mod 1 y Pin 1 y D m Output 1 l For PTZ Name Output 1 Force Output Signal Type N O N O Toggle C N O Pulse ls C NAC NC Toggle bl N C Pulse Sec Cancel Figure 2 1 I O Settings Page 101 Chapter 2 I O Applications Select I O Device Adds an I O device to the system 1 2 Note Select the device from the Device drop down list for example GV IO Card Click the Format Addr button to assign an address to the device The Format Address dialog box appears Start your first device with New Address setto 1 Click the Write button to write the address to the device Click OK to apply the setting Click the Add button You should see the device listed in the display window Repeat above steps to add more devices once at a time Each device should have its own address therefore in step 3 you should assign a different address for the new device Input X Click the Arrow buttons to select an Input to set up One GV IO module provides up to 8 inputs Select Input Apply to all Inputs Input 1 4 Name Signal Type i Hooo p Input 1 MO C ME E Monitor Input a E E 5 Sec Ea M Invoke Alarm Take a snapshot on input trigger I Invoke to Send Alerts bl B Delay Time S
100. CABLE T 1 choose Multi View and then click the Submit button First time users will be prompted to install the Multi View applications Select Yes and then follow the instructions to complete the installation When the Login dialog box appears enter a valid user ID and password and then click OK This displays the following Multi View window 5E Host2 Ela 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera Ely 4 Camera Ely 5 Camera 6 Camera I Ely 7 Camera 8 Camera Ely 9 Camera 10 Camere Ew 11 Camere Ely 12 Camere 13 Camere Ela 14 Camere y i STL D Jus 12 11 Uy EY UY Gi Figure 6 29 The Multi View Window The controls in the Multi View No 4 2 Name Description Monitoring Window Displays live video Host Server Displays connected GV Systems and their available cameras UPnP Device Displays all hosts on the same LAN Page 222 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 4 PTZ Control Displays the PTZ control panel 5 I O Control Displays the I O control panel 6 Channel Status Indicates the general information of the selected channel 7 ViewLog Plays back recorded files of the remote GV System by using the video player ViewLog 8 Configure Accesses system settings of the Multi View Edit Host Adds deletes or modifies GV Systems Camera Status Displays the camera status of the connected GV Systems 10 Host Information Displays the general information of the connected GV Syst
101. Camera Audio Control cccccccccssseseececeeeeesaeeeeeceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeceeeeessaeesseeeeeeesssaeaseeeseeeeesaaas 310 Camera A o 311 VIEWING Subscribe Ito MalON siria ete lil dis 312 SUDSCHPUOM GONT OL PEPA o o anea 312 Instant Recording and Playback aid 312 EFA DING EVO VIEWS Dts aadecu th edend a toad dtad aval iaidavel and valbvadin NA 312 Xi Recording and Playing Back Instantly occcccoccococcnnnncocononccnonnnnononnnnonononnonannncononcnncnnnnnnnos 313 QUIDUTA SS A AA A AA A E di 313 FOFCING OUMU Ol Enter Ml e a aaa ea i ellos 313 Forcing Qutputsor a SUBS aiii E 314 Notification Setting Sii ll a aaua aa aaa aaa 314 AN A e AN 315 O A 315 GONMECIING IO SIMS OSI a a A S 316 Sending SMS tl dl e 317 EMMA Sii a A E a 317 SEUA MAIDO a aeea e n e a a E Ea ie 317 Sending EMM ias 318 E Map Alerts riii aaa aa lt 319 Alamedilla 319 Sreang an Alarm REDON alias 319 Editing Alarm Report Categori S o is 320 C l rf l FLAGS issia A A A DAS 321 Marking the Events with Colorful Flags ooooccconcccoccoonnccnnnnccononanncnonononononanncnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnnos 321 o set antec a e E E E e NE EET 322 BAGCKUD SETVEF S E R a a 322 Chapter 10 Short Message Service cccesecceseecensecensecenseecnsesensesennes GOD Installing SMS SO VO A tae eee ad 325 TNE SMS Server WINdO Wisin an 326 SMS Server So liinda 327 DEVICE SENG geeneen A A napseetceeteemnatoacdansenceee ieee 327 SAA 328
102. Configuring Main System Hybrid Camera Configure select Hybrid Camera camera 1 Video Attribute Brightness 128 Contrast _ HA 128 Saturationl 1 128 Defaut Saturation H 128 Hue HA 128 Record Guality ideo Resolution d 720x480 CD CO nen Figure 1 80 Select Hybrid Camera Select a camera for setup You can see the Hybrid DVR card image of the selected camera in the right window Video Attribute Modify video attributes if necessary To apply the changes to all cameras click the Finger button Record Quality Select recording quality up to five levels The recording quality is directly proportional to file size To apply the change to all cameras click the Finger button Video Resolution Displays the NTSC or PAL resolution for the Hybrid DVR card images 4 Click OK for above settings Note The Hybrid DVR card only affects recording quality all live views are still provided by your capture card Privacy Mask Protection The Privacy Mask can block out sensitive areas from view covering the areas with black boxes in both live view and recorded clips This feature is ideal for locations with displays keyboard sequences e g passwords and for anywhere else you don t want sensitive information visible You can also choose to retrieve the block out areas during playback The retrievable areas will be protected by password Page 75 Chapter 1 Confi
103. Di Wiis Wa a P dime moe maa eel Wwa we 7 ww 11 4 15 Clear All wawa fw 12 lw 16 Scan Setting Video Format ATE MAS f Div 16 MN sf lr e 3 hom pz 13 14 15 fie Cancel Figure 1 94 Interval 110 Sec f ATSC Scan by Manual C PAL Setting video Attribute Camera Popup Setting H T Setting Setting HH _ HHHH HH H Video Enable Check or uncheck the desired channels displayed on monitor screen Scan Setting Interval Enter the interval between the scanned pages see Figure 1 97 for the scanned page Set the time between 1 and 999 seconds m Scan by Select Auto to scan the channels automatically or Manual to scan at your speed Video Format Select NTSC or PAL The video standard may vary from country to country Check the video standard in your country first Setting Video Attribute Click the Setting button to display this dialog box Page 86 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Video Setting Camera 1 Video Atribute Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue Apply to au Detautt cos Figure 1 95 Select a desired camera from the drop down list to adjust image attributes such as Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation Use the slide bar to make adjustments E Camera Popup See Setting Pop up Camera Windows below E TV Setting Click the Setting button to display this dialog box TY Setting Adjust T ul uf nl Dl Detautt
104. Dial Modem Modern Login Phone Dial a 87978377 71 5 Tone O Pulse Login ID isd Beene OoOO IM Save password if connect success Hang Up Add to My Favorite Close Connect Status Press Make Call to Start Dialing Make Call 3 87978377 715 Line Hang Up Line Reply Login Figure 8 1 Making connection to GV system through dial up connection In the Phone Dial field type the telephone number you wish to use this column memorizes 10 most recently used telephone numbers Enter a valid user ID and password and then click the Make Call button Messages should appear in the Connect Status window when the connection is established shown in Figure 8 1 To set up TCP IP connection 1 2 3 Make sure both your client PC and the sever PC have access to TCP IP network Click the Network button on main screen and enable TCP IP Server from menu Click the Connect button from menu bar of Remote View and select Internet Intranet_TCP IP to bring up the following dialog box Page 270 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications 192 180 0 187 3550 Default Locate Server renato IV Save password if connect success Login Logout Add to My Favorite Clos Figure 8 2 In the IP Address field type the IP address or domain name of the system you wish to connect to The field memorizes 10 most recently used addresses Type in port number in Port field Use default value if y
105. Event List 7 Smart Search Includes the Advanced Search option Page 234 10 12 13 14 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Audio Enables live audio from the remote GV System Pause Pauses the video file Play Plays the video file Stop Stops the video file Download Downloads the video file Snapshot Takes a snapshot of the displayed live video Full Screen Switches to a full screen view Searching and Playing Back Recorded Files The WebCam RPB allows you to play back video and audio files Audio files are only available when your system is equipped with the optional audio recording function Click the Get Data List button and then select Get Date List This loads the recorded data from the GV System Select a date in the File Tree All video files recorded within the selected date range will be listed in the following Event List window Camera E 16 42 45 001 1 oe ee 1 1 as 6 00 Figure 6 42 Event List Select one camera or audio channel from the Channel Select tabs Select one video file from the Event List and then click the Play button to play it Synchronizing Audio with Video Playback To synchronize audio with video playback click the Get Data List button and then select Enable Audio Page 235 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam DirectDraw Setup The DirectDraw setting is enabled by default Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted f
106. Find Specific Account for quick search A valid password Is required to edit a supervisor Edit the properties as required Check the Account Is Disabled item if you wish to disable this user These options you may also find in this dialog box Expire in xx day s The account will expire and be disabled automatically after a set number of days The number you set will count down automatically Specify the number between 1 and 9999 User cannot change password The user is not allowed to change the set password Force Password change at the first logon The user must change the password when logging in first time Disable user if do not login after xx day s When the user does not log in the system after a set number of days its account will be disabled automatically Export this ID for Remote Control This option allows the export of users IDs for the remote control When it is checked you can see the designated ID in the drop down menu of login Note For the operation of remote control the password should be restricted for digits Allow removing password System This option lets users remove the ID and password database from GV System To do this select this option only Supervisor level users can make the selection and then find PassUnInStall in the system folder Click the application and a message prompts to you for confirmation Click Yes to remove the entire ID and password from GV System Note If the Allow Removing Passw
107. IP Mode e Setting Multiple TwinDVRs in Multicast Mode Testing Video Stream This function allows you to test the video transmission between TwinServer and TwinDVR Click the Show Video Status button to display 16 monitoring windows beneath the TwinDVR dialog box the Test Video button and video streams from the connected TwinServer will be streamed to the monitoring windows for 10 seconds You may click the Hide Video Status button to close the monitoring windows E TwinDYR User ID 1 Setting e Server IP 192 168 0 190 Server Port 2680 Default System Network Network Server ar Setting Hide Video Status Teatvideo Video Source 3270 x 240 Figure 11 9 Testing Video Stream Page 345 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Starting WebCam Server at TwinDVR Click the Network Server button and then select WebCam Server to display the Server Setup dialog box Figure 6 1 Setting Multiple TwinDVRs in TCP IP Mode Click the Network Server button and then select Extended Server The Extended Server is to duplicate TwinServer s video stream and transmit it to the next TwinDVR in the same network If there are five TwinDVRs in the network you should activate the Extended Server function in TwnDVR 1 2 3 and 4 respectively It s not necessary to activate TwinDVR 5 since there are no more TwinDVR running behind it Setting Multiple TwinDVRs in Multicast Mode Click the Network
108. Invoke Alarm J Output Module moa 1 Pn 1 Cancel 10 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System In the Choose Camera section select a camera from the drop down list for setup In the Definition section there are two options Set Detection Zones Use the mouse to outline detection regions on the video image Number 1 is for region 1 number 2 for region 2 Defining multiple regions 1 and 2 is practicable Clicking the delete blue X icon button will clear all defined regions m Define Object Sizes Use the mouse to outline a region matching the normal size of the targeted object If the video is playing first click the Snapshot button to freeze the image before defining In the Setting section the three options represent m Enable Counting 1 Way Counting When an object appears in region 1 and then enters into region 2 it will be counted as 1 in 2 Way Counting When an object appears in region 1 and then enters into region 2 it will be counted as 1 in and when an object appears in region 2 and then enters region 1 it will be counted as 1 out m 1 2 Alarm When an object enters from region 1 to region 2 the event will be recorded as Intruder in System Log for later retrieval 2 1 Alarm When an object enters from the defined region 2 to region 1 the event will be recorded as Intruder in System Log for later retrieval In the Option section select how you want to highlight the detected objec
109. Log player is already on the hard drive select this option to update the ViewLog files To play back files at another computer simply run EZViewLog500 exe from the created ViewLog folder on the hard drive Page 371 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Hardware 1 Messages Can t find keypro and Card Setup Fai appears when GV System starts gt Verify the video capture card drivers See Chapter1 in the Installation Guide gt Insert the video capture card to a different PCI slot to see if this fixes the problem gt If you are using the video capture card V1 attach an appropriate Keypro to the PC s parallel port and run Dos2kreg exe in the GV System folder gt If your system is upgraded to version 8 0 or above an appropriate USB dongle is required 2 Amessage Video Lost appears gt gt gt Check video connection Make sure the video device is turned on Make sure the video standard in your country matches the setting in GV System See Choosing Video Source in Chapter1 Check AGC setting See Adjusting Video Attributes in Chapter 1 Switch the cable from the functional channel to the non functional channel and vice versa If the previously non functional channel is now able to deliver video check the video device itself and ts related cables 3 A message Cant find I O Module 1 Address 1 in Com or Not GV IO in COM appears gt gt Check the RS 485 connection between GV
110. Mask at the Main System or need to add more Privacy Masks onto the video for special requirements you can do that in ViewLog 1 In the Export with New Privacy Mask Region s section see Figure 4 8 select Un recoverable and or Recoverable Page 150 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Un recoverable The block out area s in the recorded clips cannot be retrieved Recoverable The block out area s is retrievable with password protection 2 Drag the area s where you want to block out on the image You will be prompted to click Add to save the setting Using a valid ID and Password you can retrieve the recoverable block out area s in the exported file For details on the Privacy Mask see Privacy Mask Protection in Chapter 1 AVI File Settings To configure the format of exported video follow these steps 1 Click the Setting tab on the Save AVI File window This window appears Note that when you save the AVI file in single view mode the window looks slightly different Save Avi File avi View Setting Date Time Cameras he Show date on avi file Camera Number iw Show time on avi file Camera 1 Text Color MN Camera 2 Camera 3 pe Camera 4 Camera 5 Audio Export Audio 4 Camera 6 Camera 7 2 iw Time merge Camera 2 Save as exe Camera Y Camera 10 E Camera 11 Camera 12 Ww Delnterlace Camera 13 Camera 14 Avi Size i Multi Camera Camera 15 B40x480 Camera 16 C G00xB00 102
111. Multicam Digital Surveillance System V8 1 User s Manual GeoVision Important Notice The version 8 1 only supports the following GV video capture cards e GV 250 All Series e GV 600 S V3 20 and later e GV 650 S V3 30 and later e GV 800 S V3 30 and later e GV 1120 All Series e GV 1240 All Series e GV 1480 All Series e GV800 4A V3 10 and later e GV 2004 e GV 2008 For more information on the upgrade please visit our website at http www geovision com tw english 5 O asp or contact your dealer New Features in Version 8 1 AA Page Chapter 1_Coniguring Main System Dire Text Algnment or Each Oramnel EC TA Face Detection A ee Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application 128 POS Color Text Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Timeline Search Privacy Mask Deblocking Render Touch Screen Support Chapter 5 Backup Up and Deleting Files Backup with Direct Burn Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam POS Live View Support 240 IN ee IA ee A Table of Contents Chapter 1 Configuring Main SyStem ccceccsseecesseeenseceneeeensesensesens 4 System CONTI DON ii 6 Configuring Global Recording Parameters o ccccocnccnococccconanaconononanononannnonnnnnnconnnncconnanonnnnanononnnnncnnass 7 Adusia INAMU GAMA iia 13 Setting Up Day Night Recording Mode ooooccccnoonccononccccononcnonononanononanononananoconananoconnnnconananncnnnnnnonnno 17 Geo Mpeg
112. No Name O jO INIIAI A J OJIN 11 12 Monitoring Window Camera Select Day Select Time Select Go Button Event Query Transaction Void Transaction Window Mode Switch ViewLog Time Period Description Displays video associated to the event Use the drop down list to select camera Use the drop down list to select date Use the drop down list to select time Click to search files that matches to the parameters set above Click to specify event query Use the arrow buttons to select previous or next transaction event Use the arrow buttons to select previous or next void event Displays POS transaction Click these buttons to enable or disable Transaction Window and to switch between 640x480 or 320x240 display Click to open ViewLog application Use these buttons to search event within the specified time Page 157 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files 13 Playback Panel Includes Play Pause Previous 10 frames Home Next 10 frames End buttons 14 Exit Click to close Quick Search screen Click the Event Query button No 6 Figure 4 17 on the Quick Search window and the following dialog box will appear Use this function to find POS events by a specific item transaction or date Start Time 200311 oie Y 14 24 12 cancel Figure 4 18 Find Text Enable this option to find video events that match to the key word POS Event Enable this option to find video events that match to
113. Normal from the Download Play Remote Video button No 5 Figure 4 36 This displays the following Search amp Download panels Select RPB Server PC3 192 1680 Refresh Camera l ce Close Panel 3 2 Download Button 2 Z 2 af 2 Ee BE kA 4 5 aie Channel Select Figure 4 35 Follow the steps to search desired files 1 Select the desired RPB server from the drop down selection field 2 Choose the required date from tree folder Select the required camera from the Channel Select tab and select the video files from Event List Window 4 Click the Download button to download by the four available options E Download amp Play Play the selected files while downloading into the RPB Client m Just Download Download files only m Just Play Play files without downloading them into the RPB Client Download amp Play Period Download files by frames Select only one file at a time to apply this function Advanced Select Advanced from the Download Play Remote Video button No 5 Figure 4 36 This displays this following dialog box Page 174 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Select Server Select All Cameras Time Period Start Time 2002110129 y Z 11 02 26 End Time 2002 10 28 11 02 26 Cancel a E Figure 4 36 The files can be searched by time and date and by camera Follow these steps to select cameras to load at specified
114. ON View TS Camera 12 Camera ON View Te Camera 5 Camera ON View F Camera 13 Camera ON View F Camera 6 Camera ON view F Camera 14 Camera ON View Te Camera 7 Camera ON View To Camera 15 Camera ON View F Camera 8 Camera ON View To Camera 16 Camera ON View OK Page 230 Figure 6 38 The Camera Status Window Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Host Information Click the Host Information button No 10 Figure 6 29 to display the following window The Host Information window contains the following three categories Use the control tabs to toggle among them Host Informations Host Name 127 0 0 1 IP Address 127 0 0 1 User Name E Alarm List FA Host Informations E Log List J Alarm 58 2008 02 14 11 21 06 Alarm List Figure 6 39 The Host Information Window Alarm List Displays a list of alarm events occurred in the selected GV Server Clicking the Reset button will clear the listed events New evenis will be generated until the alarms of the local site are invoked Host Information The upper section shows the general information of the connected GV Server The lower section shows the number of MPEG4 RPB and audio channels currently serving over the Internet Log List Displays a history of login and logout information Page 231 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Remote ViewLog More than simply playing back recorded video audio fi
115. Or asii i ii cas seececacwieedeseastaincexssanecnceceidecsweuntecs tetanus 256 TASE Map EKO WINGOW sancccsinnczcoacrannvavancca e oleo dsd 257 Creating an E Mab Flesini a a a E a a 258 Creating an E Map File for a Remote Hostice neniani ta a a aa aa 258 SLAP EIEN Na ainia Usina tono cai 260 Setting the POP UP Map FUNCION cowed oateseenasindeeo eneeaeete 261 starting E Map from a Remote Site ate s 261 TAC Remote E Mab VV INO Wan a a aki 262 LOGGING IN Diterenl Ros iS irlandes 263 Configuring the Remote E Map Window cccccccccssssseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeceeeesssseaeseeeeeeesaaas 264 Viewing Host Information cccceeeccccseeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaseeessgeeeesegeeeeseaeeeesseeeeesseeeeesanaeees 265 ACCESSING Remote VIC WOO aiii A tender A atte mou ANA A anes 266 E MAD SO Vinicio a Iii 266 Mstdlmg E Map SV el el E nee 266 The E Map Server WInNdOW cccccccccssssesecceeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeesseeeaeeeeeeessssaeaeeess 266 Settling EMI SENE cai icie ie Gn a ee es Gece ee el Ce eae i 267 Remote Monitoring via E Map Server ccccccsssseeeeeeeescccssneseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeseeooesnneeesees 267 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications 209 Remote VICW sssaaa den caweeudaa bbeeas mean ruemes ems eaten arte lctaeareenea menus 269 SEMIN UNAM VI a e o 269 Working Witi My FAVOR i 272 Camera ZOOM FUNCTION enoia a a S E N E TO 2
116. Panel This panel appears 3 6 Ff 8 G 9 10 11 12 13114 15 16 SH Figure 1 93 The controls on the DSP Spot Monitor Panel No Name Description 1 Scan Automatically or manually rotates channels and stops rotation 2 Previous Page Goes to the pervious page of the scanned pages 3 Next Page Goes to the next page of the scanned pages 4 Exit Closes the DSP Spot Monitor Panel 5 Switch Opens or closes the channel menu 6 Channel Menu Displays the desired channel for single view 7 Screen Division Sets screen divisions to 1 4 6 8 9 10 12 and 16 8 Zoom Esc After single view click this button to restore the first scanned page but to the last channel when the screen division is set to 1 Quad Spot Monitors Controller The Controller integrates the GV Multi Quad Card with TV monitor spot monitor applications It features e Upto 5 TV monitors can be controlled e TV Monitor 1 supports up to 16 screen divisions and TV Monitor 2 to TV Monitor 5 support 1 and 4 divisions Different screen divisions can be set up on each monitor The channel sequence of screen divisions is user defined Note The Controller does not support the videos from GV Video Server Page 85 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Setting up the Controller On the main screen click the Configure button and select Quad Spot Monitors Setup This window appears TY Quad Setting a tt Py EEIN a ra rv E rs ideo Enable C
117. SErvera a aa did die 325 ihe SMS Server WinGOwW avisan nes dencatavien ee areas ie 326 SMS Server Sl Dita dadas 327 DEVICE SENGS aaiae o a elated dedi aiehesatasee A 327 Jn A 328 PCC OUTIL SENINGS iee bs bese qteneecacalocce a ns Gatun Sache Eae enon bc seesates 331 SMS LG iaa 333 Selma ONS LOG 1d ltd 333 WIC WING OMS LO uti lerada 333 PassWord SCCURINY Aeensdic wr eaa a a veal 334 Connecting GV System to SMS Servel ccccccssssesseseeeeceecccnnsseeeeeeceenssseeeeeeeeeconsnseeeseeesoes 334 Setting Mobile NUMDEES iuscsioradari in o ados 336 Page 324 Via a GSM GPRS modem GV System lets you send SMS Short Message Service messages when an alert condition happens The modem can be installed at either a separate server or the same computer server equipped with GV System This chapter introduces how to manage a GSM GPRS modem with the GV developed SMS Server program and how to configure the Main System to send out SMS alerts Installing SMS Server To install the SMS Server application follow these steps 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD to the PC connected to a GSM GPRS modem lIt will run automatically and a window appears 2 Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item 3 Click SMS Server and follow the on screen instructions Page 325 Chapter 10 Short Message Service The SMS Server Window Run the SMS Server program from the Start menu Device Information Device GMB PCS Band Gohl
118. Setting Preset Dwell Time s Cancel Ade O M Preset Mo Dwell Time jae oon oo ha Figure 1 30 2 Select a Preset as a start point Set the Dwell Time that the PTZ will remain in a preset 4 Click Add and repeat Steps 2 3 to build more points in the tour Setting Up Password The password setup allows you to assign permission and rights to users You can create up to 1 000 passwords The system will control and restrict access to system resources based on the permission and rights associated with each user account Only Supervisor account level is pre set with the access to the Password Setup function Click the Configure button point to Password Setup and select Local Account Edit to display the following window Page 31 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Password Setup Guest M Accountis disabled Expire in User PowerUser ID 2 2 2 Password dh Supervisor Hint 1 A Level PowerLlser User cannot change password Force Password change at nest logon Disable user if do not login after day s Exportthis ID for IR Remote Control Gy Keyboard b Monitor Start Camera Live W Monitor Stop EH Ol i Network Start 71h 5k 9h 13 Iv Network Stop W Schedule Start ad Ea Ea i a Schedule Stop wo abw 7w iiw 15 Input State wd iy ol 121 16 i Output Control u a Audio Live ystem Setting ideo Attribute Ej Ol i Object Tracking wir Edit Password Supervisor Orly 2 E i
119. Start Monitoring All Type Events Ie rer ic eran ia mre hrdia ii Page Setup o A s Header um ia tatana e rose Mcreator Geovision a aed fete z V User defined data tien k a este bie E Monthly report Footer Y Print time mn man t Print time and date Printout Figure 9 25 Page 308 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Monitoring and Managing Subscribers This section describes how to monitor and manage subscribers in these parts 1 Showing I O Status 2 I O Activation 3 Camera Audio Control 4 Camera Monitor 5 Viewing Subscriber Information and 6 Subscription Service Options Showing I O Status You can view the status of input devices at the subscriber s site as well as forcing the outputs On the Subscriber List No 4 Figure 9 1 right click one online subscriber and then select Show I O status to display this window 1 0 Status Module v input Input 4 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 MA MA NA MA PA WIA iz A WIA MIA WIA BIA WIA Status Normal Trigger Output O Force Output Figure 9 26 Module Select a module from the drop down list Input Indicates the status of input devices of the selected module The blue icon means the input is deactivated the red lightening icon means the input is activated Output To force an output installed at the subscriber site select a desired output pin from the drop down list and then click the Force Output button For this the subscr
120. The supervisor is given the highest priority to control the PTZ camera and wont be restrained by 60 second time limit When the supervisor logs in WebCam the Timer shows 999 The PTZ Speed button in the lower part allows you to configure the speed of a PTZ camera up to five levels I O Control The new interface provides real time graphic displays of camera and I O status and alarm event Additionally you can force output as well as enable and disable I O devices to the remote GV System Click on the I O Control button No 4 Figure 6 20 to bring out the I O control panel Page 217 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam ALARM LIST Enable Disable lia ALARM LIST O DEVICE eR 2008 1221 Be rac p f 11 3316 f 11 33 19 E 11 33 36 Output Reset EA 11 33 37 E Module 01 Imput 1 i Camera 1 E Camera 2 E Camera 3 E Camera 4 mp Camera 5 E Camera b E Camera T wp Camera E E Camera Y E Camera 10 E Camera 11 ap Camera 12 Output 13 Output 2 Figure 6 25 I O Control The alarm status is displayed in three levels The first level indicates date second indicates time and the third indicates alarm ID Clicking the Reset button will clear the alarm list To initiate an output device click the Enable button highlight an output and then click the Output button The Timer functions the same as in the PTZ control panel Each user will be given 60 seconds of control time while the supervi
121. Vlad e a a cheeses 293 Connecting to C nter V2 ririn aaa aa aaa Oa Ka A aaa sateen 298 Normal Mode Slip a ono e Ltd 298 Panie BUON SUD a 304 Detecuing Input Stats tii 305 EVENT LOG BOW SO ac aaia 305 Opening ine Event LO o o ee 306 FRONDO TH C4 VE LOG siria tidad 306 Event LOG cy AAA e nn eer A A 307 o ete eer een oR en ae ea nn pene ee ea eRe ee een eee ee ee nee ee 308 Monitoring and Managing Subscribers cccccesseeesseeeeeeenseeeeseeenseeeeeesseeeseoensseesseoensseessens 309 SOWING A A 309 VO ERa DE Sd leas 309 Gamer Audi CONO E A E a di 310 Ganera Montt o lo 311 Viewing Subs ciber Into MAN is o ida 312 SUDSCHIDIOMN GOMO ss cti todito 312 Instant Recording and PlayDaCkKoisacniaaa ridad 312 Enabling LIVS VICW tad 312 Recording and Playing Back Instantly oooococcccononccccnnncoconnnnononononnnnnnonannncononcnnnnnns 313 QUIPULA IS a 313 Forcing OUMU Ol Gente Velada 313 Forcing Qutu ora SUIS CD e eo is pelin e de 314 INGUTICATIOIN OOO Sinaloa de 314 Page 280 SMS Ae Siurana lc 315 seting SINS Vo e o e a a 315 GOMNMECTING to SMS SEVERA 316 Sending OM Sei dd ld 317 E Mail Aleida 317 Seta IUD ONG cti ii iii 317 o A PP ene ee eee 318 MAD ICING aoras ee aa a aaa a eaa E ara O aaa O EEan EAE nee 319 Alarm REPOL usaras 319 RESTING ANA m REDO nriran a a a a N 319 Editing Alarm Report GateQores iia 320 COO Ul Flag S iiae E A 321 Marking the Events with Colorful Flags cccccccccooc
122. a A A ti 352 The desk Ce a e de 352 GV GSSKIOD Features nasa aaa 353 Authentication Se Vease caia 357 Stalling the Sever o ea a e ao ene 357 A o cas heen N E A 357 Greatinig a DVR LS buscas 358 EAO SO AAA a othe icene ud ie 359 Staring SAN lio 360 Connecting GV System to the SCrvel ccccccccccccssssssssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaagaas 361 BACKUP SIS asta 362 Fast Backup ANG Restore ia 364 stalling TGs FV PrOgr am in a 364 RUANINO WG BE ROO Minas acarrean 364 a o ee ee ee eee ee eee 365 OGUSTOMMIZING Me Feature S ii iii 366 Backing up and Restoring SeuinGS sxc Gti ol eet Ha eerie 367 Hot Swap RECO IN O iaa A A A 369 The Media Man Tool Window occccccccoccconcccconcconcncnoncconcnononcnnononnncnnnononancnnnononancnnnnnnnanennnnss 369 AOAN A A a attain 370 REMOVING a DISK DIV Na NA rd 371 Backing UP VICWEOG NCS uisacdiioiarisiocic iii iii 371 Page 337 This chapter discusses some advanced level features and utilities that could help administrator to maximize system performance in a security network Dynamic DNS The Dynamic DNS is an application that allows users to register domain names that always point to their GV Systems This application is only necessary when your GV System is using a dynamic IP address If so the DDNS will update GV System s IP address to DNS Server in every 10 minutes Therefore even if your GV System s IP address changes you can still locate it by using the registered
123. a Wavelet codec at this link http geo support dipmap com 100 remote waveletcodec zip gt GV System version 6 0 is not compatible with Remote View version 5 4 0 1 or earlier Make sure your GV System and Remote View are both version 6 0 or later Page 374 Troubleshooting 2 Network ports used in the remote applications Page 375 WebCam Http 80 FTP 21 Command 4550 Data 5550 Audio 6550 Remote Control 3389 SSL 443 Mobile 8866 Mobile RPB 5511 3G RTSP TCP 8554 3G RTP RTCP UPP 17300 17380 RemotePlayBack RPBSvr 5066 TCPSvr 3550 Server 5610 TwinServer Server 9650 Multicast 19650 TwinDVR Http 80 FTP 21 Command 4550 Data 5550 Remote Control 3389 IP Multicast OOOO O DMMCast 3650 Authentication Server Server 3663 SMS Serer 6886 CenterV2 Center 5547 Command 5548 Connection Port 5545 Data 5549 Audio 5546 Connection 5545 Dispatch Server Server 21112 Server 20001 FTP 21 Control Center Command Port 3388 Data Port 5611 Log Port 5552 TCP Server Server 3550 Wiegand Capture Server Server 5612 WebCam Troubleshooting 1 A message can t connect to server appeared when GV System is connected gt VV VV WV Check ports 4550 and 5550 are enabled in Firewall Check whether ports 4550 and 5550 are occupied by other applications Check NAT port mapping is correct Check whether the dynamic IP address of GV System is change
124. a next or previous video event available Advanced Search 1 Click the Advance button No 7 Figure 4 1 and select Advanced Search to call up the following dialog box Alternatively press F8 on the keyboard to call it up Page 147 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Time Period Depiction O ae View Log Using Time Period selector it is star Time aran A 3 A h a IF possible to display all available recording 2 i between two specific points in time End Time 4 O27 12015 h 52033 Select Cameras Ea Oj Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Y Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Figure 4 6 2 Specify the desired date time period and cameras for search Click OK to start searching 4 Inthe Video Event list the events matching the search criteria will be highlighted in gray color Click the Play button to play back the highlighted events Timeline Search In addition to Date Tree the system provides you another graphical search method called Timeline to locate the desired video events within a set period of time 1 Select the desired view mode for playback by clicking the View Mode button If you select Single View assign a camera from the Camera drop down list 2 Click the Advanced button No 7 Figure 4 1 and select Timeline Search This window appears 9 16 1 12 18 14 15 106 17 18 19 20 21
125. aaaseseeeeeeeeeeseseeseeeaaaaags 361 BACKUP VS ii A a iba 362 Fast Backup and Restore iii 364 ASANI ING FB Pro draMiscial aia 364 ALIA TG ett FO Oba senan A 364 Selecting a SKIN cccccccccceccccssccessssseseneceeeeeeeeeeseeceeccousessseeneeeeeeeeseeeescccassssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseecsssassooes 365 GUSTONMZIMG MEG Features nt e eee ia at cals 366 Backing up a d Restoring Settings iii ae ee A 367 FIOUSW ap Record IO tra 369 The Media Man Tool WindOW ooocccnncccoccnncccncncconcnononccnnnnononcnnnononancnnnonnnnronnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnennnancnss 369 o o e A te aia eto iat eerie lia 370 REMOVINO a DISK DIV calidad iran a e o veda 371 Backing UN VIEWLOG Fl Serratos aaea a 371 TroUbleShOOUNO sustos aaaea a he xili Chapter 1 Configuring Main SyYSteM ccceeeeeeeee A SYSTEM CONTGQUIATION aiii A a Adis 6 Configuring Global Recording Parameters cccccccsssseeecceeeeeseeeeseeeceeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeesessaaaeeeeeeesesseaeess 7 Adj stina Individual G ama ii eb 13 Setting Up Day Night Recording MoOdE occcccccccccccconcccnnncccnonnnnccononnnnonannnnnnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 17 Geo Mpeg4 ASP Advanced Settings ccccccccccooconccnnnnccnonnnanccononononnnnnennnnnonononanccnnnnnnnnnnnnos 18 Configuring Hotline Network Notification cccccccccoccnncconnnccccnnnoncconnnnononannonononononnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnns 19 Selecta Screen La yo a ete coe ae eae oneal eee nl ees 21 Launching GV System fro
126. age Service Message Filter i Server Setting x General Message Filter Notify Allow Message Type Wideo Lost P Saon E A E A TE LO Trigger Camera Motion Intruder Missing Object Unattended Object POS Loss Prevention Disk Full Recording abnormal detected DA Surveillance system abnormality Center W S Md Connection Lost Subscriber Login Subscriber Logout User defined MI Tame Fb awa Figure 10 4 Server Setting Message Filter Check the desired alert conditions to send SMS messages The user defined condition refers to the SMS messages sent manually in Center V2 and VSM See Sending SMS in Chapter 1 and Chapter 3 in the CMS User s Manual Page 329 Chapter 10 Short Message Service Notify la Server Setting E x General Message Filter Motify Check Internet Connectivity Reference F li b6 95 1 1 Test Send SMS notification when no conmectyity Country Code fate Mobile Mumber 0939234697 Figure 10 5 Server Setting Notify Check Internet Connectivity Assign any available IP address and click the Test button to know if your SMS Server can access Internet Send SMS notification when no connectivity Sends SMS notification to the three defined mobile numbers when the SMS Server cannot access Internet Mobile Icon Check the icon and define the number for the SMS notification Up to three recipients can receive the SMS simultaneously Page 330
127. age will pop up on the screen In the Auto close abnormal notify after x sec field you can define the duration of the message to close itself automatically After settings you can manually detect all input states by selecting Detect Input Status Or you can just start I O monitoring When the system detects any change of input state you may see this warning message Detect Input Status i WF F Please verify the following abnormal inputs re Module Pin 1 Input 1 Input 2 1 1 Input 3 1 Input 4 Setup Figure 2 11 Page 111 Chapter 2 I O Applications I O Enable Setting You can manually arm or disarm any I O devices without interrupting the monitoring For example when an output alarm is triggered at the front door you can turn off the specific output while the system keeps on recording and I O monitoring Arming Disarming I O devices 1 On the main screen click the I O button and select I O Enable Setting This dialog box appears 1 0 Activation Y TEST27 vy Module 1 6 7 de Input Fin i 43 a Output Pin 4 Reset Output cancel Apply Figure 2 12 2 Check the Input Output to arm or uncheck the Input Output to disarm the device s Then click Apply to verify the changes Page 112 Chapter 2 I O Applications Advanced I O Panel The Advanced l O Panel provides a centrally managing solution for I O devices installed across a wide area It simplifies the process
128. ality 1 Click the Configure button point to Video Attributes and then click Advanced The Advanced Video Attributes dialog box appears 2 Click the HDD Calculator tab at the right bottom The HDD Calculator dialog box appears HDD Calculator Required Storage Analysis alle Select Camera 2 Select Video Compression Codec i Geohpeqd Geo bpeg4 ASP Geo H264 Advanced Geo Mpeg4 ASF 3 Select Recording Guality 1 2 3 W4 J 5 4 Set Test Time Total Test Time 0 Hourtz z Minute s O Hours 5 Minutels Set Expected Recording Time 0 Day s 0 Hourts 5 hMinute s Calculat Mo E A Figure 1 88 Select Camera Select cameras to be used for recording Select Video Compression Codec Check the desired codec s to be used for recording You can choose more than one codec to compare their performance m Select Recording Quality Check the desired quality value s for recording You can choose more than one quality value for comparison E Set Test Time The system will process a real time test recording based on the time you set For example if you enter 24 hours here it will take more than one day to do the test recording So avoid entering the longer test time to save you time Set Expected Recording Time Enter the time you wish for recording 3 Click the Calculate tab to see the result Note A calculation difference by 5 from actual disk usage is expected Page 81 Chapte
129. ample if you set 10 Frames sec in the field the maximum frame this camera will record is 10 frames second This setting does not mean it always records at 10 frames second because the actual recording frame rate is also affected by other settings in the system and CPU loading Max Frame Rate Rec of Non Motion for Economic Round the Clock This option provides a space saving solution for the round the clock recording Set the maximum frame rate for non motion periods so as to save as much storage space as possible Motion Detect Motion Sensitivity There are 10 levels of sensitivity for motion detection And there are further sublevels from 9 to 9 9 The default value is set to 9 5 The higher the value the more sensitive the system is to the motion Mask Filter Mask instructs the system to ignore movement within the masked area Mask could be applied to repetitive motion that should be ignored within the surveillance area such as street trees Buttons used to modify the masked area are as below Apply to all camera Motion Detect A Adjust Sensitivity Level 9 9 9 Motion Sensitivity 35 gt fe Adjust Sensitivity Level 1 10 Mask Filter ia Clear mask Set mask color Cut mask Add mask Figure 1 11 Page 15 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Monitor Control Apply to all camera Recording Codec Monitor Control Day Night Recording Mode Advanced Codec Setup Alarm Type Delay Time Setup Delay Time S
130. an display Main System and ViewLog in two separated monitors To make this operation possible your system must equip with VGA card having dual video outputs Each output should be connected to its own monitor display 1 Right click on the Windows desktop and select Properties This displays the Display Property dialog box 2 Select Settings enable Extend my Windows desktop onto this Monitor and then click the Apply button Display Properties ax Themes Desktop Screen Saver Appearance Settings Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of pour monitors Display 2 Default Monitor on AT RADEON 9600 Seres Secondary Color quality Highest 32 bit NN UN NN Screen resolution Less More 200 by 600 piselz Use this device as the primary monitor M Extend my Windows desktop onto this monitor Identify Troubleshoot Advanced Figure 11 14 3 Go the system folder and locate DMPOS exe File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sak ki gt pi J Search Folders ElbexDIl dll eMap emp mi Dos2kreg exe eMap exe m dawn gif eMap StringTable DrawFrm dll eMap view ocx Figure 11 15 Page 350 4 ee NS pi Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Double click the program to display the Set Application Function Position window Set Application Function Position t X Screen Setup MultiCam ViewLog RPB EZviewLog LPR DMMult
131. appears Camera Popup Setting TY 4 Tv 2 a tv4 s Time Setting Dwell time 5 Sec Interrupt time 2 Sec Invoke Popup Camera ne 4 Motion Only wg Motion Only moa io Only 10 Motion Only e Bath T 11 Motion ony Imation Only W 12 Motion Only Motion Only W 16 Motion Only Select All Clear All canoe Figure 1 99 A a al 4 ll D 4 MA AA amp M m TV tabs TV1 to TV5 Click the TV tab to select the TV monitor on which the selected camera is alarmed with pop up windows Dwell Time Specify how long a pop up camera window remains on the monitor screen when an event occurs Set the time between 1 and 120 seconds Interrupt Time Specify the interval between pop up camera windows when events occur Set the time interval between 1 and 60 seconds Page 89 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System E Invoke Popup Camera Select the camera s to be alarmed with pop up windows when events occur and use the drop down list to select the type of alert events There are three types of alert events Motion Only Motion is detected during the monitoring 1 O Only I O devices are triggered Both Invoke Popup Alerts of motion and triggered I O devices 3 Click OK to apply the settings 4 Start monitoring so that camera windows pop up when events occur Tip All cameras can be repetitively setup on different TV monitors If one camera is selected on mor
132. ars Camera Mapping 5etup x Mame camera 1 Device Pelco Spectra Ill Address adar 0 e PT Inactivity Idle over a0 SOc f Auto Auto Scan O Preset Preset 1 7 Multi Position Tour Setting Figure 1 29 Camera Mapping Setup 2 Select a camera channel by using the camera tabs in the upper part Select the PTZ camera connected to the selected channel from the Device drop down list 4 Ifyou have two identical PTZ cameras set in the system you may use the Address drop down list to choose the one with the correct address 5 Click OK to apply the settings PTZ Idle Protection When the PTZ remains stationary for a certain time the camera can automatically activate the auto mode move to the designated preset point or start the preset tour 1 Click the Configure button and select Camera Mapping PTZ Dome The Camera Mapping Setup dialog box Figure 1 29 appears Page 30 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 2 Select the desired camera from the Device drop down list and check PTZ Inactivity 3 Set the idle time after which to start the protection mode 4 Select Auto Preset or Multi Position Tour as protection mode Setting Multi Position Tour You can create a PTZ tour with up to 16 preset points 1 Select Multi Position Tour on the Camera Mapping Setup dialog box see Figure 1 29 and click the Setting button This dialog box appears User define Multiple Preset Tour Tour
133. arts The latest event starts playing when ViewLog starts Default view mode when viewlog starts Select the desired view mode at startup Advance Play Method Frame by Frame without audio Plays back video frame by frame This method delays playback depending on bandwidth and computer performance but all video frames are fully played back Real time Plays back video on real time This method saves waiting time for rendering but drop frames to give the appearance of real time playback Network Speed and Buffering This feature provides network buffering options to meet your bandwidth needs This section is only available when the Connect to Remote ViewLog Service feature is enabled For Remote ViewLog Service see Playing Back over Internet Using Control Center Server later in this chapter Choose Connect Speed Select your connection speed for LAN Broadband or Narrowband The selection will bring up default settings in the Advanced Play Method and Network Buffering options Video download and playback simultaneously This method is recommended for broadband and busy network It partially downloads and stores a file in a buffer before it begins to play Specify the interval between downloaded files Page 160 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Display Quad view Play Setting Display Database Cache User Interface Aspect ratio 4 3 bl Event list Event Time Thumbnail Frame Interval 1
134. asily locate a desired event and instantly play it back by double clicking on the image frame Object Index Setup You can select up to 4 cameras to view live video frames 1 Click the Configure button and then select Object Index Monitor Setup The Camera Applied Object Index Monitor dialog box appears 2 Check the desired cameras for the application Click the Configure button to display the Video Object Setup window Video Object Setup Object Index Object Monitor Mask Filter m Eye Storage Available 4 388 Set Location Mw Recycle iv Keep Days 30 Video Player Quick Search Setup f Object Index Face Detection Show Object Cancel Figure 1 57 Video Object Setup for Object Index 4 Select one camera from the drop down list and enable Camera for the following setup m Mask Filter Use the mouse to outline a mask area where motion will be ignored m Set Location Click the button to assign a path to save the file m Keep Days Check the item and specify the days to store the files from 1 day to 999 days Page 56 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System m Recycle When both Keep Days and Recycle are selected the system applies whichever condition comes first For example if storage space is lower than that is required to hold the days of data specified in Keep Days recycle comes first Video Player Select one of these player for playback function ViewLog or Quick Search Show Object W
135. assword Export Import RESH Delete Save Figure 6 35 The Edit Host Window Host List When a host server is created it will appear in the Host List section at the left side Each server can be identified by its given host name Clicking on the host name and its information will be displayed in the Host Information section Adding Host Server Click the New button and all fields in the window will be cleared In the Host Name field type a name to identify the designated GV Server Type the IP address or domain name ofthe GV Server Type a valid user name and passwords with privilege to use this function Leave all port configuration as defaults at 4550 5550 6550 and 80 respectively unless otherwise necessary Click the Save button and then the GV Server will appear in the Host List section with the given ID name Editing Host Server Select the GV Server you wish to edit in the Host List section All information of the selected server will be displayed in the Host Information section Change the information as required and click the Save button Removing Host Server Select the GV Server you wish to remove from the Host List section and click the Delete button Page 228 Creating a Multiple Host a multiple host Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam You can create a multiple host including the camera channels all from different IP addresses Manual Creation of a Multiple Host There are two
136. at sub levels cannot be forced manually e g Figure 2 24 However if the output is not in a cascading hierarchy you can definitely force it manually e g Figure 2 25 Elevators Entry J Toilet 2 09 e Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 Output 1 18 Output 3 9 Output 2 9 Output 3 Output 4 Output 3 9 Output 4 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Page 120 Chapter 2 I O Applications Editing Background Image With the Background Image feature you can import a floor plan to lay out the locations of triggered I O devices This feature works in the Icon style of the Advanced l O List 1 To switch to the Icon style click the Advanced I O List Style button No 4 Figure 2 13 and then select Icon 2 Select a group in the Advanced I O List The I O icons of this group will be displayed Right click on the right screen and select Background Image to import a graphic file 4 Right click on the right screen and uncheck Auto Arrange Now you can freely drag the I O icons to the desired locations on the imported map 5 To add images to another group repeat the steps 2 to 4 I O Central Panel egle o aa Mode Default E Advanced I O List Entrance Qs Input 1 Input 3 L 9 Output 1 ab Input 3 9 Output 4 2 8 Output 2 O 9 Output 3 Output 4 E Lobby O 2 Input 2 Output 3 9 Output i ote WA j 9 Output 4
137. atch CN MC I Toa 5 Sec Kii Notit Figure 2 28 shouldn t cause any output triggers in the cascading hierarchy Garage 442 Input 1 a8 Input 2 Output 1 Output 2 9 Output3 door opens So now you have the options gt At default the simple input trigger output setting is applied at the Advance I O Panel when I O monitoring is activated For this example Input 2 will trigger Output 3 gt To only apply the cascade triggers set in the Advanced I O Panel and ignore the simple input trigger output setting enable Use adv Logical input result as input status from the I O icon on the main screen and Enable advanced logical input in Multicam from a certain group see Figure2 16 together gt To switch to the simple input trigger output setting just disable Enable advanced logical input in Multicam Page 122 power switch card reader light alarm Figure 2 29 Both Input 1 power switch and Input 2 card reader should be activated together to trigger Output 1 light Output 2 Simply activating Input 2 card reader Output 3 door opens Chapter 2 I O Applications Managing a Group of I O Devices With groups of I O devices set up on the I O Advanced Panel you can enable or disable these I O devices by groups Enabling a Group On the I O Advanced Panel right click a desired group and select Start Monitoring All input devices of this group are now enabled Whe
138. ber site to match the time at the Center V2 m Notify Center V2 when the storage space was full Notifies the Center V2 when the subscriber s storage space is insufficient Page 301 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 I O Device The settings define which I O condition to notify Center V2 To configure these settings first disable the Monitoring all type events option in Figure 9 15 Advance Settings General Camera Other I O Device O Device Module 1 T Allow Center to Enable Disable 1 0 I Send to Center when 10 is triggered e With Camerale Set Camerals Event Type Normal b I Output Module Moa 1 Fin 3 Event Type EN Output 7 gt T Allow Center to force output Security Service Momentary Mode IM Start monitoring normal events when the selected pin is triggered Mod 1 Pin 1 e Stop monitoring normal events when the selected pin is triggered Mod 1 Pin 1 Maintained Mode Start manitoring normal events when the selected pin is WH eer Fin 1 gt Stop manitoring normal events when the selected pin ts MEF lek iy Cancel Figure 9 19 Advanced Settings I O Device I O Device Notifies the Center V2 when I O devices are triggered Use the Arrow buttons to configure each l O device or click the Finger button to apply to all I O devices Allow Center V2 to Enable Disable I O Allows Center V2 manually arm disarm any I O devices at
139. c chart Data Query To locate an event click Data Query on the menu bar The selections included inside are 1 Monitor 2 System 3 Login 4 Counter and 5 POS The five categories are based on those of System Log in the Main System see System Log in Chapter 1 so that you can locate any event type recorded in System Log Monitor System Login Counter The four selections let you locate an event about monitoring system login logout and counter status The dialog boxes of the four selections are similar so we take Monitor as an example below Click Data Query on the menu bar and select Monitor to display the following window Define your search condition in each field and click OK to start searching Page 237 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam System ee Event Type Device Module Camera 1 Module 1 2004 08 04 ES booo fisoros Cancel Figure 6 45 Locating a system event m POS The selection lets you locate a desired POS transaction event Click Data Query on the menu bar and select POS to display the following window 2001 220 ai heag pen oo 00 00 fess28 Event Type Device lan pos 1 A Condition 1 Coke Condition 2 Coke e Condition 3 Coke Statistic Coke Sum Average Cancel Figure 6 46 Locating a POS event Restrict your search to a certain date time event type POS sy
140. camOlicamo 206 Event20051 2061411550 Pass FAttulticam locgicarmOlicamb0111 206Event20051 2061412140 Pass Fimulticarn loc camO111 01 Event20051014155634001 avi Mo Pass 143 166 Current Total Frame 12 6 2005 14 12 00 531 Figure 11 13 Page 348 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities The controls in the window No Name Description 1 Open File Finds a video file to play 2 First Frame Goes to the first frame of the file 3 Play Plays the file 4 Previous Frame Goes to the previous frame of the file 5 Next Frame Goes to the next frame of the file 6 Previous Watermarked Frame Goes to the previous frame that contains watermark 7 Next Watermarked Frame Goes to the next frame that contains watermark The Watermark Viewer displays the verifying result as follows m Checksum Ifthe video stream has not been tampered the Check Sum section displays a message Pass Otherwise a message No Pass will appear m Original vs Extracted The Extracted section should have the same icon displayed as that in the Original section If not it indicates the video may have been altered 3 Click the Open File button No 1 Figure 11 13 select a video file and click Open The video file is then listed in the status field of the window Also you can drag multiple video files directly from storage folders to the status field 4 Highlight the file and double click it to play Page 349 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Twin View Display You c
141. cates the data transmission speed after quality adjustment Switching to Full Screen View For full screen display first select the Enable Directdraw Overlay option Figure 1 3 Click the Configure button and then select Full Screen to switch to full screen Right click on the full screen and select Toggle Full Screen to switch back to normal view screen Alternatively press F on the keyboard to toggle between full screen view and normal screen view Listening to Live Audio Choose the Configure button point to Wave out and then select the audio channel you wish to listen to Page 39 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Stopping Video Lost Watchdog When the video signal is weak the software watchdog will try to recover the lost video by restarting the system and even rebooting the computer If the video lost watchdog feature is not required you have the option to disable it To disable this feature click the Configure button point to Video Signal Diagnostic and select Disable Video Signal Weak Watchdog Note This option is only available for GV 600 650 and 800 Cards Deactivating Video Lost Beep To stop a beep noise when any of videos lost click the Configure button point to Video Signal Diagnostic and select Disable Video Lost Beep Start Stop Monitoring Select the Monitor button and select to start or stop all or individual camera monitoring Camera Name at the upper left corner of the view screen change
142. ce is connected to the system To add and to configure a device see Setting Up I O Devices earlier in this chapter I O Input Control Panel After a device is added to the system click the I O button on the main screen to bring out the on screen control panel for inputs and outputs see Figure 2 6 and Figure 2 7 If only one I O device is connected to the system click the I O button and select Module 1 to bring up the control panel if more than one I O modules are connected to the system clicking the I O button will list all I O modules connected to the system Select one to bring out the control panel Mode Mom ber aut Device Figure 2 6 Input control panel The input panel displays status of current input sensors The walking man icon indicates the sensor is being triggered I O Output Control Panel Click the Out button to switch to the following output panel Pressing an alarm icon will send an output signal to the corresponding relay Module Number Output Device o e e g e g e E Figure 2 7 Output Control Panel Page 108 Chapter 2 I O Applications Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Alarm Event It is possible to direct a PTZ camera to a present location upon an alarm event The setup determines how the PTZ camera moves to respond to an l O triggered event Click the Configure button and select I O Application Setting from the menu to bring up the following dialog box
143. ck if you ve made these folders shared for intended PCs 5 Click the Add button A path to the server is now established E LAN ViewLog Controller we Check ViewLog500 exe Loading DB file Check log file folder System B SystemB gv650 ViewLog500 exe Stand By 3 G Data G West figv650 viewLog500 exe Add Figure 4 27 6 Highlight the path and click the Play button to open ViewLog that is loaded with video files More paths may be added for fast access through the application Page 166 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Playing Back over Internet Using Control Center Server Through a network connection the Control Center Server enables access to the recorded files of a remote GV System and allows you to play back video by using the player ViewLog It features e All functions provided by ViewLog are available such as Backup Save as AVI Object Search and so on e Capability of disabling certain camera connections under heavy network load e Resuming file transfers for backup Accessing the Remote ViewLog Before you start make sure the Control Center Server feature is enabled in the remote GV System On the main screen click the Network button point to Control Center Server and select Remote ViewLog Service to start the connection At the local site 1 On the function panel click the Tools button No 15 Figure 4 2 and select Connect to Remote ViewLog Service This dialog box appears C
144. cking Up Log Data Using System LOJ ccccoonnccnnccccncccnonananonconnnnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnannnnnrrrrnnnaaannnnns 186 Backing Up Files USING ViewLog sicario iia 187 Backing Up at the Clent PC yt A A A 191 Deleting Files Using Backup SyStem ccceeeeeeeecesssseeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeooenseeeeeeseeoeesneenenees 192 Deleting Files Usmo VIG WL OG iiivcsiescccccecraciccccneaceccanesincdcaecscica stecececssetuedubeceuundescientemecdcuseseuene 193 Repairing Damaged File Paths ccccseeeeessssseesseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeneasseeeeeesenonnensenenees 194 Page 182 Video files can be copied from the hard disk to external storage media such as CD R DVD MO or ZIP drives Video files saved on the hard disk can be easily deleted as well This chapter explains how to back up and delete video audio files using Backup System and ViewLog Backing Up Files Using Backup System Video and audio files may be backed up to a CD R through a third party application such as Nero or EasyCD as long as it contains the feature of paste Nero is used as an example below 1 Goto Windows Start and then select Backup System from the system folder The DMBackUp window appears e DMBackUp File Log wiew loj x Start Date Hour__ End Date Hour Backup Date Time Figure 5 1 The DMBackUp Window 2 Click the Backup button on the toolbar to bring up the following Backup Log dialog box Alternativ
145. click on the ViewLog button select Instant Play and then select the time length Time length choices include 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute and 5 minutes Page 41 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System System Log System Log displays detailed information about the GV System and remote operation This information is being saved in a database Access format for this can be a useful tool to Supervisor To view the System Log Click the ViewLog button and then select System Log from the menu This brings up the Live Log Brower viewer as shown below The Log Browser viewer displays five types of event information Use the control tab to switch between them Click the icon on the upper right corner to bring up Advanced Log Browser screen Monitor Displays information pertaining to motion and I O events Double click on the log list will allow you to view related video in ViewLog or Quick Search depending on the video player you selected in the Activate System Log dialog box See Figure 1 24 Live Log Browser Recycle Log 729 2000 16 48 Monitor System Login Counter POS 1 FOS 2 POS3 POS4 IL Time Device Information Event 100 02000 2 38 02 PM Camera 3 a Motion 101 Trop z2000 2 38 02 PM Camera 4 Ly Motion 102 02000 2 36 02 PM Camera 5 a Motion 103 FAO 2000 2 36 02 PM Camera 6 3 Motion 104 AO 2000 2 36 12 PM Camera 1 fa Motion 105 FAO ZO000 2 38 12 PM Camera 2 3 Motion 106 FAO 2000 2 36 12 PM Camera 3 f
146. cnnccnnnnccnonononccnnnonononannnnnnnnnnnnonannenons 321 Editing COUIFA Susi A E 322 Backup SEVES vnin n a 322 Page 281 Central Monitoring by Center V2 With Center V2 central monitoring station CMS can be deployed immediately because it brings multiple GV Systems together into an integrated interface allowing the operator to manage several systems from one point of control The basic feature of Center V2 is to view live video and receive video evidence in an attachment format when any alerts are sent to the Center V2 This helps the remote end operator easily determine the nature of the alarm Installing Center V2 There are two versions of Center V2 The standard version coming with the system software can serve up to 5 subscribers and 80 channels at a time The professional version can serve up to 500 subscribers and 800 channels For professional one see CMS User s Manual Before installation make sure your computer meets the following minimum requirements The standard version OS Windows 2000 Windows XP Server 2003 CPU Pentium 4 2 0G Memory 256 MB RAM Hard Disk 60 GB VGA NVIDIA GeForce II 32MB 1024 x 768 screen resolution Network TCP IP To install Center V2 follow these steps 1 Insert the Software CD to your CMS s Central Monitoring Station computer It will run automatically and a window appears 2 Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item 3 Click CenterV2 and follow the on screen instructi
147. cted pin is ON When an assigned input module is activated all designated alarms and alerts will be disabled Assign an installed input module and a pin number for the application Deactivate Notification m Triggered by Select an alert condition from the drop down list for the application For example if you choose Motion all designated alarms and alerts upon motion detection will be deactivated when an assigned input module is activated Deactivate Selected Notification Select the alarms and alerts you want to be deactivated such as Output Wave Alarm and or Send Alert when the assigned input module is activated Page 110 Chapter 2 I O Applications Detecting Input State This feature is designed to monitor all inputs for a change of state whenever you start I O monitoring A change from the defined state N O to N C or N C to N O can activate an alarm condition e g a warning light or buzzer 1 On the main screen click the I O button and then select Detect Input Status This dialog box appears 4 12 Module 1 v 4 Input 1 4 gt Input 2 4 Input 3 Y 4 Input 4 Auto close abnormal notify after 5 Sec cancer _ Figure 2 10 2 Check the Input s you want to monitor For any state change you can trigger an alarm output by checking Force Output when one or more inputs are abnormal and assigning the output module and pin number When the state change is detected a warning mess
148. d Check Ethernet adapter ADSL modem must use the PPP SLIP device Check whether Web server changes download timing Dynamic Lan IP 1 min Dynamic WAN IP 5 min 2 Unable to use the two way audio feature gt Y VV WV Check whether port 6550 is available Check the client PC s sound card driver This feature requires DirectX 8 or later Perform upgrade if necessary This feature requires Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Perform upgrade if necessary Check GV System s audio signal by using the Camera Audio Install function See Camera Audio Install in Chapter 1 3 Unable to run MPEG4 Encoder Viewer and WebCam RPB gt The security level of your IE browser may prevent WebCam components from downloading to your PC Start IE browser and go to Tools Internet Options Security Custom Level In Active X controls and plug ins options select Enable or Prompt and then click OK Log in to GV System again and WebCam components should be downloaded properly 4 What version of OS does G View support gt G View of V6 0 or above supports WinCE 3 0 Pocket PC2002 Pocket PC2002 Phone Edition Pocket PC2003 and Pocket PC2003 Phone Edition Page 376
149. d and configure I O devices HotLine Network tab is used to configure the system for connection to network or mobile Page 6 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System System Configure 3 gt Xj Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 I O Device HotLine Network General Setting Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Y Camera 6 Camera 9 Location Hame PTZ Control Pc b PT Device Setup Wideo Log Storage Startup Start Monitor Monitor All PT2 in 140 Multicast Server Available 1 67 GB Monitor Option Aa TT TCPAP Server e epa E Stan clay z a WebCam Server 10 79 2000 14 44 Modem Server Connect to VSM Twin Server Connect to Center Enable Directdra Overlay 2 e Enable De interlace Render Post Rec Motion 3 Sec e Pre Rec Motion b m Kee rss m Dave 20 W Recycle FT Send Event Alerts BI 2 Eaptiorn gt 3 p EventLog Size Es No ID D Name Mor Video Cip 5 Min Startup Auto Login b Send Alerts Approach gt p Camera Scan W Panel Resolution b E Mail HotlineS MS E Scan Delay 3 Sec b 10248769 z Miner har Remote Desktop 2 E Exit Option pMideo Record Auto Restart Windows A Use Digital Watermark Protection OK Cancel Figure 1 3 Configuring Global Recording Parameters Let s start with
150. d by the system state Setting up Keep Last Toggle Status In the System Configure dialog box Figure 2 3 select N O Toggle or N C Toggle click the Arrow button beside to check Keep Last Toggle Status Signal Type e CO N0 f NO Toggle E NAO Pulse e C NVC C NEC Toggle we Keep Last Toggle Status Figure 2 5 Page 106 Chapter 2 I O Applications Application Example Following two illustrations help you understand how the input works with the output set to Keep Last Toggle Status 1 Input N C Output N O Toggle Keep Last Toggle Status The triggered output remains ON even when you stop monitoring or restart the system N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O 1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger Stop monitoring Restart the system 2 Input N C Latch Trigger Output N O Toggle Keep Last Toggle Status When Latch Trigger works with Keep Last Toggle Status the output only has a momentary trigger but also needs to remain ON even when you stop monitoring or restart the system Therefore under the two conditions the output turns off until a new input trigger N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O 1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger Stop monitoring Restart the system Page 107 Chapter 2 I O Applications I O Control Panel I O control panel is used to control I O devices that are added to the system This control panel will not appear unless at least one I O devi
151. d you wish to remove from the filter list and then click the Remove Selected Command button to remove it Event Log Settings On the Center V2 window click the Event List button No 5 Figure 9 1 and select Event Log Setting to display the following dialog box Page 307 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Event Log Settings Event List Auto Import 1 Days Event Log Keep Days 30 1 Log Path cacenterv2tEveniLog 7 g Available 455 9 MA Cancel Figure 9 24 Event Log Settings Event List Auto Import Specify the number of days to be loaded when Event Log Browser is launched Event Log Keep Days Enter the number of days to keep log files m Recycle Delete the files of the oldest day when storage space is lower than 500MB Log Path Click the button to assign a storage path Page Setup You can create the Footer and Header on the printout of Event Log 1 On the Event Log Browser click the Page Setup button No 7 Figure 9 21 to display this dialog box 2 Check the items and type the information you want to print out Click OK to apply the settings Creator Event lists From 11 8 2006 to 11 8 2006 EventLog Browser User defined text Mas amp A n ek Y PE 7 H HS ga fai a Par me banir a ies 8 ID Type Message i a iaa rat i sa p System System Start Service as oak MABI R 1 Login Logout Login re agen s ieee 1 System
152. dow for the application Show Event Check to display motion or I O triggered events on the Host Information window Page 264 Chapter 7 E Map Application Viewing Host Information The Host Information window lists camera and l O device trigger information Click the Host Information button No 2 Figure 7 5 to display 10 xi TEST 102 HostName Date Time EventType cam Mod vo Name 1 TEST 103 2006 111 MIA N A Camera 1 TEST 104 2006 11 7 1 Camera 1 TEST 105 2006 11 NA Input 3 TEST101 2006 1 11 N A Input 1 8 Module 1 Input 1 np 1 18 Module 1 Input 2 Inpi 1 18 Module 1 Input 3 Inpi CAMERA 1 Motion Det Figure 7 8 Host Information The Host Information window allows you to play back events happened in the host sites Double click any camera event in the left hand list to display the remote playback window With this window you can play back an event speak to the host site and take a snapshot as well as download the event to the client PC PGeovision Demo 5 Elevator Figure 7 9 The Remote Playback Window Page 265 Chapter 7 E Map Application Accessing Remote ViewLog On the Remote E Map window the ViewLog button No 6 Figure 7 5 is designed for the Remote ViewLog function giving you remote access to the recorded files of DVR and playing back video by the player ViewLog For details on using the Remote ViewLog service see Steps 4 7 Remote ViewLog
153. e Ratio field shows each file s download progress and the Save Path field shows the location where files are downloaded to Download History Displays a history list of downloaded files in the RPB Client Double click the list will play back related files in the RPB monitoring window Connection Record Connection Record keeps track of the connections which makes your next connection more easily Save Connective Status Saves current connections to a path When open the RPB Client next time click the Connection Record button and then select Load Connective Status see descriptions below to look for this path for fast access to current connections Load Connective Status Loads connection status that was previously saved into a file by Save Connective Status described as above into the RPB Client Load Resume File If the connections were ended select this option to continue the downloading process Address Book The Address Book not only keeps connection information about the RPB sever but also allows quick connection and auto login to the RPB server Follow these steps to create an entry in Address Book Click the Address Book button No 9 Figure 4 36 to bring up the following dialog box Server Warne Server 1 ad Server 2 m da Group 2 Server Address A ooo IL Guest Password Port 5066 New Group New Server Delete connect Close Figure 4 37 Page 176 Chapter 4 P
154. e W Hostname W Camera name e Date W Time iv Delnterlace le Watermark WwW Transparent Text Set Font Page 152 Figure 4 10 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Stamp Text on the Image Select whether to include host name camera name date and or time stamp on the image Selecting Transparent Text will create the stamp on the transparent background Selecting Water Mark and Deinterlace will include the two features in the saved image Click the Set Font tab to set the font for the stamp The image Click on the image at the bottom to preview the stamp text Click on the image again to close the preview window 2 Name the file select a file format and then assign the location to save the image file Printing Images You can print images in three layout styles single view quad view or multi view 1 Click the View Mode button No 5 Figure 4 1 to decide the screen layout Note that Thumbnail View is not available for print 2 Select an event in the Video Events list No 4 Figure 4 1 and then click the Print button This dialog box appears Page Setup Image Ratio and Position m Height soo mo W Align to center Pos 1440 Pixels Pos Y Pixels 2430 print OK Page Setup Cancel Text Stamp and Position e Print host name fw Print camera name o El O E e Printimadge date ri o O E O E Print note Set Fant Figure 4 11
155. e Clean time Clean time 5 ZEC H Transaction end dwell time A sec 5 Figure 1 26 Page 27 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Configuring Object Counting Object counting in GV System provides bi directional counting of objects under the surveillance area When defined it could count any objects such as people vehicles animals etc 1 Click the Configure button and then select Counter Application Setting This brings up the following dialog box Camera Applied as Counter Choose Camera 1 iw 5 lw 3 iw 13 e 2 e E iw 10 iw 14 Ie 3 je 7 e 4 e E iw 12 iw 16 Update the Log every 60 M Show Object Figure 1 27 2 Select the desired cameras for the counter application 3 Click the Show Object item in the lower of the window to put a rectangle around the object being tracked 4 Click the Configure tab to open the Counter Application Setting dialog box shown as follows This is where you define the counter to count target objects Counter Application Setting Ehooese Camera camera 10 T Definition Define Detection Zones Define Object Size Sensitivity a _ _ Setting e Enable Counting Way Counting 2 Way Counting MW 1 gt 2 Alarm J 2 gt 1 Alarm Door Demo Option Test Count f Bounding Boxes On Moving Object e Enable Mask Figure 1 28 Page 28 Counting Result In 0 Test Out 0 CA Bounding Box Around Moving Object 4
156. e Frame up down Figure 4 39 Page 178 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Touch Screen Support By the touch of a finger the touch screen panel allows you to change screen divisions switch to full screen and close the ViewLog screen 1 Click the Tools button point to Tool Kit select Touch Screen Panel and click Panel Setup This dialog box appears Touch Screen Panel Setup iw Activate f Activate when enter Full Screen Mode only Co Aways Active Layout le Vertically C Horizontally ono Figure 4 40 2 Click Active to have these options Active when enter Full Screen Mode only Launches automatically the panel when the full screen view is applied Always Active Always displays on the ViewLog screen NW Layout Selecta vertical or horizontal panel Click OK for the above settings 4 To active the panel click the Tools button point to Tool Kit select Touch Screen Panel and click Panel Active 5 At the upper left corner of the screen an information window indicating date time and storage space will appear Right click it to open this touch panel o AUG 18 oe 18 46 40 ay aes Figure 4 41 Page 179 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Fast Key Reference This feature lets you view the fast key window of ViewLog giving you an instant reference Click the Tools button on the main screen and then select Fast Key to display the window o ne Thy juli E G HI J L
157. e Post Live View window No Name Description 1 Option Brings up these options Show Camera Name and Enable DirectDraw Change Camera Selects the desired camera for display 3 POS Live View Brings up these options Next Transaction Previous Transaction and Freeze Event 4 Zoom Switches to full screen view 5 File Save Saves live video in the local computer 6 Change Quality Adjusts video quality in 4 levels 7 Snapshot Takes a snapshot of the displayed live video 8 Stop Terminates the connection to the remote GV System 9 Play Connects to the remote GV System Instant Playback You can play back the video instantly by double clicking on any suspicious transaction items or cardholder s information Remote Play Back Play Figure 6 50 Page 241 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Mobile Phone Applications With the mobile phone capable of GPRS 3G and Wi Fi you can receive live videos from your GV System The GV mobile phone applications and their major features are listed below COEN Video streaming GV Video Server support PTZ control I O device control Remote Playback RPB and etc Video streaming GV Video Server support PTZ control I O device control Remote Playback RPB and etc Functions PTZ control output control and etc Video Streaming Remote Playback RPB PTZ control output control and etc Handheld Device View 3GPP OS Supported Non Windows Mobile phone TCP Po
158. e Startup Auto Login and click the Arrow button beside see Figure 1 3 The Startup Auto Login Setup dialog box appears 3 Type ID and Password to set up a user for auto login and click OK Startup Auto Login Setup NE i E MAN m Startup Auto Login ioe IO Password Ei Auto Login in Fullscreen Mode Startup and Hide into System Tray Cancel Figure 1 102 4 In the System Idle Protection dialog box Figure 1 101 enable the Auto Logout or Switch to Startup Login User if available option and then select Surpervisor or Supervisor Poweruser from the drop down list 5 Inthe System Idle Over field type the idle time from 10 to 300 seconds after which the specified user will be logged in Auto Start Recording If the administrator does not press the mouse or press a key within a set period of time the system will automatically start recording Page 92 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 1 Inthe System Idle Protection dialog box Figure 1 101 enable the Auto Monitoring option and select Monitoring All Schedule Monitoring or I O Monitoring from the drop down list 2 Inthe System Idle Over field enter the idle time from 10 to 300 seconds after which the system will start recording Note The feature can monitor keystrokes or mouse clicks even from IR Remote Control and GV Keyboard Version Information To know which version of GV System you have click the Configure button and then se
159. e artifacts from low quality and highly compressed video greatly increasing the overall quality of video Camera Setting E Show Camera Name Display the camera number and name on the screen Apply text overlay s camera name and time render Displays the overlaid information of camera ID location name date and time on the recorded files For details see Superimposing POS Data onto Camera Screen in Chapter 3 Apply text overlay s POS GV Wiegand render Displays the overlaid information of POS or GV Wiegand Capture on the recorded files For details see Superimposing POS Data onto Camera Screen in Chapter 3 Database Specify the duration of event files to be loaded at ViewLog startup Quad View Play Setting Display Database Cache Multi views Read Database when Viewlog starts Local Only 1 Display all Date and Time Display latest Date and Time Interval OK Cancel Figure 4 22 Page 162 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Display all Date and Time Load all recorded event files m Display latest Date and Time Check this item and select time length of the event files to be loaded Note If you check the Display latest Date and Time option the Event List will not be refreshed as the latest event is recorded To refresh the List click the Advance button and select Reload database Cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily when you are using the
160. e firewall as 4550 5550 6550 and 80 Page 202 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam JPG af Server Setup General Server ideo RPE Audio JG sopp Mobile if Create JPEGIGIF filets 2 FTF Setup JPEG Cuality Cancel Detfauit Figure 6 6 Server Setup JPG E Create JPEG GIF file s Allows the connection to G View see Connecting G View to GV Server later in this chapter i Mode see Mode Phone later in this chapter and JPEG Image Viewer see JPEG Image Viewer later in this cheater If the feature is enabled use the Slide bar to adjust JPG image quality The bigger the number sliding it towards right the better the image quality and the bigger image file size m FTP Transfer JPEG file Allows you to view the recording files in a folder tree structure For details see FTP Server Settings later in this chapter Note The Create JPEG GIF file s item will not be available when you enable Enhance Network Security in Figure 6 1 Page 203 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 3GPP These settings allow you to stream video and audio on your 3G enabled mobile phone For more information on 3G mobile phone connection please check our website Server Setup General Server ideo RPE Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile nl RTSPITER port Max connections cad 20 RTPIRTCPAUDP port 17300 17380 Video Bit rate kbps 52 Video size OCF 161441 FPS 10
161. e interface may vary from model to model 1 Open the i Mode menu and select Input Web Address 2 Enter the IP address of your GV System in the Address column and then press OK 1 Input Web Address Address Login Histor j 7 http 65 59 37 172 Return OK Cancel Figure 6 60 Opening the menu Figure 6 61 Entering the IP address of GV server 3 Type a valid user name and password and then press Submit Page 248 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Select the desired camera channel and then press Enter User Name hi l Live View Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Submit Cancel Camera 7 Passwords Figure 6 62 Entering the use name and password Figure 6 63 Selecting a camera for live view If you log in successfully the i Mode phone will start receiving live images from the GV System Windows Smartphone With the MSView application you can monitor your GV System remotely via a Windows based smartphone edition 2002 2003 and 5 0 Installing MSView 1 2 3 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD It will run automatically and pop up a window Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item Select Microsoft Smart Phone Viewer V2 and then follow the on screen instructions Locate MSViewV2 exe in the Smartphone Viewer V2 folder created in your computer The default director
162. e listed in the Video Event List Page 143 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files The controls in the ViewLog window No N O OI 2 0O N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name Camera Name Camera View Date Tree Video Event List View Mode Camera Select Advance Event List Function Panel Scroll Bar Voice Playback Panel Function Icons Playback Speed Time Display Date Display Exit Page 144 Description Indicates the given camera name Displays the playback video Displays date folders Displays video events within a certain date folder Sets screen divisions Single Thumbnail Quad or Multi View Sets a desired camera for display Accesses the basic or advanced search see Searching a Video Event later in this chapter And reloads video event list Displays the date tree and video event list Provides various settings for ViewLog Scrolls forward or backward of the playback video Enables audio playback Contains typical playback control buttons A highlighted icon indicates an enabled function From left to right are the A to B Mode auto playing of next events the contrast and brightness function the light enhancement and equalization function the sharpness and smoothness function the grayscale function and reconnection to Remote ViewLog Indicates the playback speed x1 represents normal playback speed Indicates the time of the playback video Indicates the date of the playback vide
163. e numbers for each subscriber in the Subscriber Address Book Figure 9 3 SMS Alerts You can send SMS messages to subscribers when alert conditions occur Setting SMS Server Before sending SMS messages to an individual subscriber you need to define SMS Server correctly 1 Onthe Center V2 window click the SMS button No 6 Figure 9 1 and then select SMS Setup to display this dialog box SMS Setup Connection Setup Mobile Setup SMS Option Connection Server IP 4270041 O Local Server Port 6886 Default Remote Login ID Figure 9 33 2 Type the IP address communication port Login ID and Password of the SMS Server 3 Ifthe SMS Server is installed at the same computer with the Center V2 select Local If not select Remote 4 To set up three mobile numbers of Center V2 operators to get notified when Center V2 loses connection to SMS Server click the Mobile Setup tab to display this window Page 315 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 SMS Setup Connection Setup Mobile Setup 5M5 Option HotLine List y e Add to SMS List Country Code ook i Mobile Number 925864721 Please selecta mobile to edit the HotLine List Figure 9 34 5 Select one mobile icon check Add to SMS List and type country code and mobile number 6 To set time intervals between each SMS message when alert occurs click the SMS
164. e status of video lost from cameras or disconnection Click OK to apply the settings If the camera is enabled for live display you will see in the upper right corner of its monitoring window otherwise you will see E Page 311 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Viewing Subscriber Information To view the general information about your subscribers click the Host Information button No 9 Figure 9 1 on the Center V2 window to display the Host Information window Choose a subscriber from the list and click the View Information button to view its related information Host Information View Information Server Info Server Update time 2001 01 04 15 39 56 Recycle Log 2000 1 2 26 15 22 ee eee Camera On 01 a Spain Camera Off None a gt Taiwan Camera Signal Lost 02 03 04 Jg 10 Device Normal a h UK Module01 Input Alarm None ey USA Last 100 10 Events bs Event001 2001 01 04 14 37 23 ModuleD1 Pin01 Event002 2001 01 04 14 37 24 Module01 None Figure 9 29 Subscription Control The Center V2 operator can disable its services to an individual subscriber when subscription expires On the Address Book Figure 9 2 right click one subscriber and select Disable To restore the subscription right click again to select Enable Instant Recording and Playback You can enable live view in a more convenient way and start and stop recording instantly to any live view camera Enabling Live Vie
165. e than one TV monitors it can be set with different alert events Displaying TV Quad Panel on the Main System Screen Figure 1 100 This panel appears The controls on the TV Quad Panel No Name 1 Monitor 2 Scan 3 Screen Division 4 Channel Menu 5 Exit 6 Previous Page 7 Next Page 8 Settings 9 Switch 10 Zoom Esc Page 90 Description Selects the monitor to be controlled Automatically or manually rotates channels and stops rotation Sets screen divisions Only TV 1 can support screen divisions up to 16 and TV 2 to TV 5 supports 1 or 4 screen divisions Displays the desired channel for single view Closes the TV Quad Panel Scans the previous page Scans the next page Displays the TV Quad Setting window Displays or hides the channel menu After single view click this button to return to the first scanned page or return to the last channel when the screen division is set to 1 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Note If the DSP Spot Monitor function is enabled at the same time with the Quad Spot Monitors the TV Out button has two options Spot Monitor Panel and TV Quad Panel Select the desired panel to be displayed on the screen Running the Quad Spot Monitors Controller Alone Without starting the Main System Quad Spot Monitors Controller can be run independently Find the QuadTV exe in the GV folder and double click it The TV Quad Panel Figure 1 100 will appear System Idle Protection
166. e to your computer This dialog box appears Find some partitions What do you want Free Space 210 90 GB Total Space 279 46 GB Add to recording path Delete all events Recording Folder Jd Data Figure 11 40 Page 370 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Add to Recording Adds the hard drive to the recording path Delete all events Deletes the recorded files already on the hard drive 3 Click OK to automatically configure the hard drive to the recording path To verify the hard drive is added successfully select the drive in the MediaMan Tools window and see if Status in Disk Properties displays Standby Or in Main System click the Configure button and select Set Location to confirm the new recording path Removing a Disk Drive On the Disk List right click the hot swap or portable hard drive and select Stop for recording The Status in Disk Properties will display Unused Then you can remove the hard drive safely Note Removing the hard drive will affect ViewLog database To restore these events add the hard drive back to the system and run Repair Database Utility Backing Up ViewLog Files You can export ViewLog player and files to play back at any computer without the system On the Disk List right click the hot swap or portable hard drive to have these options E Copy ViewLog Exports the ViewLog player and files to the hard drive Recreate ViewLog database When the View
167. ecessary Type the Authorized ID and Authorized Password matching to those of the Security Setting in the Server Setup dialog box If the information is inconsistent the connection to the backup server cannot be established e Server Setup Network Settin 3 Automatic Failover Setup pF r ServerPort 3663 Default b Server Fort Security Setting Authorized ID Authorized ID Enhance network security Authorized Password po Enable IP White List server Setting Type the same ID and Password here Auto start service when server startup Notify when DVR disconnected from server Cancel Figure 11 33 Note Once the primary server is ready to resume the services it is required to close the backup server so the connection from subscribers can move back to the primary Page 363 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Fast Backup and Restore With the Fast Backup and Restore FBR solution you can change interface skin and customize features to suit personal preference as well as back up and restore your configurations in Main System Installing the FBR Program 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD It will run automatically and a window appears 2 Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item 3 Click Fast Backup amp Restore Multicam System and follow the on screen instructions Running the FBR Program Run Fast Backup amp Restore main System from the Start menu This window
168. eck to disconnect from one camera Status column The message Ready indicates an established connection while Fail means a failed connection Auto retry when connection has broken When the connection is broken for a specified time the system will automatically re connect to the remote ViewLog Resuming Backup Backing up files from a remote ViewLog is possible via the Control Center Server When the file transfer is interrupted by a network error you can even resume backup Page 168 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files When the backup is interrupted this message will appear There are x file s couldn t be backup Do you want to keep a log file and backup them later Click Yes You will be prompted to save the partial backup file as lv format To resume backup click the Resume button in the Backup dialog box and then locate the partial backup file to continue f Using Hard Disk Pree Space 3 74 GE Backup Folder Mame SIBK 20061122 f Using CD DD en GIGABYTE GO RS232A 650 ME CO OYE Burning Sotware C Program Filesi headWWNeromero exe Zz CD Using GS Burning B Media Information Used Size 101 42 MB Free Size 5458 58 MB 650 00 MB Erase Rewritable Disc View Backup Log 2 Export to DvD Format Ok Cancel Figure 4 30 Page 169 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Playing Back over Internet Using Remote Playback Remote Playback Client RPB Cli
169. ector o 220 Remote COMMU CAMO 1 sa 220 Multi View MPEG 4 Encoder Viewer ooocccooccccococccccoccncconcocononononancnononcncnnnnos 221 Staring ca LO De 222 Working With the Host Server Window oocccnnccccccccconcccnnnccoconononcnnnnnonnonnnnnnnnnononnnnnennnnnnnnos 223 Working with Hosts on the Same LAN suiriri cinien aoaia oia aoii 224 EXPORINO VISO it AA AAA 224 Taking a Snapshot from a Live Video 25 cccceccsceseeeeeeececceccesenseeeecsccesseneeeeeececocsseeeeeeestenes 224 A o E salen doeadtineatas 224 a A ey nk eee onmer a a ere nel eeer ene ark eseeryt E 225 channel Status MIOMMAvON sen a a a 226 Camera PONO FUNCION o do e O ten EU LS 226 Two Way PU E e O ches dence se daaloes cu a a TA 226 Mult View Contigua estaa tailandia dial 227 Creating a Quick Connection to a Host Server ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeey 228 creatina Multiple HOST rniii i econ eoicioo a 229 Page 195 SS A A A tacts EA 230 ao sicch arcane tence icttey a a E 231 Remote VISWLO Nac 232 JREGUIMAge VICW CN asada dida dada dodo 233 Remote Playback on WebCaM ooccccccooccnccccccccccccocccncnnoncnnnonononnnnnnnnnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnss 234 Searching and Playing Back Recorded Files ccccccccccoconnnccnncccnocononnnnononononanonnnnnnnnos 235 Synchronizing Audio with Video Playback ccccccccoccnnncconnccccncoonncnnnnnononanncnnnononononanncnnnnnnnss 235 DirectDraw Seu Die tener ene cen
170. ee amr e e a Ar ec ee es e A 226 Mult View COnmguration ii dias 227 Creating a Quick Connection to a Host Servel c ceeeeesessessseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 228 Greating a Multiple FOS a ie el tee rece 229 Camera leal inodoros 230 IOS E IMM ION iia 231 Remote SW dat car a doi 232 JPEG IMIge VIEWER le a 233 Remote Playback ON WED AN iii A A A A ia 234 Searching and Playing Back Recorded Files oooococcccnncccnconoonnccnncnnononanenonononononannnnnnnnnnnos 235 Synchronizing Audio with Video Playback ooocccccccccccooncccnnncccocnoonnconnnnonnonnnnncnnnnnnonononannnnnnnns 235 DirectDraw oe UD est eee et ee at eae dd tee aes 236 SE al Cling ODOC IMINO riick sate shee oa oo teca 236 Advanced o els 237 Remote ViewlLog Om Web AMA A weer TOES 239 POS Live View ON WeDG aMiicinniisiian duets tii ine ii 240 The Remote POS Live View WINdOW cccccccccoccnccnncccccccoooncconononononnconnnnnnonnnnnnconnnnnnnononanncnnenononanas 240 ASIAN Play A 241 Remote Control Using Remote Desktop cccccccececesssseeeeeeeceeenneeeeeeeeeeeeensseeeeeseeeoeesseeeesseaes 242 Mobile Phone Applica lOs aiii dd 243 A tadidepinscnclzamiidlan a E wanes igGaemeastadtaataete 244 A cA aaae E EETA A A A 248 WINAOWS MAPAS a ol e e wecaet 249 DV MDI SMA da 251 Fast REMARCAR 253 The M t View WV ICL OW a AAA cid 253 PTZ COnmt Olin MORE VIEW aia 254 Chapter 7 MAD ADDING ALION sisi 200 The E Map Edit
171. ee backup options e Back up to hard disk e Create CD DVD using a third party software e g Nero Roxio etc e Create CD using Windows XP Server 2003 inbuilt burning software To back up files 1 On the function panel click the Tools button No 15 Figure 4 2 and then select Backup This dialog box appears Page 187 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files C Using Hard Disk EEE Space 300 GE Backup Folder Mame SIBK 20061 122 f Using CD OVE fesi GIGABYTE GO R5232A 50 MA CD 0D Burning Software C Program Files 4headileroanerc exe m C CD Using OS Burning 2 Media Information Used Size 101 42 MB Free Size 545 55 MB 650 00 ME o E Resume Erase Rewritable Disc View Backup Log 2 FF Export to DYO Format A Cancel Figure 5 8 2 Select a destination media to back up files Media m Using Hard Disk Click to back up files to the hard disk you select Backup Folder Name Enter a desired name for the backup folder m Using CD DVD Click to back up files to the CD or DVD media using a third party software gt Click the button to assign the desired burning software exe file When you click OK on the Backup dialog box Figure 5 8 the system will ask you to paste the backup files to the CDR Writer program Figure 5 4 and call up the assigned burning software for you to paste and backup files gt If Nero software of version 6 6 0 1 or later is ins
172. eeeeeeeeeee 197 CONnfGuring WEDCaANI S rVEF ni ds 197 WED AM Server OSTIAS cia 197 IPANDE SESE NO S23 sj cichata ticles ketch id e do dd 206 URAR SUNS tease Soa liada 206 Hi na II uacotasaleaiacneseoueeeauaets 209 NetWork POMO Mat inacci n 210 Starting WebCam at the Client PC Lina 211 Single View MPEG 4 Encoder VieWe s ccssccssssssssssessecsnnssesseseecensnnnsssesseeeenssnansesseceeonnenaes 213 AMISTAD Host Sene e ada ses ete nee ant 214 Taking a Snapshot from a Live VideO iseia iaoa e a eaaa a eain 215 POPUD EUD casa a a a a a a E ca haralgutene tal naats 215 EX DOMMING MISCO 2 A ARAS AA A RS 216 A A E aan eiealaeun A 216 Vill PAR A A A IS 217 VAS ELA PACE CINTA UO UA ce ac ate asada 219 A o A 219 MWe VA AU pilotando radio istalo segle 219 Data Rate A ce ee ee eee ee 220 DirectDraw SS Ureta dicas cielo suasehadehee e A 220 Remo ONU aeaa ae a aE 220 Multi View MPEG 4 Encoder Viewer isicicna adas 221 SAO Multi Vie Wss e e os den e 222 Working With the Host Server WiNdOW occcccccccccoonnccnnncccconononccnnnnononanncnnnnnononnnnncnnnnnnnonnnannnss 223 Working with Hosts on the Same LAN ccccccecesssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseaesseeeeeeeessaaaaeeeeees 224 EXPORINO WIGCO irse T AO 224 Taking a Snapshot from a Live Videgain iaar ena e a a e 224 PTZ ONAN iio A 224 OUT Ut GS ON Olor tintas 225 Ghnannel Status MOMO iia 226 Camera POING FU oe acne 226 AB oc A 2112 0 0 oes meme r
173. el sequence of each scanned page see Scan Setting on Figure 1 92 Click the button to display this dialog box x Ess Default Empty page wana tj Figure 1 91 Page Setting Screen Division Displays the channel sequence You can modify the sequence by typing the number directly on each division lt gt buttons Navigate pages Empty page Clears up the channel sequence of the open page Page 83 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Video Setting 5pot Monitor Controller i xX Advanced Layout Video Setting Video Attribute Video Enable mir 1 Camera 1 W Camii W Cam05 I Camia I Caml3 W Caml W Camie W Cami MW Cami4 Brightness j j W Camda W Cami W Camii M Caml5 Contrast J jig W Camba W Cambs W Caml I Caml Saturation 220 Select All Clear ll Hue j Scan Setting Interval ho Sec Apply to All Default See lal Manual E Figure 1 92 Video Attribute Select a desired camera from the drop down list to adjust image attributes such as Brightness Contrast Hue and Saturation Video Enable Check the desired cameras for display on the spot monitor Scan Setting Enter the interval between the scanned pages Select Auto if you want to automatically scan the cameras or Manual to scan at your own speed Page 84 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Spot Monitor Panel Click the Configure button point to DSP Spot Monitor and then select Spot Monitor
174. elow for further setup Both Live amp Attachment Sends both live and attachment file Color of Channel Caption Changes the color of channel headings For further setup see Changing the Color of Channel Heading later in this chapter Attachment Mode Settings In the Subscriber Settings dialog box Figure 9 4 select Attachment Mode and click the Settings button beside This dialog box appears Record Settings Attachment Mode Record Option per camera Pre Rec Total Frames 10 Attachment Option Record by Motion Wax Video Clip 30 A Sec PostRec Motion Alerts Interval 10 E hin Attachment Option Record by IO Trigger Wax Video Clip 60 4 Sec PostRec Motion 10 Sec Alerts Interval 10 Min Default Cancel Figure 9 5 Recording Setting Record Options per camera E Pre Rec Total Frames Determines the total pre recorded frames in a video attachment m Pre Rec Frames sec Limitation Determines the frame rate in the pre recorded period Note Dividing the Pre Rec Total Frames by Pre Rec Frames Sec Limitation you will get total time of the video attachment Page 288 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 E Motion Frames sec Limitation Determines the frame rate of the video to be sent as an attachment Recording Quality Use the slider bar to adjust the video quality in 3 levels Attachment option Record by Motion Defines the duration of the vid
175. ely you may click Log and select Backup from the menu bar Page 183 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files Backup Log xj E oy CODO Writer Size jean ME C Harddisk MOZIP JAZ DVO RVWCD RW driver Backup Time Period Start Time ff OfA004 End Time 239 2004 2359 59 select Backup Camerals altar Mas MGi anales 2s 246 410 MW 4 iP ar 26 30 i O E E 23 lr al MaMa 12 ib 207 ad 20 32 L 00 00 00 Select All Clean All Database Video Audio Event e Files onea Figure 5 2 Backup Log Media Select the media where you want to back up the files Backup Time Period Specify a time period for backup The minimum time for backup is 1 minute Select Backup Camera s Select desired cameras for backup m The drop down list Select the types of video events for backup Back up video and audio events together video events only or audio event only Database Files Check this item to back up the files from System Log Only Never Recycle Event Check this item only to back up the never recycle events 3 After the above settings click OK to bring up the following window It shows the information about the backup files Backup Information l x i he selected backup range is used Select Date 0671772004 16 04 0671772004 23 59 fan he backup log data size is 120 53MB a he backup media size is 640 OOMB Are you sure to backup
176. ems 11 Zoom in and out Zooms in or out the selected channel 12 Add Remove Channel Adds or deletes the channels for video polling Click the Add or Remove Channel button and then click the desired channel to add to or remove from the video polling 13 Full Screen Switches to a full screen view 14 Video Polling Rotates through the selected channels 15 Screen Divisions Sets screen divisions to 4 8 or 16 16 Exit Minimize Closes or minimizes the Multi View window 17 Speaker Enables speaking to a remote GV System 18 Microphone Enables live audio from a remote GV System 19 Stop Terminates the connection to a GV System 20 Play Establishes the connection to a GV System 21 Save Saves live video 22 Quality Changes video resolution 23 Snapshot Takes a snapshot of the selected channel 24 Save Camera to Multiple Host Saves the selected cameras and to create a Multiple Host Working With the Host Server Window The Host Server window displays a list of available GV Servers The server icons indicate available servers and the camera icons indicate all cameras included in the selected server To connect to a server site 1 Click a monitoring window which will be highlighted in red frame 2 Double click on a camera icon and then its corresponding video will be loaded to the selected monitoring window First time users will only see one server icon as no additional servers are created yet For the details of adding new servers
177. ent allows client PCs to download history video files from server PCs through Remote Playback Server RPB Server Before getting started make sure the following requirements are met OS Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 CPU Pentium 500 minimum Memory 128MB RAM Hard Disk 20GB minimum VGA NVIDIA GeForce ll 32MB 800x600 screen resolution minimum Network TCP IP Working with Remote Playback Server at the Server PC To establish a connection first activate RPB Server at one server PC RPB Server comes with the installation of Main System Follow these steps to activate it 1 Goto Windows Start select Programs point to the GV folder and then select Remote Playback Server This RPB window appears Remote Playback Server Oj xj Server Option view Re E Figure 4 31 2 Click the Start Service button E A valid ID and Password are required In the RPB window you can see the message for example 7 4 2005 6 14 36PM Start Sever indicating when the server is activated To stop a connection click the End Server button EN A valid ID and Password are required To minimize the RPB window in Windows taskbar select Option from the menu bar and then select Hide When Minimize Page 170 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Configuring RPB Server To configure the RPB Server select Option from the menu bar and then select Setup This displays the following dialog box M Auto Run when Start Windows
178. ent event whether it is motion or I O devices being triggered You can decide to have pop up cameras on computer screen TV monitor or both together Activating Pop up Camera Windows 1 Click the Configure button and select Camera Popup Settings This dialog box appears Dwell Time Interrupt Interval Camera Motion Invoke wi fr 5 Y 9 13 Y 2 Y amp W10 14 iw oS lw 7 iw 11 1415 do y wiz 16 5 Check All Clear All od 1 afl Clear All Input 1 al gt e Input Invoke Camera 1 coc E Local Monitor Only Spot Monitor Gnl w Apply to Both Figure 1 98 Page 88 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 2 Check the cameras to be alarmed with pop up windows when events occur 3 Click the Arrow button in the bottom right corner and select the method of displaying the pop up camera windows Local Monitor Only Camera windows pop up on the computer screen E Spot Monitor Only Camera windows pop up on the TV monitor Apply to Both Camera windows pop up on both computer screen and TV monitor 4 Click OK to apply the settings Setting Pop up Camera Windows on TV Monitor If you want the selected cameras to be alerted with pop up windows on TV monitor you need to set up those cameras by following these steps 1 Click the Configure button and select Quad Spot Monitors Setup The TV Quad Setting window see Figure 1 94 appears 2 Click the Setting button of Camera Popup This dialog box
179. enter V2 To automatically configure the port on your router by UPnP technology click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings Chapter 6 in the User s Manual m Enhance Network Security Applies enhanced security for Internet Note when the feature is enabled all subscribers using earlier version than version 7 0 cannot access the Center V2 anymore E Accept the Connection of Video Server Enables the connection to the GV Video Server The default port is 5551 or you can modify it to match the Center V2 port on the GV Video Server Page 296 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Record The feature allows you to assign a path to store video files Click the Add New Path button 1 to assign a path click the X button to delete a path If the Recycle item is checked the system will delete old files when storage space falls short of 800MB if not checked Center V2 will stop recording when storage space falls short of 800MB Preference General Layout Network Record Dispatch Server M Recycle Pj D Centery log Figure 9 14 Preference Record Note Every time when the Recycle function is activated the files of 400MB will be deleted Page 297 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Connecting to Center V2 To configure the GV System in order to access the Center V2 remotely through a network connection follow these steps 1 2 3 In the Main System click the Network b
180. eo attachment delivered upon motion m Max video Clip Determines the duration of the video attachment m Pos Rec Motion Determines how many more seconds of video to be sent when motion stops W Alerts interval Determines the interval between sent motion events Attachment option Record by I O trigger Defines the duration of the video attachment delivered upon I O trigger Changing the Color of Channel Heading For easy identification the channel headings can be as colorful as you wish In addition to the change of color and font of the channel headings its background color can be customized as well 1 On Center V2 window click the Accounts button No 12 Figure 9 1 select a subscriber and click the Subscriber Setting button on the toolbar The Subscriber Settings dialog box Figure 9 4 appears 2 Click the Color of Channel Caption button This dialog box appears Basic colors MI ee See a E pmi ee ee ee Pe NN ERE EEE EE EEE Ee g Hue Red 1255 Sat 0 Green 255 ColorlSolid ee 240 Blue 1255 Figure 9 6 3 Seta color you wish to use and click OK The Color of Channel Caption button now displays the color you selected 4 On the Center V2 window click the Preference Setting button No 10 Figure 9 1 and select System Configure The Preference dialog box Figure 9 11 appears 5 Click the General tab and check the Use the subscriber setting color as background option Now the backgr
181. er af Server Setup Audio JPG General Server i Run GeoHTTP Server Enable SSL HTTP Port Command Port Data Port Detect UPnP Cancel Detaut Figure 6 2 Server Setup Server Run GeoHTTP Server Enable Geo developed HTTP server or use your own HTTP server Command Port is the port used to access WebCam and Data Port is the port used to transfer data over Internet Enable SSL Enable the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol to ensure the security and privacy of Internet connection Detect UPnP For details see UPnP Settings later in this chapter Page 199 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Video Server Setup Audio 3GPR Mobile General Server Video Max Channel 1 tax on line time for E iv quest Users E 60 set Max Image size Codec Geo peca a PT Allowed PTS camera Cancel Detaut Figure 6 3 Server Setup Video m Max Channel s Specify the number of channels allowed to access WebCam with the upper limit of 200 channels Max on line time for guest users Specify the time length allowed for a guest user to connect to WebCam The time range is between 10 to 3600 seconds Max Image size Selecta resolution The default resolution on WebCam is 320 x 240 If you want to apply the 640 x 480 De interlace or 720 x 480 De interlace resolution you also have to configure Video Source Click the Configure button on the main screen and
182. er To open the panel follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button select Tool Kit point to Touch Screen Panel and then select Panel Setup to display the following window Touch Screen Panel Setup W Activate Activate when enter Full Screen Mode only T 0 Always Active Layout Vertically Horizontally TA Figure 1 55 Activate Activate when enter Full Screen Mode only Launches automatically the panel when the full screen view is applied Always Active Always displays the panel on the screen Layout Choose a vertical or horizontal panel 2 Click OK for the above settings Click the Configure button select Tool Kit point to Touch Screen Panel and then select Panel Activate to open the panel 4 An information window indicating date time and storage space will appear at the upper left corner of the screen Right click it to open the touch panel as shown below Switch to ViewLog Close the panel co AUG 4 p a laz ay TE l Eec M h qua An Information Switch to a full screen window Figure 1 56 Note You can move the touch screen panel anywhere on the screen by dragging it Page 55 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Retrieving Images Using Object Index The feature allows you to view the very first frame of a continuous movement in a video stream With Live Object Index you may view the most recent 50 frames captured With Object Index Search you may e
183. er from a client PC 2 Enter the IP address or domain name of the GV System to display the WebCam Compression Selection window Figure 6 16 Select JPEG Image Viewer and then click Submit A valid ID and password are required 4 The JPEG Image Viewer window appears View Selection Button Scroll Button Snapshot Camera Select Button Monitoring Window DODE S6520 Figure 6 40 JPGE Image Viewer Page 233 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Remote Playback on WebCam The WebCam Remote Playback RPB is a web based application allowing you to play back recorded video or audio files of the connected GV System To start WebCam RPB 1 Follow the steps in Starting WebCam at the Client PC earlier in this chapter until the WebCam Compression Selection window Figure 6 16 appears 2 Select Remote Playback and then click the Submit button to display the following RPB window Click the Play button to log in the application A valid ID and password are required here 0 33 26 001 mote 001 0 43 27 001 10 48 28 001 wae 10 55 29 001 10 56 30 001 Figure 6 41 The Remote Playback Window The controls in the Remote Playback on WebCam No Name Description 1 File Tree Displays date folders 2 Event List Displays the video events 3 Channel Select Tab Selects different channels 4 Option Includes the Enable DirectDraw option 5 Object Search Searches Object Index 6 Get Event List Displays the
184. eras to be viewed by default Cameras deselected from viewing do not affect the cameras being recording Startup Configure the startup camera screens and screen divisions Default Screen Division To select the desired screen divisions at startup check the item and click the right arrow button Limit Port To restrict camera screens at startup check the item and select desired port numbers This function will execute at next system startup Wave in Device Adjust audio devices to record and listen to live sound W Audio Choose to set up an audio channel from the drop down list Monitor Sensitivity Adjusts sensitivity of the audio that will be detected The higher the value the more sensitive it is to the surrounding sound Gain Control Increases or decreases the gain of the microphone Wave Out Select to listen to live audio at the server PC Rec Audio Enable to activate the audio recording function Page 23 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Setting Up Auto Reboot The Auto Reboot feature restarts your Windows at a scheduled time Click the Configure button and then select Auto Reboot Setup from the menu to bring up this dialog box Auto Reboot Setup x M Auto Reboot System Day Interval d NS 1 E OK Reboot Time 1 55 06 PM Cancel f Restore Last Status C Apply Startup Settings W Delay for Cancel Reboot 0 Seer e WatchDog Reset if Reboot System Suspend and Fail Figure 1 23 Auto Reb
185. es by Frames Sec Limitation you will get the pre recording duration of each camera For example Pre recording duration Total Frames 30 5 seconds Frame Sec 6 Limitation Pre Recording using HDD Use the hard disk as a pre recording buffer This method gives you much longer pre recording time m Keep Pre Record Files Specify the number of video clips for pre record The maximum number of video clips you can specify is 9 and the time range of one video clip is from 1 minute to 5 minutes So the pre recording time can be from 1 minute to 45 minutes For the video clip see the EventLog Size below Send Event Alerts Allows you to send out the assigned E Mail Hotline SMS notification when the selected alert conditions occur To enable the function follow the steps below 1 Check the Send Event Alerts option and click the Arrow button beside to display this dialog box Alert Events Setup E Mail Hotline SMS Alerts when video Lost e Record Error Iv Disk Full J VO Error e Intruder Event e Missing Object Event e Unattended Object Event M POS Loss Prevention Event Scene Change Event Cancel Figure 1 7 2 Select the desired alert events to send out the assigned notification and then click OK for the application The alert events of Intruder Event Missing Object Unattended Object and POS Loss Prevention Event are only available when the alarm settings are activated in
186. es should come available with the D Type extension cables For GV 1000 the audio card must be purchased separately 2 Make sure your sound card is already inside the computer Connect a multimedia speaker to the audio output of your computer s sound card 3 Connect a desktop microphone to the input of the audio extension card or cable line Page 201 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Audio Setup 22 Server Setup General Der yer Video RFE Audio JPG 3GPP Mobile if Server to Client Max Channells 20 Codec Selection Good ADPCM ke Client to Server Max Channel 5 Codec Selection Good ADPCM Port 6550 Cancel Detault Figure 6 5 Server Setup Audio Server to Client Allows a client PC to access live audio from the server site m Max Channel s Enter the number of client PCs allowed to access live audio with the upper limit of 40 PCs m Codec Selection Select the audio codec ADPCM requires 4KByte bandwidth while G 723 requires only 0 66KByte bandwidth ButADPCM offers much better audio quality than G 723 Client to Server Allows aclient PC to speak to the server site m Max Channel s Enter the number of client PCs allowed to speak to the server site with the upper limit of 20 PCs Codec Selection The same as the above Codec Selection Port The default audio port is 6550 Note If your server site is installed a firewall configure the port settings in th
187. ess drop down list 6 Click Configure to automatically configure the communication ports on the router Tip If you don t use the default ports modify the related ports in the Server Setup dialog box Figure 6 2 and then click OK Re open the dialog box and follow above steps to configure your router Note UPnP technology now is also available in other remote applications Control Center Center V2 Remote Playback Authentication Server VSM and TwinDVR Page 208 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam FTP Server Settings The option of FTP transfer JPEG file allows you to access the recording files in a folder tree at a client computer installed with the FTP server In Figure 6 6 select the FTP transfer JPEG file option and then click the FTP Setup button to display the following dialog box Setup FTP x FTP Server Host Mame NO E User Mame Password anonymous t 4 t 4 t Remote File Path Transfer Camera M Send file delay 0 1 sec cnc Figure 6 14 FTP Setup 1 Inthe Server Host Name field enter the IP address or domain name of the FTP server Keep the port setting as default at 21 2 Enter a valid user name and password to access the FTP server Specify a file path to save the recording files on the FTP server 4 Click the Transfer Camera button and assign which camera s files to be transferred to the FTP server 5 Inthe Send File Delay field specify t
188. et the interval between 0 and 60 minutes Click OK To send a test e mail After setting up your mailbox you can use the Test section and send a message to your own e mail account for testing 1 PA wy Enter your own e mail address in the E Mail To field Enter a subject for the e mail Type the desired message in the Mail Content field Click the Test Mail button Sending E Mail There are several ways to send e mail alerts See the Center V2 window for the following selections On the Subscriber List No 4 Figure 9 1 right click one subscriber and then select Send E Mail This sends the e mail to an individual subscriber manually Right click one display channel and then select Send E Mail This sends the e mail to an individual subscriber manually Page 318 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 3 On the Event List double click one Event Type except Attachment to call up a message window Click the Send E Mail icon on the window This sends the e mail to an individual subscriber manually 4 Click the Preference Settings button No 10 Figure 9 1 and select Notification to display the Alarm Settings window Check the Send E Mail item This sends e mails to subscribers automatically when set alert conditions occur See Notification Settings earlier in this chapter E Map Alerts You can configure an instant E Map alert to lay out the locations of triggered cameras sensors and alarms within a floo
189. etected motion At 1 13 2005 3 46 14 PM TPE Yideo Lost Test message Video Lost Test message DYR1 DWR1 Camera 1 Video LostAt 1 13 2005 4 01 28 PM The connection of client 1 1P 127 0 0 1 is abnormal at HiD Figure 10 8 1 13 2005 3 22 10 PM 1 13 2005 3 29 06 PM 1 13 2005 3 48 13 PM 1 13 2005 3 49 41 PM 1 13 2005 3 50 14 PM 1 13 2005 3 51 03 PM 1 13 2005 3 51 24 PM 1 13 2005 4 04 39 PM 1 13 2005 4 05 09 PM 1 13 2005 4 05 30 PM 1 13 2005 4 05 52 PM 1 14 2005 3 43 43 PM 1 13 2005 3 22 14 PM 1 13 2005 3 29 09 PM 1 13 2005 3 48 16 PM 1 13 2005 3 49 44 PM 1 13 2005 3 50 16 PM 1 13 2005 3 51 06 PM 1 13 2005 3 51 27 PM 1 13 2005 4 04 42 PM 1 13 2005 4 05 11 PM 1 13 2005 4 05 32 PM 1 13 2005 4 05 55 PM 1 14 2005 3 43 46 PM Failure Success Success Success Success Success Success Success Success Success Success Failure E Clicking the System Event Log button on the toolbar you can monitor the server activities client login and logout and connection problems Page 333 Chapter 10 Short Message Service int lists From 1 11 2005 to 1 26 2005 SMSLog Browser cols View Help System System Change server setting Server Setting 1 26 2005 1 46 25 PM System Account Add Client 1 1 26 2005 1 46 45 PM System Account Modify Client 1 1 26 2005 1 46 59 PM System System Change server setting Server Setting 1 26 2005 1 47 05 PM Login Logout 1 1P 127 0 0 1 login 1 26 2005 1 47 19 PM Login Logout 1 1P 127 0 0
190. etup Figure 1 12 Monitor Control Setup m Rec Video Enable the recording function Use the drop down list to select the desired recording mode Motion Detect Round the Clock or Day Night Recording Codec Select the method of recording compression for your video Geo Mpeg4 Geo Mpeg4 ASP or Geo H264 For details on video resolution see Choosing Video Source later in this chapter For details on Geo Mpeg4 ASP see Geo Mpeg4 ASP Advanced Settings later in this chapter Arrow button Click to bring up the Day Night Recording Mode setup dialog box Figure 1 13 E Apply Advanced Codec Setting See Geo Mpeg4 ASP Advanced Settings later in this chapter E Invoke Alarm Sends computer alarm wav sound file on motion detection Invoke to Send Alerts Sends an assigned alert E Mail Hotline SMS when motion occurs Use the slider bar to specify the motion duration to invoke the alert The choices include High 0 5 seconds Normal 1 second and Low 1 5 seconds For example suppose you choose High When motion remains for 0 5 seconds the alert will be sent out Right Arrow button Click to set the delay time to activate assigned alerts Output Module Triggers the specified output pin on motion detection Use the drop down list to select an output pin to perform this function Right Arrow button Click to set the delay time to activate the assigned output module Register Motion Event Records motion events to System Log Page
191. etup M Output Module Mod 7 E Pin 1 Delay Time Setup M Register Input Event Figure 2 2 Name Specifies a name for each input device in the Name field Click the Arrow button to set up next input Signal Type Select signal type for your input device You may use the Finger button to apply your selection to all input devices For details on Latch Trigger see Latch Trigger later in this chapter Monitor Input Rec Video Check this option to use the input sensors or detectors to trigger recording You may select which camera to record in the Camera Select drop down list and specify the recording duration Invoke Alarm Check this option to activate computer alarm when the input is triggered You may select the alarm type in the drop down menu Page 102 Chapter 2 I O Applications E Invoke to Send Alerts Check this option to send out an assigned alert E Mail Hotline SMS when the input is triggered 1st Right Arrow button Appears when E Mail is the assigned alert Click to select the camera s to take a snapshot on input trigger The snapshot will be sent out by E Mail 2nd Right Arrow button Click to set the delay time to activate assigned alerts E Mail Hotline SMS Output Module Ifthe input is invoked the system will automatically send a signal to an output pin Right Arrow button Click to set the delay time to activate the assigned output module Note The delay functions in Invoke to Send Alerts a
192. ex north south east west the speed indicator of five levels will appear Click and hold on the required level of movement and the camera will move as per the specific speed m Type 2 In this mode with the mouse click the PTZ control panel will appear The movement of the camera will depend on the speed of the mouse movement Configure Set Color Changes the color of the panel Three kinds of colors are available Red Green and Blue Transparent Degree Adjusts the transparency level of the panel Ten levels range from 10 fully transparent to 100 fully opaque Page 53 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Touch Screen Support The GV System offers three types of control panels with touch screen support PTZ Control Panel I O Control Panel and Touch Screen Panel PTZ and I O Control Panel This feature gives you the option of a large PTZ and I O control panel with touch screen support To open the panel follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button and select System Configure to display the System Configure window 2 Inthe PTZ Control section click the Arrow button point to PTZ IO Panel and check Large PTZ oe al 4 PTZ Device Setup E E PTZ TO Panel a Mormal Sensormatic Ultra I PT Panel Switch w Large Figure 1 54 Page 54 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Touch Screen Panel The touch screen panel allows you to switch to ViewLog and full screen by the touch of a fing
193. f each camera is indicated respectively e g Camera 1 1 0 means Camera 1 has 1 video file and O audio file m Video Audio drop down list Select the types of video events for backup Information m Database Files Click to back up the files from System Log m Only Never Recycle Event Click to only back up the never recycle events E Object Index Click to back up the Object Index files Page 189 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files m The Status and Search End section Indicates the number of backup files and their total size Total MDB refers to the System Log files 4 Click OK to add the schedule You can repeat step 3 to create up to 10 periods of time 5 Click OK on the Backup dialog box for backup Tip If you just want to back up a specific event or several events of one day select the event or multiple events on the Video Event list and right click to select Backup The Select Backup Time dialog box will then appear and you can follow the steps described above to back up files without setting up the time period Note 1 If you are unable to record a CD make sure the CD recording is enabled in your CD burner open My Computer right click the CD Drive icon click Properties click the Recording tab and then check Enable CD recording on the drive 2 The Export to DVD Format option at the right bottom of Backup dialog box Figure 5 8 outputs your files in DVD movie format meaning that it will pla
194. f the subscriber fails to do once the entry delay expires Center V2 will get notified of the input trigger Output Module Enables the assigned output module when the selected input module is triggered For this example when the I O Device Module 1 Input 4 is triggered the Output Module 1 Pin 3 will be activated simultaneously Right Arrow button Sets the delay time to trigger the assigned output module Event Type If the subscriber wants Center V2 always to get notified of the output trigger select Emergency Ifthe subscriber wants Center V2 to get notified of the output trigger only when an assigned input is triggered select Normal Note 1 2 To set an input trigger for the notification of Normal events see Security Service below The delay settings in Send to Center V2 when I O is triggered and Output Module allow you to enter your premises and disable input output module before it is activated To disable prior I O settings the subscriber may exit the connection to Center V2 or use the Stop monitor normal event when selected pin is Triggered feature in Figure 9 19 Allow Center V2 to Force Output Allows Center V2 to manually force output devices installed at the subscriber s site Security Service Supports two types of access control systems Momentary and Maintained Mode Momentary Mode Pushbutton switches that are normally open and stay closed only as long as the button is pressed Mome
195. framers Show frame time Image e Apply deinterlace render e Apply scaling render Apply deblocking render t single views only j Camera Setting e Show camera name e Apply text overlays camera name and time render 2 e Apply text overlays POSO GY Wiegand render Cancel Figure 4 21 User Interface Aspect Ratio Select the ratio between the width of the image and the height of the image m Event List Click the drop down list to select the display layout of Video Event List You can select to display Event Time only Event Time together with Total Frame Event Time together with Total Time or Event Time together with File Size Thumbnail E Frame Interval Specify the number of frames between each video thumbnail Show Frame Time Displays time stamp on each thumbnail Image Apply De interlace Render Enable the De interlace function and then restart ViewLog to apply it Note This function requires DirectX 9 0C The De interlace only works in single view with the resolution of 640 x 480 and 720 x 480 Page 161 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Apply Scaling Render Select to smoothen mosaic squares when enlarging a playback video Restart ViewLog to apply it for the first time Note This function requires DirectX 9 and VGA card with the video scaling support And the scaling only works in single view Apply deblocking render single view only Select to remove the block lik
196. function of Save AVI Export DVD or Network Buffering System Configuration Guad View Play Setting Display Database Lache Path for cache CAMADA NS Temp oe Detautt Use image instead of blue screen Replace blue screen during playing or merging a widen clips CA 5B00iCommResiCamlogo Bmp me ORK Cancel Figure 4 23 Path for Cache Ifthe default path does not have sufficient space for this temporary storage assign another path by clicking the button Use image instead of blue screen Assigns an image to replace the blue screen during playback The blue screen is the default setting for no image in the recording Page 163 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Recycling Option for Video Files You can choose whether to recycle your video files To apply this function follow the steps below 1 Select a desired video event from Video Event List and then right click it to call up a menu as shown below Video Events The never recycling flag The never recycling option Mark Never Recycle BackupiiCtri B Delete Ctrl D Figure 4 24 2 Select the Mark Never Recycle option A never recycling flag will appear next to the video event 3 To disable the never recycling function right click the video event again and select Unmark Never Recycle Unmarking All Never Recycling Flags The above step 3 illustrates how to unmark never recycling flag one by one When you
197. fy it if necessary Using UPnP for automatic port configuration to your router click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings in Chapter 6 Select the type of network to be used Use TCP IP or Use Multicast If Use Multicast is enabled click the Setting button to display the Multicast Setting dialog box See Multicast Settings below Use the Video Quality Setting slider to adjust video quality for Low Med or High Click the Start button to activate the TwinServer Multicast Settings MultiCast Setting x Multicast Group IP 2 229 228 227 226 Group Poart 19650 Default B server Option Bind IF 1921 65 0 108 fe Assign IP Realtek RTL8139 Fami fks came Figure 11 7 MultiCast Settings MultiCast Group IP Displays the IP address for the virtual buffer that stores the video streams in Multicast network Group Port Used for transferring video streams over the Multicast network To enable the UPnP function click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings in Chapter 6 Server Option Only necessary if more than one network card is installed in your GV System Check Assign IP and select one network card This will automatically bring up Blind IP of the network card Page 343 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Installing TwnDVR The TwinDVR is included in the Surveillance System Software CD This application should be installed in a separate PC within the same Local Area Network as t
198. g m Trace Mode Check this item only after getting the recommendation from our technical support staff 3 After above settings click Add to add the POS system to the Main System Superimposing POS Data onto Camera Screen Follow these steps to set camera screens with POS text data 1 Open the POS Device Setup window Figure 3 2 2 Click the Text Setup tab to set text font and position of the data Page 131 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application Text Overlay Setting X Camera 3 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera Camera Camera E POS 7 Weigand Overlay Object Camera ime Text e Print on video file Print text on video file M or on screen with photograph W Print on POS Live View Alignment c im fal lt c je el e W Print on screen W Frinton POS Live View Alignment c m a e c jalal ca Enable Clean time Alignment cm alle o a a Set Font H M Apply Stereo Font Clean time 5 ZEC 1 Transaction end dwell time 5 SAC al Figure 3 4 Text Overlay Settings Text m Print on video file Enable this option to display POS data on the recorded video file E Print on screen Enable this option to display POS data on the transaction scene Print on POS Live View Enable this option to di
199. g the mouse over the Login timeline to define the Start and End time DUO C Setup Wizard Previous Figure 9 9 Page 291 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 The controls on the Setup Wizard No Name Description 1 Include Displays task time 2 Exclude Displays non task time 3 Add Draws task time 4 Erase Erase task time 5 Timeline Defines the time periods 6 Login Displays the Login timeline 7 Notification Displays the E mail and SMS timelines 5 Click Next when you finish the schedule The Setup Wizard dialog boxes pops up again and then click Finish to exit Scheduling Alert Notification Both e mail and SMS notifications can be scheduled ahead E mails and SMS messages will be sent out within the scheduled period of time 1 Onthe Schedule window double click an established plan This Plan dialog box appears x Sal 2 Application Login Notification Previous Next Cancel Figure 9 10 2 On this Plan window click the Advanced Setting button ll The Advanced Setting dialog box Page 292 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 appears Expand the Notification folder and check or uncheck the alert methods to be scheduled 4 On the Plan dialog box click the Notification button drag the mouse over SMS and or E mail timelines to define the Start and End time to send out alerts Note Once you enable the schedule function you will not be no
200. geavision com tw Country Calling Code 006 O H 27978335 O 27978377 w 939763251 Sa Figure 9 3 Address Book of a subscriber 3 Enter a login ID and password required Those will be the ID and password for the subscriber to log in to the Center V2 See Figure 9 15 4 Enter the subscriber s contact information in the rest of fields optional gt f you wish to send e mail alerts to this subscriber enter its e mail address For e mail settings refer to E Mail Alerts later in this chapter gt Ifyou wish to send SMS alerts to this subscriber enter its country code and mobile number For SMS server settings refer to SMS Alerts later in this chapter 5 Click the OK button to save the above settings You will be prompted to this dialog box Page 286 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Subscriber Settings 1 Monitor Option Image Size e Auto Record Video Record Mode Live Mode settings Attachment Mode Settings Both Live amp Attachment Mote Any changes ofthis property willbe applied in next trigger Color of Channel Caption cancel Figure 9 4 Subscriber Settings 6 The options in the dialog box are discussed below You may accept the default settings here and edit them later by clicking the Subscriber Settings button No 6 Figure 9 2 on the toolbar When you click the OK button the subscriber account then is created Subscriber Settings Monitor O
201. given camera name Displays playback video Sets the connection to the RPB server Closes all or selected connections to the RPB server Downloads and plays the remote video Plays back video files at the client computer Keeps record of connection activity Keeps track of the connections Creates a quick connection to the RPB Server Sets download status text display and panel resolution Saves a video file as avi or exe format See Exporting Video earlier in this chapter Saves a video image as bmp format Closes or minimizes the RPB Client window Moves forward and backward of the playback video Contains typical playback buttons Toggles between channels 1 16 and 17 32 Sets the screen divisions This displays the following Connect To Password Part 5066 Default cn Figure 4 34 You may enter the IP address or the domain name of the RPB server Alternatively you may click the drop down list to find recently visited servers or click the Browse button to select a RPB server from the folder Disconnecting from RPB Server Click the Disconnect button No 4 Figure 4 36 and select to close all connection by choosing All Connections or close only the selected connections by choosing Select Disconnection Page 173 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Downloading and Playing Remote Video There are two options to download and play remote video Normal and Advanced Normal Select
202. gned mobile phones simultaneously 1 Open the Send Alerts Approach Setup dialog box Figure 10 10 2 Click the Account Setting button This displays the SMS Setup dialog box Figure 10 11 3 Click the Mobile Setup tab in the upper of the window The following dialog box appears Connection setup Mobile Setup HotLine List e Add to SMS List Country Code ook I Mobile Mumber a Please selecta mobile to edit the HotLine List Figure 10 12 SMS Setup Mobile Setup 4 Click one mobile phone icon and then check the Add to SMS List item for the mobile phone setup Type Country Code and Mobile Number Click other mobile phone icons and follow step 4 and 5 to set up the rest of two mobile phone numbers separately 7 Click OK to apply above settings Note To configure an alert condition of sending out SMS messages see Send Event Alerts in Chapter 1 for details Page 336 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities 0 0oooccccccnccccncccanaaorrrc cn O Dynamic DNS iio 338 stalmo Dy rma mic DN Sica ti 338 Registering Domain Name with DDNG cccccccccccccsseeeeeeceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeseeaaeeeesseeaseeeessaaass 339 TWIDDOVA SS Mii a saree escalate A A ita 341 Stanno WINS VE ie 342 ASIN TWAD Ariana 344 JA mua ecient ets A qematee oi E a a 344 RVI Fic PP tags saaveccnuaunssnedane Nogea metanentsansesaientaneninddagasmcehcsenieise 346 Watermark VICW Ce aislada 348 TWIN VIEW DISIA Vian do 350 Windows LOCK UD is
203. guring Main System Setting Up a Privacy Mask 1 Click the Configure button and then select Privacy Mask Setup The Privacy Mask Setup dialog box appears Select the desired cameras for setup and then click the Configure tab This dialog box appears Privacy Mask Setup x W Enable Camera 1 C Recoverable Figure 1 81 Privacy Mask Setup Select a camera from the drop down list and then check Enable Select Un recoverable and or Recoverable Un recoverable You cannot retrieve the block out area s in the recorded clips Recoverable The block out area s is retrievable with password protection Drag the area s where you want to block out on the image You will be prompted to click Add to save the setting The Un recoverable region is marked in red while the recoverable region is shown in green Click OK on the right bottom to save the settings Granting Access Privileges to Recoverable Areas The user must be granted access privileges to see the block out areas when launching ViewLog for playback Click the Configure button point to Password Setup and select Local Account Edit The Password Setup dialog box appears Select one account click the Privacy Mask tab and check Restore Recoverable Video to grant the privilege Page 76 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Password Setup x Guest Account is disabled Expire in day 18 User e Powerlser iD i e Supervisor Passwo
204. hapter 1 Configuring Main System Video Schedule 1 3 Set your surveillance preferences Time Enter the starting and ending time of the schedule Monitor Invoke Sets alert methods on motion detection m Rec Records while monitoring From the drop down list select to record video by Motion Detect or Round the Clock Pager E Mail Sends pager or e mail alerts on motion detection Output Triggers the corresponding I O devices on motion detection To set up I O devices see Adjusting Individual Camera earlier in this chapter Remote Sends the triggered images to the remote applications WebCam MultiView or RemoteView Week Days Enable Schedule Select days for the schedule Start Only enabled in I O Schedule Camera Applies the settings to selected cameras Click the Add Schedule tab to apply above settings The set schedule will display on the Schedule List Window Repeat above steps to set up more schedules Clicking separate Camera tabs you will see the set schedule is displayed in different color bars Red Recording enabled Green Pager E mail notification enabled Blue System will send videos to Remote View Jade I O monitor enabled Purple Center V2 schedule enabled To modify a schedule highlight the desired schedule in the Schedule List window and then press the Modify Schedule button to make changes To delete a schedule highlight the desired schedule in the Schedule List window and the
205. haracter code you selected click the button to preview its codepage Codepage Mapping Preview X From To 437 OEM United States 1252 ANSI Latin i 1 J jolilalsi4 sl l7ieiolalelc ple le onoloooololo o 0 lolo ojo El O OO Oooo olojololo ola el hl l lstelel talle iz el fo els iosiel tel al ied slolile sl4islel7isi9l lt gt slolile 3i4islel7isi9l lt lola le clolelelc H 1 3 k L minlo 4 ma BCO E FG H slPlolris tiulyiwixlyiziriyiial 5 PO RR S TU Y wx 6 lalbcdefolhililk Iminjol 6 lalbbecdliefolhjiililk Im 7lolopr is tlulvwix w 4 1 e 10 lola ris tlulvwle vwlz 0 1 elcloj e slalal icieleleli lili lala elenl Tel pre edel elolz slelelelslalaldlalyioiulelel e SER nea gt e lO Sabathia te tet Ya A EEE EE o valve caera aaa c o olle peo pololo lo laorolOxAS tre e D ElalbjcGlolsislujt Fltioldjelfleln elstalalatslatete lal e lElslsl l e ls l l lel lo lulola 1 Fl lijolol l lol lelolo cancel Figure 3 9 Codepage Mapping Preview 3 obio anne a gt ey jo lt p reife jo fe os ol bo Lu Ih a EERE colma REE E ES Ze ga ALALALA E O E gt Ud m i gt Em Erp o o jun IN fo p i 3 Atthe From side locate and click one of the symbols or characters that couldn t display correctly For this example you can see its previous character code From side Ox9C has been transferred to
206. he Internet We recommend that you click the General tab and select On Programs and Services O File and Printer Sharing Remote Assistance Add Program Add Part Edit Delete e Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program What are the risks of allowing exceptions Figure 6 12 Check UPnP Framework and click OK Page 207 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Enabling UpnP in WebCam 1 On the main screen click the Network button select WebCam Server and click the Server tab The Server Setup dialog box Figure 6 2 appears 2 Click Detect UPnP This dialog box appears Port Mapping LIPnP based Router 1 Linksys BEFSR41 3 Configure Exit al WebCam Server Http Port 192 168 0 100 al WebCam Sewer Command Port 192 166 0 100 al WebCam Server Data Port 192 168 0 100 i WebCam Server Audio Port 192 166 0 100 Ll WebCam Serer SSL Port 192 168 0 100 al WebCam Serwer Mobile Port 192 166 0 100 i WebCam Serer Mobile HFB Port 192 168 0 100 I 14 36 31 Find UPnP Devicefi Linksys BEFSR41 v3 IP 221 169 248 174 14 36 22 Searching for UPnP enabled routers Figure 6 13 Click Searching to search the UPnP enabled routers 4 If your server is installed with more than one router select a desired one from the UPnP Router drop down list 5 If you server is installed with more than one network adapter select a desired one from the IP Addr
207. he Monitoring all type events option in Figure 9 15 Advance Settings R x General Camera Other 1 0 Device M Send to CenterW 2 when Motion is Detected Set Camerafs Event Type Emergency v M Allow Center to View Live Camera Set Camera s Allow Eentery2 to Control PTZ Camera V Notify Centery2 when the following events come up Intruder Missing Object Unattended Object Event Type Emergency H Figure 9 17 Advanced Settings Camera E Send to Center V2 when Motion is Detected Sends the video to Center V2 when motion is detected Click the Set Camera s button to assign cameras for the application Event Type Ifthe subscriber wants Center V2 always to get notified of motion detection select Emergency Ifthe subscriber wants Center V2 to get notified of motion detection only when an assigned input is triggered select Normal Allow Center V2 to View Live Camera Gives Center V2 the privilege to view your cameras at any time Click the Set Camera s button to assign cameras for the application Allow Center V2 to Control PTZ Camera Gives Center V2 the privilege to control your PTZ camera Remember to properly set up camera mapping first See Mapping PTZ Cameras in Chapter 1 Notify Center V2 when the following events come up Notifies Center V2 when any of these alert events occur Intruder Missing Object Unattended Object and Scene Change Event Type Ifthe subscr
208. he TwinServer Before installation make sure your PC meets the following minimum system requirements OS Win 2000 XP Server2003 CPU Pentium4 2 0GHz minimum Memory 256 MB RAM Hard Disk 40 GB minimum VGA NVIDIA GeForce Il 32MB Network TCP IP Insert the Surveillance System Software CD to the PC where TwinDVR will be installed It will run automatically and a window appears Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item Click TwinDVR System and follow the on screen instructions During the installation you may be prompted to install GeoMPEG4 codec simply press Yes Starting TwinDVR 1 Run TwinDVR exe This displays the TwinDVR dialog box 10 x A Setting m Server IP 127 0 0 1 Server Port 9660 Default system Metwark EE Network Server ar Setting showy Video Status residen Video Figure 11 8 TwinDVR Setup Type the IP address of TwinServer in the Server IP field Keep the server port in default or it should match the TwinServer port See Figure 11 6 Click the Connect button to establish the connection between TwinDVR and TwinServer A valid user ID and password are required Page 344 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities If the connection is established the Network Server Show Video Status and Test Video buttons will be available You can now use them to set up TwinDVR for e Testing Video Stream o Starting WebCam Server at TwnDVR e Setting Multiple TwinDVRs in TCP
209. he desired device This dialog box appears loutputt Mote _ COR Cancel Figure 2 31 4 Select the connected module and output device In the Note field type a note to help you manage the device Click OK to save the configurations 5 To change the frame color of the set region click the Set Color button 6 To emboss the set region check the Float Up option or keep them flat by checking the Normal option Page 124 Chapter 2 I O Applications Using Visual Automation 1 On the main screen click the desired camera name and select I O Automation This window appears Figure 2 32 2 Click the set regions to force the connected output device 3 To change the style of the set region right click the I O icon to bring up these options Show All Displays all set regions m Rect Float Embosses all set regions E SetColor Changes the frame color of all set regions Page 125 Chapter 2 I O Applications Virtual I O Control The GV System can work with the GV Video Server and GV Wiegand Capture and the integration allows the GV System to control their connected l O devices respectively On the main screen click the Configure button select I O Application and then select Virtual I O Setting This dialog box appears The I O device settings are similar to those of the Main System For details see Setting Up I O Devices earlier in this chapter Virtual O Device Setting
210. he scanned view will show on the central 2 If you are using the DSP card GV System won t support the enhanced screen layout Launching GV System from System Tray The feature lets GV System appear in the system tray when you launch Windows instead of displaying the system login window To enable the feature follow these steps 1 Click the Configure button and then select System Configure The System Configure window appears 2 Inthe Startup section click the Arrow button next to the Startup Auto Login item to display the following window Startup Auto Login Setup i x Startup Auto Login User ID Password F Auta Login in Fullscreen Mode fe Startup Silently Hide into System StatusBar cancel Figure 1 20 Page 22 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 3 Check the Startup Silently Hide into System Status Bar option and then click OK to close the window 4 Restart the GV System You will see the following icon shown on the system tray TIEN E The GV system icon Figure 1 21 Camera Audio Install Click the Configure button and select Camera Audio Install to bring up the following dialog box Camera Audio Install Camera Wiave In Device Activate Audio sucio 1 4 Wave Out Startup Monitor i M Rec Audio Sensitivity A lw Default Screen Division Gain E W Limit Port 16 Control Figure 1 22 Camera Click the Activate button and specify the cam
211. he time of updating JPEG files from the GV System to the FTP server The time range is from 0 1 to 10 sec 6 Inthe Connection Retries field specify the number of retries when the FTP connection fails Max 999 Inthe Retry Delay field specify the interval between each retries Max 9999 sec 7 Click OK to apply above settings Page 209 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Network Port Information The Network Port Information is designed for users to view and manage all network ports of the GV remote applications On the main screen click the Network button and select Network Port Information This dialog box appears Http Port 80 Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Port 6550 SSL Port 443 Mobile Port 8966 Mobile RPE Port 5511 3G RTSP TCP Port 8554 3G RTB RTCP UDP Port 17300 17380 wd Center mi Control Center Server ad Remote Playback Server md TCP Server al MultiCast Server md Twin Server gd UPnP mi Wiegand Capture Server Figure 6 15 The controls on the Port Settings No Name Description 1 Modify Changes the port settings 2 Save Saves the port settings Employs UPnP technology Universal Plug and Play to allow automatic 3 Port Mapping port configuration to the router Page 210 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Starting WebCam at the Client PC Once the WebCam server at the GV System is enabled it is then
212. hen motion is detected it will be outlined with a blue frame 5 Inthe Setup section select Object Index 6 Click OK to apply the settings Note The minimum storage space required for Object Index is 500MB Live Object Index After configuring Object Index you can start to view the most recent frames captured with 50 frames at most 1 Start camera monitoring 2 Click the ViewLog button and then select Live Object Index to display the Live Viewer window Lock Object Index Live Yiewer Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 4 Camera 15 Camera 4 16 09 13 16 09 14 16 09 16 16 09 16 16 09 16 Time ending without ad Camera 15 Camera 15 Camera 4 Camera 3 Camera 15 16 09 17 16 09 21 16 09 21 16 09 23 16 09 23 Time ending with Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 15 Camera 1 Camera 15 16 09 25 16 09 27 160327 16 09 29 16 09 30 all Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 15 Camera 3 16 09 31 16 09 32 16 09 31 16 09 33 16 09 34 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 1 Camera 3 16 09 35 16 09 35 16 09 35 16 09 35 16 09 36 E Figure 1 58 Page 57 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System The controls in the Live Viewer window E The Lock button Click to pause the updating process Time ending without This means the file is a complete one and can be played back with the ViewLog or Quick Search player Double click the file to play it back Time ending with This means the vide
213. i a dida 82 A de eee ae 85 Quad Spot Monitors Controller sssusa io 85 Settima pie Control o is e O dd dd age 86 Setting Pop up Camera WinNdOWS occcccccccccccoonnccnnnccncnnnonncnnnnnonnnnancnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 88 Displaying TV Quad Panel on the Main System Screen oooocccnnnncccccccnonccnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnonnnannnnnnnnnns 90 Running the Quad Spot Monitors Controller Alone ooooncccnnnccccccoonnccnnnncnnnonnccnnnnnonononanenonns 91 System dle Prote CHON uns ad li aaa dida 91 Page 2 AUTO LOG OUT AGIIIAISTKATOR ii caia 91 Auto Login User without Access RIghltS ccconccccccocnnccconnonoconnonnonanncononnonononnnnnonannnconannnnennnnnnnss 92 AMOSA RECOrdIN ad ici 92 Version IO MANO aa 93 Creatind SNORCUES camita di it t 93 Fast KEV LOCKUP siiin aeae oda 95 Fast Key Ree Cesa 96 PTZ Protocol and Model SUPDO incaico n 99 Page 3 The system prompts you for a Supervisor ID and Password when starting the system for the first time shown as below 1 You execute Digital Surveillance systern al first time Please enter Supernisor IO Password Password Password Confirmation Hint Auto Login To memorize this ID and password and to login when you execute Digital Surveillance system everntiime Allow removing password system is ance Figure 1 1 Enter a name you wish to be the Supervisor ID in the ID field Finish the setup by entering Password Passw
214. iber must grant the privilege to Center V2 first See the Allow Center V2 to Force Output option in Figure 9 19 I O Enable Setting The Center V2 operator can manually arm or disarm any l O devices of subscribers without interrupting the monitoring For this the subscriber must give the privilege first See the Allow Center V2 to Enable Disable I O option in Figure 9 19 Page 309 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 To arm or disarm I O devices 1 On the Subscriber List No 4 Figure 9 1 right click one online subscriber and select I O Enable Setting 2 Check the Input Output to arm or uncheck the Input Output to disarm the device s Camera Audio Control This feature allows two way audio communication between CenterV2 and the subscriber as well as PTZ control On the Subscriber List No 4 Figure 9 1 right click one online subscriber and then select Camera Audio Control to display this window Click the Play button to start the application Figure 9 27 The controls on the Camera Audio Control No Name Description 1 Close Closes the Control window 2 Play Plays live video 3 Stop Stops playing video 4 Microphone Enables speaking to the subscriber The subscriber must grant the privilege first See the Allow Audio Out to Center V2 option in Figure 9 18 5 Speaker Enables live audio from the subscriber The subscriber must grant the privilege first See the Accept Audio in from Center V2 option in Figure
215. iber wants Center V2 always to get notified of these alert events select Emergency Ifthe subscriber wants Center V2 to get notified of these alert events only when an assigned input is triggered select Normal Note To set an input trigger for the notification of Normal events see Security Service I O Device later in this chapter Page 300 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Other Define other communication conditions between GV System and Center V2 Advance Settings General Camera Other 10 Device Accept Audio ln from Center z Other Allow Centery2 to Get System Information i Send Alert Message of POS s Logs Prevention to Center Time synchronization with Center z i Notify Centerv2 when the storage space was full Figure 9 18 Advanced Settings Other Audio Appling any of these options here may generate privacy issues Think before you make any selection Allow Audio Out to CenterV2 Allows Center V2 to listen to the audio from GV System Accept Audio in from CenterV2 Allows CenterV2 to use the talkback feature when emergency occurs Other Allow Center V2 to Get System Information Allows Center V2 to get system information on your GV System E Send Alert Message of POS s Loss Prevention to Center V2 Notifies Center V2 about the events of POS Loss Prevention E Time synchronization with Center V2 Enables the time increment decrement of minutes and seconds at the subscri
216. ice Address Book Full Screen and Tool Kit All of them are explained later in this chapter Playback Screen Layout Click the View Mode button to select the following screen layouts Single View Displays one playback channel only Thumbnail View Reviews images frame by frame in thumbnails Only one camera at a time can be selected for this function Quad View Plays back in a quad layout Multi View Plays back all available cameras Click the View Mode button No 5 Figure 4 1 any time when you want to change the current view mode The option of Thumbnail View is disabled while a video file is playing back Wait until the video ends or click the Pause button to make the option available In a thumbnail view a video file is divided into a set of frames The frames are displayed in 25 playback windows shown as follows The key frame is in the center with 12 video frames occurred before and after the key frame This helps to locate required frames you may otherwise miss by other viewing methods Page 145 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files ma g 4 P Wo a a me y 19 18 06 458 A ur gt q r ee 19 18 06 7 86 GV 800 b Playback Control Buttons Video files may be played back with or without audio is Camera 0 a aiai pr 40 4 D GE 4 a ona AR E 18 06 520 A 19 18 06 552 dl camera z q ae Advance l Normal a Ba Ta Es Figure 4 3 To
217. iewLog50 2MB Bitmap 11 14 20 2MB Bitmap 11 14 20 2 ME Bitmap Bitmap 4 e Play Total space used ME DOME 400ME 600MB i a00ME AEE a _ H O Figure 5 6 The pasted files on the CD writer program You can then start to copy these files onto your CD R Backing Up Log Data Using System Log Using the System Log you can back up all log data or filtered data based on criteria To open the System Log click the ViewLog button on the main screen and select System Log To open the Advanced Log Browser click button at the top right corner on the System Log window Click the Backup button on the toolbar This dialog box appears xl i Current Table e Export with Yideo Sudio data S Figure 5 7 Page 186 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files Table Option E All Tables Backs up all log data Current Table Backs up only the log table you are currently at Export with Video Audio data Backs up video audio attachments with log data 4 Click OK The Backup dialog box Figure 5 8 appears 5 Inthe Media section select the destination to back up the log files and then click OK to back up Note 1 To back up the filtered data use the Filter function to define search criteria first 2 To open the backup data run EZSysLog exe from the backup file Backing Up Files Using ViewLog Using ViewLog you have thr
218. iis 82 Spot MONO Gon tolera a a a a i 82 A A 85 Quad Spot Monitors Controller ssssssccsseessssssnnnnnssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeonannssssseeneseeeseneeeessonons 85 SESMIMOSUD INS CONTONE O 86 Setting Pop up Camera WINdOWS occccccccccccoonccnnnnccnonononnconnnnononannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnns 88 Displaying TV Quad Panel on the Main System Screen ooooocnccnnncccccnonccnnnccnnnnnnnncnnnncononannnnnnnnons 90 Running the Quad Spot Monitors Controller Alone oooonnnccnnnccccccooonccnnnncnnonnnanccnnnnnnononncnnnns 91 System IGIEIP FOIE CON iia ida tilo acid 91 AUTO LOGOUT Adm Talaia 91 Auto Login USEF without Access RIN Sii Vetcuats imuayeaptentadsasaeQdsebiiouebiiuae tsar 92 A O ealiesiencecSeeueaciacenemecet aa 92 Version INTOR Mau ON aaa 93 Greatind SNOMGC UTS ansia il 93 Fast Rey IE OCKUD strain 95 Fast Key Retenes risa 96 PTZ Protocol and Model SUDDO Ministra 99 Chapter 2 VO APPICA MON Ss 101 Setting Up VO DEVICES iii od 101 Ei A erent renee eer oe rer 104 Keeping Hast Toggle Stal U Scsi AA 106 VO Comro Pads a 108 I O Input Control Panel oocccccnncccccccnnccnnncccccnononccnnnnonnnnanncnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnans 108 MOZO Mist ls A A 108 Moving PTZ Camera to a Preset Location upon Alarm Event ooooononnncccncccnnncconncnnnccnnnnananennnnnnas 109 Deactivating Alarm and Alert Settings cccccccooccnnnccnnnconononnccnonccnnon
219. in the background Double click the program listed in Task Manger to bring the program back to desktop Task Manager i X os Multicam Surveillance System 6 0 air untitled Paint ED iewLog 6 1 Figure 11 22 Page 355 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Token File for Save Mode This option in the Settings section lets you export a token file In case you enter safe mode and are in the status of the GV desktop This token file will let you exit from the GV desktop and enter the Windows desktop To export a token file and apply it follow the steps below 1 2 3 Click the Export Toke button to display the following dialog box Enter Token Code x In Safe ModerBoob users must locate Token File and enter Token Code to o lexitfrom the Multicam Desktop Token Code 123 Enter the Code up to 32 characters with the combination of alphabetstignoring case and digits cane Figure 11 23 Type a code in the Token Code field Click OK to display the Save As dialog box File name desktop token save as type Safe odeT oker srt Cancel E Figure 11 24 Locate a path and enter a desired name in the File Name field Click Save to save the file When you enter safe mode and are in the status of the GV desktop Click the Settings button on the desktop You will be prompted to locate the stored token file and enter the set token code When the Settings wind
220. ing Using Remote Applications Playing Back Video Files in Q View Click Play Save button found in the camera screen This brings up the program Q View which is used for instant playback for video files temporarily saved in the Temporarily Record Buffer created when Rec button is pressed El Q iew C DOCUME 1Neo LOCALS 1 Temp rF avi File View Operations Edit En o0s7feG3S DiGi tal DiGi tal Suwene SUWENE EA E OVER Figure 8 7 Preference Settings Click the Preferences button from the toolbar to bring out the corresponding dialog box shown as Preference Setting x Connection General Login Setup Login ID Password Faster Figure 8 8 Page 274 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications The following options are available on the Connection tab of the Preference Setting Login Setup Specify user name and password for Remote View Image Quality Specify the compression ratio of the video Lower number gives higher compression smaller file size but the image quality will suffer There are also options available on the General tab Preference Setting X Connection General Text Color l Background Color Select C Transparent Opaque C Invisible Temporary Record Butter Buffer Path CADOCUME TNADMINITTSLOCALS 1 Browse W Prompt Save Figure 8 9 Text Display Sets camera description s text color and background color 3 options are available to prese
221. ing enabled or disabled in the GV System EE ID 1 2 3 4 z E T y E 3 4 z Event Device Mode a 12 16 2003 9 25 07 PM System Exit Local 12 16 2003 9 35 15 PM System Startup Local 12182003 9 36 55 PM System Exit Local 12 16 2003 9 37 32 PM System Startup Local 12182003 9 38 52 PM System Exit Local 12 16 2003 9 39 20 PM System Startup Local 12 16 2003 9 41 09 PM Start Monitor All Local 12 79 2003 10 43 54 AM Stop Monitor All Local 12 19 2003 10 47 09 4M Start Monitor All Local 12 79 2003 10 47 19 AM Stop Montar All Local 12 19 2003 10 47 21 AM Start Monitor All Local 12 19 2003 10 52 43 AM Stop Monitor All Local Figure 1 41 ID Displays the event ID number Time This column shows the time when system event occurs Event This column shows the following messages when associated actions are taken Schedule Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops the monitoring schedule Auto Reboot Appears when the system performs auto rebooting function System Start Exit Appears when a user starts or stops GV System Start Stop Monitor All Appears when a user starts or stops all cameras monitoring functions Start Stop Monitor Appears when a user starts or stops the individual camera s monitoring function The camera number will appear in Device column IO Monitor Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops the individual I O module s monitoring function The I O module number will appear in the De
222. inish the report and will not change the contents anymore click the End Report Or click Save to edit later Editing Alarm Report Categories The items in each category of the Alarm Report can be customized and edited to meet your needs The changes made here are permanent and will be available for the report creation 1 On the Center window click the Preference Settings button and select Customize Alarm Report This dialog box appears Page 320 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Customize Alarm Report Event Type Description Measurement Taken Patrol Accidental Alarrn Real Alarm False Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm Video of Accidental Alarm Video of Real Alarm Figure 9 38 2 Click the category tab Event Type Description Measurement Taken Patrol to make the necessary changes 3 Click OK to save the changes Colorful Flags The flags of various colors are provided to distinguish different events You will find them useful not only when browsing in the Event List but also when using the Filter function to search the desired evenis e T Message Red Flag Y Syster Start Service Blue Flag Login Logout Login Yellow Flag System Start Monitoring All Type Events Y Green Flag System Stop O Monitoring N System Stop all cameras monitoring Y Orange Flag Motion Camera 1 detected motion E Purple Fla z p E Motion Camera 2 detected motio
223. ion Port 5545 Default Temp Folder Path C AGYS00 CCT emp a 1 Figure 9 16 Advance Settings Connection Broken m Maximum Retries Sets the number of retries if connection is not immediately available Retry Interval Sets the time interval between each retries Retry until connected Keeps GV System on trying until connected to Center V2 E Retry in the background Hides the retries in the background Codec Selects Geo Mpeg 4 default Geo Mpeg 4 ASP or Geo H264 as the compression method for video sent to Center V2 For details see Recording Codec Options in Chapter 1 Connective Port Displays ports used for communication It is recommended to keep the default settings unless otherwise necessary The Center Port number must match the Center Port assigned in Center V2 as shown in Figure 9 13 To automatically configure these ports on your router by UPnP technology click the Arrow button For details see UPnP Settings in Chapter 5 Temp Folder Attachments are temporarily stored in this folder while waiting to be sent to Center V2 In case the connection is broken attachments meant to be sent to Center V2 could be found here Once the connection is back to normal events saved in the Temp Folder will be sent out immediately Page 299 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Camera The settings define which camera condition to notify Center V2 To configure the event type first disable t
224. ions for a single monitor 9 20 or 42 screen divisions for dual monitors In the 1600 x 1200 resolution select 6 12 or 24 screen divisions for a single monitor 9 16 or 36 screen divisions for dual monitors In the 1680 x 1050 resolution select 6 15 or 28 screen divisions for a single monitor 9 20 or 42 screen divisions for dual monitors In the 1920 x 1200 resolution select 6 15 or 28 screen divisions for a single monitor 9 20 or 42 screen divisions for dual monitors For resolution see Layout Settings later in this chapter Displays the connection status of subscribers Brings up these options System Configure Password Setup E mail Setup Notification Customize Alarm Report and Automatic Failover Support Closes or minimizes the Center V2 window Adds deletes or modifies subscriber accounts Refreshes the connection status Displays the next page of camera views Displays the previous page of camera views Flags an event for later reference Displays the Alarm Report dialog box Indicates an event coming with an attachment Double click the event to open the attached video file Indicates a subscriber s ID Indicates the event type Alarm Attachment Connection Login Logout Motion System and Trigger Indicates associated information for each event type Indicates when Center V2 receives an event Indicates when an event happens at the subscriber s site A list of Types and Messages will be disp
225. iview Select Monitor Displayer Setup Displayer Mode Twin View Screen Resolution 1280 se 1024 0 0 Screen origin at cm als cla al f User define Monitor 1 cos Figure 11 16 In the Screen Setup tab select TwinView from the Displayer Mode drop down list In the MultiCam tab select Monitor 1 from the Select Monitor drop down list In the ViewLog tab select Monitor 2 from the Select Monitor drop down list Click the OK button and start GV System which should appear in monitor 1 Click the ViewLog button on the main screen and select Video Audio log from the menu ViewLog should appear in monitor 2 Note The Select Position option allows you to determine where to position GV software on Windows It is only necessary if your GV System is set at 800x600 panel resolution but your Windows desktop is set at 1024x768 or higher Itis recommended that both GV software and Windows desktop to be set at the same resolution For details on how to set the resolution for GV System refer to Panel Resolution in Chapter 1 Page 351 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Windows Lockup This feature helps you to secure your PC while away from your workstation You may lock up the Windows desktop while launching a customized GV desktop The GV desktop is where operators are limited to run the GV System and the selected programs The GV desktop Screen The GV desktop program is included in the installati
226. layed on Center V2 Type Motion Trigger Connection Message Camera xx detected motion Module xx triggered Camera xx video lost Module xx I O lost Network abnormal Fail to login to dispatch server Dispatch server is shutdown Video signal of xx has resumed Module xx has returned to normal Failed to login SMS server Failed to send short message SMS server is shutdown Page 284 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Alarm Disk Full Restarted Failed Multicam Closed There isn t enough space for recording Multicam Surveillance System has been closed An unexpected error occurred in Multicam Surveillance System Error Code 1 or 2 There is an intruder Object Missing Unattended Object Alert Message of POS Scene Change System Start end service IP change Record failed Status change of monitoring camera On xx Off xx By Schedule Stop start all cameras monitoring Start stop I O Monitoring By Schedule Schedule start Schedule stop All monitoring devise are stop too Start monitoring all type events Stop monitoring all type events Subscriber session is not established Wait time expired Unexpected logout before subscriber session is completed Attachment Record file of Camera xx Note Error Code 1 indicates a codec error Error Code 2 indicates that users can t write or record any data due to HD failure or user privilege Creating a Subscriber Account Before starting Center V2 add o
227. laying Back Video Files Click the New Server button and provide information to the fields Server Name Give a descriptive name to the server Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of the server ID Enter an ID that was already created in the server Password Enter the password associated with the ID Port Use the default port 5066 unless otherwise necessary You may create a group click the New Group button before adding any user Click on any group and then click the New Server button to add users to that group Click the Close button to finish the setup Delete to remove the entry from Address Book Connect to connect the RPB Client to the RPB Server instantly Preference Settings setup Download mM Always overwrite files Always tell me when download is finished Channel Text W Show Channel Number iw Show Server Name iw Show Camera Mame Panel Resolution Figure 4 38 Download The options allow you to specify how your files are saved when your storage space is full Channel Text The selections determine the effect you want your camera view to display Panel Resolution Select the screen resolution of the RPB Client window Page 177 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files RPB Client Playback Control Panel File Indicator Playback Status Panel Local File 1 11 29 2004 16 34 24 125 x1 Playback Meter Previous Frame Disconnect First Next Speed Speed Fram
228. lect Version Information Creating Shortcuts You can create up to 20 shortcuts on the main screen to a program or file 1 Run Fast Backup amp Restore Main System from the Windows Start menu The Fast Backup amp Restore MulitCam System window appears 2 Click the Select Skin Style button select DVR and then select User Define Setting This dialog box appears User define Application Parameter ok Cancel Figure 1 103 Page 93 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 3 Click the Add button This dialog box appears Add New Item Application Painter File CAMINO ss ystems2 inspaint exe ae Parameter To modify images conc Figure 1 104 Application Names the desired application to be pointed to m File Assigns the path to the desired application m Parameter Sets the command information for the application 4 Click OK to save all the configurations 5 Run the Main System The shortcut button appears Page 94 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Fast Key Lockup If you wish not to use certain fast keys and do not want them to interfere with the keyboard use you can disable the fast key functions 1 On the main screen click the Configure button point to Tool Kit and then select Fast Key Lock Setup This dialog box appears x IY Lock Sensitive Fast Key Fast Key FF Fa 1 oo Lo E E El E c LI AQOXS lt c 41M 737 ka F Cancel Browze
229. led cash register and with the text or graphic mode For the information on attaching the text mode POS system to GV System visit the related links below To access Visit DB9 Interface POS System http www geovision com tw english fag POSflowchart text DB9 POS pdf DB25 Interface POS System http www geovision com tw english fag POSflowchart text DB25_POS pdf DB9 Interface Cash Register http www geovision com tw englishfag POSflowchart text DB9 cash paf DB25 Interface Cash Register http www geovision com tw english fag POSflowchart text DB25 _ cash paf To attach the graphic mode POS system to GV System first check if your POS system has these two characteristics e Windows operation system e Serial port COM port for output For the application of the graphic mode POS system you need e Additional USB dongle e POS Data Sender program included in the Software CD If you are not sure about the printing mode of your POS system refer to The Printing Mode of POS System Cash Register at this link http www geovision com tw english fag POSflowchart The_ printing mode of POS system cash register paf Page 128 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application POS Data Sender To attach the graphic mode POS system with the Windows operation system and serial output to GV System follow these steps 1 Connect the POS system as illustrated below Windows based and built in serial port POS System
230. les the Remote ViewLog function allows you to have full access to the ViewLog features of the connected GV System Note To use the Remote ViewLog for the first time you need to install the Remote ViewLog components on the local PC Install the components from the Surveillance System Software CD or from the WebCam Compression Selection page select Remote Play Back ViewLog in Figure 6 16 1 On the MultiView window click the ViewLog button No 7 Figure 6 29 The Connect to Remote ViewLog Service dialog box appears 2 Type the IP Address ID and Password of the remote GV System Keep the default port as 5552 or modify it if necessary In the Host Type field select DVR Click the Connect button When the connection is established you will see the video player ViewLog appears on the screen Then you can access all ViewLog features for playback Page 232 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam JPEG Image Viewer JPEG Image Viewer is a cross platform viewer practicable on Mac OS Netscape and Microsoft IE browsers Continuously receiving JPEG images from GV System and limited to the single camera view the viewer is an ideal tool for the users with limited Internet bandwidth For this application the Create JPEG GIF File s option must be enabled see Figure 6 6 while the Enhance Network Security option must be disabled see Figure 6 1 To start the JPEG Image Viewer follow these steps 1 Open an Internet brows
231. leting Files Deleting Files Using Backup System To delete files using Backup System follow these steps 1 Inthe DMBackUp window click the Delete button Alternatively you can click Log on the menu bar and select Delete to bring up the following Delete Log dialog box Delete Log x Delete Time Period Start Time 7i 9 2004 00 00 00 End Time 7zi 9 2004 23 59 al Select Delete Camera s Wi 2 W3wM4 M5 Vb vw va V9 V 10M 11 iv 12 13 lv 14 lv 15 lv 16 aia alado alo aja aa alos wae m25 Ad aes 29 SU a aS Select All Clean All n E T Cancel Figure 5 11 Delete Log 2 Define a time period for the file deletion The minimum time for deletion is 1 minute Select the desired camera channels for the file deletion 4 Ifyou like to reserve the never recycling events after the deletion check Only Reserve Never Recycle Event 5 Click OK This brings up the Delete Information dialog box indicating how many files will be deleted and how much storage space will be free x Camera LUnRead Log Delete Log Number storage Size will be free 1 4666 Are you sure to delete cano Figure 5 12 Delete Information 6 Click OK to start the deletion Page 192 Deleting Files Using ViewLog To delete files using ViewLog follow these steps 1 Tip 2 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files On the function panel click the Tools button N
232. lity Quantizer Raising the value will improve compression speed and dramatically increase compression rate but reduce image quality E inter frame threshold Raising the value will improve compression speed and rate but reduce image quality slightly Page 18 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System m Max keyframe interval Raising the value will extend the duration between key frames and increase compression rate but reduce image quality slightly Compression speed remains the same Evaluation Encode size Click to calculate the encoding size based on your encoding settings see Setting above and assigned video clip select PTZ dome or street from the drop down list Click the Stop tab to stop the evaluation m Encode speed Click to calculate the frame rate based on the encoding settings see Setting above and assigned video clip select PTZ dome or street from the drop down list Configuring Hotline Network Notification System Configure A x Camera 6 Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 General Setting Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera Camera Camera 15 Camera 16 7 O Device HotLine Network Modem Setup Modem Device Ras PPPoE Line0000 ind IF 192 168 0 108 Com Port Detect 3550 Default IW Assign IP Realtek ATL8139 Family PC HotLine Alert 1 Multicast Server M Add to HotLine Alerts List Bind IF 1
233. log box appears Setup Remote Authentication Server xj When Remote Authentication Server off line Ma Allow local supervisor to Stop Use Remote Authentication System g Allow user to use local account login remote application eq Webcam Remote View Setup Server cancel Figure 11 30 Setup Remote Authenticator Server Use Remote Authenticator Enable the connection with the Authentication Server Allow Local supervisor to stop use remote authentic system Allows the local supervisor to stop the Authentication application when the connection fails If the option is disabled and the connection fails the dialog box won t be accessible until connection resumes Allow user to use local account login remote application Allows the local users to access other remote applications with their previous password and ID settings when the connection fails 2 Click the Setup Server button in Figure 11 30 This dialog box appears PassClient Setting g X Network Setup Server IF Server Port 3663 Default Login ID 12345 Password ki Figure 11 31 PassClient Setting Page 361 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities 3 Enter the IP address and port of the Authentication Server Enter the valid ID and password created in the Authentication Server Figure 13 29 4 Click OK to start the connection When the connection is established the previous password settings in the GV System will be invalid 5 Press L o
234. ly the application only supports GV IO modules For setup details see Setting Up I O Devices Chapter 2 on the Surveillance System Software CD To automatically force outputs when alert conditions occur see Notification Settings later in this chapter To manually force outputs click the I O Device button No 7 Figure 9 1 on the Center V2 window and then select Force Output to display the Force Output of Local I O Device window Selecta desired module and then click Finger buttons to activate outputs Page 313 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Forcing Outputs of a Subscriber See Showing O Status earlier in this chapter Notification Settings Center V2 can automatically activate the assigned computer and output alarm to notify the operator while a SMS and e mail message being sent out to subscribers when alert conditions occur For this application click the Preference Settings button No 10 Figure 9 1 on the Center V2 window and select Notification to display this window Alarm Settings Alert Approach Video Lost le lO Module Lost Invoke Alarm b lO Trigger Normal lO Trigger Emergency F Output Module Connection Lost subseriber Login subscriber Logout Camera Motion Surveillance System Abnorm Intruder Wissing Object Text Format of SMS Unattended Object Figure 9 32 C Send SMS Alerts List box Select an alert condition for configuration The aler
235. m For this the remote GV System must grant the privilege first See the Enable Remote Control option in Figure 6 1 Page 220 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Click the Option button No 1 Figure 6 20 and select Remote Config to display the following dialog box Remote Config x Brightness Default Contrast Saturation Hue Figure 6 28 Remote Config Dialog Box Camera Move the slide bars Brightness Contrast Saturation and Hue to adjust video attributes Click the Send button to apply the changes to the remote GV System Record Check the desired cameras to start or stop recording to the remote GV System Monitor Enable I O and Schedule monitoring to the remote GV System Click the Send button to apply the settings Multi View MPEG 4 Encoder Viewer Multi View is a multi channel MPEG4 Encoder Viewer allowing users to view 4 8 and 16 live cameras simultaneously Because multiple channels require a large amount of data to be transferred over Internet this function is limited to broadband users only Page 221 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Starting MultiView You can install the MultiView over the Internet or from the Surveillance System Software CD The following is an example of installing and running the MulitView over the Internet Follow the instructions of Starting WebCam at the Client PC in this chapter until the Select Internet Connection window appears Select DSL
236. m System Tray cc200 cccceeecssccsseeeceeeececceseeeeecnesccasseeeeeeesacceeseseeersnesnes 22 Camera Audio HVS Call cise sess cistern piu 23 Setting WO AUTO REDO OU as riean a a Sade ba deleted settee aed aed ea ee ce 24 Logging System Activities into System LOQ oocccccccccccccoonnccnnnnnnconononcnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnanncnnnnnnnss 25 Popping Up a Camera Window on Motion Detection o ccccccccccccccncnnncccccnnnnnnnncnonononananannnncnnnnnnnos 26 Different Text Alignment for Each Channel ooonccccccccccccnncccnnnccnncccnnncnnnononnnnnonnnnncnnnonnnnnrnnnnnnannnnnnoss 27 Gontiguring Object COUNUNG rainesi dotada dl ba cocida 28 Mapping PTZ Cameras is ida 30 PIZIdle Ol CHON usabilidad 30 Selina UD Pas S WOTA oaeiae e a T e a e pe sateialecntenele wad arattoudet 31 Sending Alerts thru E mail ACCOUNTS ii a i a a a 34 GNOOSING Video SQUICO eriin a a a E a a a 36 Op mizing System PEMORMANCE 25g i a a a a aiaa a aaia eE ne 37 Adjusting VISO AMADO Sra 37 SWITCHING to Full Screen VIEW it a A E E A E A 39 Listening TO LVE Adi ii cas 39 Stopping Video Lost Watchdog eiusm ana a A aaa a aa Na 40 Deactivating Video Lost Beep cccooocccccconnococonnnccconconcnnanonononnnnononnnnnnnannnnnnannnnononnnnnnnnnannnnnncnnanns 40 Star StOP MO MMO NING aura edad 40 Playing Back Vid o File sus ico 41 e A a 41 SISMO RS 42 Recordando cneqUlen acia ici 48 o A A a 49 Special Days OCMC US amis mecucaes ciente on incondicional
237. mation as illustrated below The DNS Client program is now activated However it will not upload IP address unless one of the following applications is running the Main System Center V2 VSM Dispatch Server Twin DVR and SMS Server If the IP address of your GV System is not updated for more than 30 days your host name will be deleted automatically Check Run at startup if you wish to auto run Dynamic DNS AP on the next Windows start up mE Username E pramicar Password soccceees I Aun at startup Register Figure 11 3 Page 340 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities TwinDVR System TwinServer is an external application that helps sharing the networking liability from the GV System A complete TwinServer concept requires at least two computers a TwinServer which should be run on the computer where GV System is installed and a TwinDVR which should be run on a separate computer connected to the same LAN as the TwinServer The TwinServer sends video stream to TwinDVR while TwnDVR acts as a WebCam Server and serves all WebCam clients over the Internet One TwinDVR can serve approximately 200 channels over the Internet Multiple TwinDVRs can be added to the network as online traffic increases There are two ways to connect TwinServer and TwinDVR TCP IP mode and Multicast mode Both have its advantages and disadvantages choose the one that suits your application mostly TCP IP Mode TCP IP is a simpler a
238. me limit When the supervisor logs in the Timer shows 999 Use this drop down list to switch cameras Click it to return to the previous page Use these buttons to control left up down and right of the PTZ cameras Click it to return to home Page 245 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Viewing and Controlling l O Devices To view and control the connected I O devices select the desired camera and click the button see Figure 6 53 I O Monitoring Setting Monitoring i f Mwelcome Gview e ex 02 35 ok Figure 6 55 The number on the toolbar indicates the connected module To view and control the input and output devices click the number button I O Setting FE Welcome Gview e x 02 35 ok Figure 6 56 P displays the status of triggered input devices See Figure 6 57 O displays the connected output devices See Figure 6 58 Page 246 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Input Output Devices ok pox 02 35 ok Figure 6 57 Input Devices Figure 6 58 Output Devices On the bottom toolbar of the Output Devices screen the numbers indicates the connected output devices Click the desired number to force the output Camera Status To view the camera status click the button see Figure 6 53 rien Live Es x m ok Camera Status 01 Morral 02 Normal 03 Inactive 04 Norrnal 05 Inactive 06 Inactive O7 Inactive 08 Inactive 09 Inactive 10 Inactive 12 Inacti
239. ming application 1 Click the Configure button point to Object Tracking Application and click Object Tracking View to open the Zoom in Dialog window overlapping on the main screen Figure 1 75 In the Zoom In Type field select Quad View In the Camera field select the assigned PTZ camera screen Then the four views you set up before will show in the Dialog window as illustrated below Page 73 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Zoom In Dialog Figure 1 79 4 Use the mouse to outline a desired area in one of the four views The area will be magnified in the main screen 5 When you click the Go to Idle Mode button in the lower part your setting in step 7 of Object Zooming Setup will be applied For example suppose you choose View 3 When you click the button the PTZ camera will go to the preset View 3 Configuring Hybrid Cameras If your system is installed with the Hybrid DVR card follow these steps to configure your cameras One Hybrid DVR card supports 4 camera channels and you may install up to 4 Hybrid DVR cards to one GV System so that you may configure 16 cameras at most For details on the Hybrid DVR card see nstallation Guide 1 Click the Configure button point to Camera Audio Install and then select Hybrid Camera Install The Hybrid Video Source dialog box appears 2 Select the Hybrid DVR channels for setup 3 Click Configure The Hybrid Camera Configure dialog box appears Page 74 Chapter 1
240. mote applications e Remote View System IP Multicast System Remote View Remote View is used to remotely monitor live videos from Main System through modem dial up or TCP IP connection Each Remote View is limited to only one login at a time However you may open multiple Remote Views in one workstation and each login to a different main system Setting Up Remote View The Remote View software is included in the Surveillance System Software CD The application is to be installed at the client PC with modem dial up or TCP IP network access The following is the minimum PC specifications for this application OS Windows 2000 XP 2003 Server CPU Pentium 500 minimum Memory 128MB RAM Hard Disk 20GB minimum VGA NVIDIA GeForce I 32MB 800x600 screen resolution minimum Network TCP IP Modem Dial up Setting Up the Connection Remote View allows two connection methods and each are set up as follows Page 269 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications To set up modem connection 1 Make sure modems at client PC and at sever PC are already setup The system currently supports only external modems Click the Network button on main screen and enable Modem Server from menu Click Preference and then select Configure Modem Select the network to use from drop down list Click the Connect button from menu bar of Remote View and then select Dial Modem from menu to bring up the Connect dialog box as shown
241. n When the specified idle time of zooming is up PTZ will go back for tracking If you want to stop the zooming function before the specified idle time click the Back to Tracking button in the lower of the Dialog window Then PTZ will go back tracking instantly Object Zooming If only one PTZ camera is available without the stationary camera you can simply apply it for the object zooming function The feature allows you to configure up to 4 critical views for instant monitoring and zooming PTZ Setup Before configuring the Object Tracking function first configure the PTZ device Refer to the PTZ Setup of Object Tracking Object Zooming Setup After the above PTZ setup go back to the menu bar Page 71 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 1 Click the Configure button point to Object Tracking Application and select Object Tracking Setup to display the Object Tracking Config window Then click the Zoom in Object tab in the upper part to display the following window Note No images will show in the right screen until you complete the settings below Object Tracking Config Object Tracking Zoom In Object PTZ Selection qien Camera 2 Selection ldle Mode Idle Tirmefsech Tracking 10 2 he Show Screen No Test View 4 Add Remove Remove All Cancel Figure 1 76 Click for the PTZ setup Refer to step 1 in the section of Object Tracking Setup Choose the camera screen of the PTZ For thi
242. n y Flag Complete Attachment Record file of Camera 1 Live Clear Flag Setup Figure 9 39 Marking the Events with Colorful Flags You can flag any events in the Event List for later reference There are 6 kinds of flags and one check mark for you to signify the events Page 321 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 1 On the Event List window select one event and right click on the flag column A list of 6 kinds of flags in different colors Red Flag Blue Flag Yellow Flag Green Flag Orange Flag and Purple Flag one check mark Flag Complete and two setting options appears 2 Select the desired flag or check mark for the event To unmark the events simply click the flag icon Or right click the flag icon and select Clear Flag Editing Colorful Flags You can name the colorful flags with the provided texts or change the texts to meet your needs 1 On the Event List window select one event and right click in the flag column The Flag list appears Figure 9 39 2 Select Setup This dialog box appears Modify text Setas default Red Flag Default Ye Blue Flag Y Yellow Flag Y Green Flag Y Orange Flag Purple Flag y Flag Complete Figure 9 40 3 Select the desired flag and then click the Modify text button A list of text options appears 4 Select one desired text Pending Assigned In Process Progressed Resolve and Reject or select User Define to customize your own flag text
243. n Consider your priority in image quality or CPU usage before making a selection e For NTSC the image quality and CPU usage from the highest to the lowest is 720x480 720x480 De interlace 640x480 640x480 De interlace 320x240 e For PAL the image quality and CPU usage from the highest to the lowest is 720x576 720x576 De interlace 640x480 640x480 De interlace 320x240 xi Video Setup ideo Standard NTSC_M ideo Resolution Figure 1 35 Page 36 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Optimizing System Performance Click the Configure button and select Performance from menu This function is only available to GV 650 GV 750 GV 800 GV 900 and GV 1000 Preview Master The display speed increases because the system resource will focus on the monitoring after click Preview Master Both Master Both display and recording speed is at the average because the system resource is allocated equally Record Master The recording speed increases because the system resource will focus on the recording after select the Record Master Adjusting Video Attributes This feature lets you adjust video attributes to get the best picture Click the Configure button and select Video Attributes to have two selections Standard and Advanced Standard Video Attributes Adjust image quality by moving the slide bars to the desired values Click Default to apply default values Click the left and right arrow buttons to select
244. n inputs are triggered outputs will be activated in cascade mode Disabling a Group On the I O Advanced Panel right click a desired group and select Stop Monitoring All input devices of this group are now disabled No cascade triggers will occur Pausing the Triggered Inputs This feature is designed for a group of outputs set to be Toggle mode When inputs activate outputs in cascade triggers right click this group and select Pause Monitoring The inputs of the group will be reset but the outputs keep on alarming Note With the System Wide Output option see System Wide Triggers above activated you cannot use these three options to manage a group of I O devices Page 123 Chapter 2 I O Applications Visual Automation The Visual Automation helps you automate any electronic device by triggering the connected output You can intuitively click on the image of the electronic device to change its current state e g light ON Setting Up Visual Automation 1 On the main screen click the Configure button and select Visual Automation Setting This dialog box appears Visual Automation SetUp W Enable Camera 1 Set Color Delete All Sets Show Style C Normal Figure 2 30 2 Select the desired camera from the drop down list and check Enable 3 Drag the region on the image of t
245. n on the right corner see Figure 1 40 to open the database 2 On the toolbar select the desired type of log table Monitor System Login Counter POS and click the Filter button This dialog box appears Monitor Filter if Device lw Information lw Event Camera 1 T Module 1 Motion W Time C Date C Tine Both 92562006 00 00 00 ll 92562006 23 59 59 aa Add Mew Command Import Export Time Device Information Ewent 9262006 926 2006 11 59 59 PM Camera 1 Module 1 Motion Mote all commands are operated by OR Figure 1 45 3 Click the Import or Export button to start the file transfer Note This feature is only available in version 8 1 or later If you want to export the configurations to the older version it is not applicable Page 46 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System POS Filter Setup You can use the POS Filter function in the Advanced Log Browser to locate the desired transaction data E Filter the conditions in below to the selected POS table Apply the filter configurations to the selected POS devices Period between Set the employee IDs or names for filtering Import Export Import or export the POS Filter configurations Pos Filter le Filter the condictions in below to the selected POS table Ji mo mo EE o E Bo Mi mo me EN EN me Bie Clear All Select All we Content W Period between Iw Event Y W Time Date g
246. n the keyboard to call up the Login dialog box The icon 9 indicates the connection is established Password Forgot Password cancel Y Figure 11 32 6 Type a valid User ID and password for login As long as the Authentication sever is working every time when you start the GV System the Login dialog box will appear Note When the disconnection icon appears there might be three reasons 1 The valid ID and password created in the Authentication Server see Figure 11 29 don t match those in the GV System see Figure 11 31 2 The client s given name see Figure 11 26 doesn t match the GV System s 3 The network media has traffic problem Backup Servers You can configure up to two backup servers in case of the primary server failure Whenever the primary fails the backup server takes over the connection from subscribers providing uninterrupted services 1 Import the subscribers accounts from the primary server to the backup server 2 On the Authentication Server window click the Server Setup button The Server Setup dialog box Figure 11 33 appears Page 362 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities 3 Check the Automatic Failover Support option and click the Setting button This Automatic Failover Support dialog box appears 4 Click the Add button The Automatic Failover Setup dialog box Figure 11 33 appears Type the IP address of the backup server Keep the default port setting or modify it if n
247. n to VSM Start Stop CMS Server Start Stop full screen view Login Change the user Logout from the current user Switch the screen division Switch to a specific screen division Minimize the Main System window Exit the Main System Display the Fast Key Reference table Switch to the previous screen Switch to the next screen Take a snapshot Zoom in out the single camera view Page 97 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System PTZ Control Key Function lt Pan left gt Pan right t Tilt up y Tilt down Insert Focus in Delete Focus out Home Zoom in End Zoom out Num 1 9 O and Fi F6 Switch the camera channel Page 98 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System PTZ Protocol and Model Support This list is for you to view the PTZ protocols and models that GV System supports When you set up PTZ control in the System Configure window click the drop down list to select the PTZ device PTZ Protocol and Model Support Ademco Jupiter Lilin PIH PIH 7000 7600 7600PL 7625 BOSCH TC 700 8560 MESSOA SDS600 Series Canon VC C3 VC C4 Mintron 54G2AHN P CBC GANZ ZC S120 Series Minking A01 BO1 Chiper V9KRP NanWang NVD 2300PNT Direct Perception PTU Series Panasonic WV CS850 854 D Max Dome Pelco Dome DongYang DOH 240 Pelco Spectra 3 DynaColor D 7720 7722 PTZ in I O Dynacolor Dome SAE DR E 588 Elbex Matrix 1000 Samsung SCC 641 643 EverFocus EPTZ 1000 500 Samsung SPD 1600
248. nd Output Module allow you time to deactivate prior alert and output settings To deactivate these settings you may stop monitoring or enable the assigned input module set at Deactivate notification when selected pin ON in I O Application window Figure 2 8 Register Input Event This option logs the alarm events into System Log Each event is labeled with ID time device name camera or I O input corresponding module of the device and event for later retrieval For details on System Log see Chapter 1 Output X Click the Arrow buttons to select an output One GV IO module provides up to 16 outputs Select Output Output 1 A Fo PTE l Hama Apply to all Inputs Output 1 Force Output Signal Type g N40 C NO Toole i N O Pulse Es b 5 Sec 1 of NC Pulse C NC C NC Toggle Keep Last Toggle Status Figure 2 3 E For PTZ This option opens the PTZ Control Panel where to control movements of your PTZ camera Name Specifies a name for each output device in the Name field Force Output Click to test signal to the selected device Page 103 Chapter 2 I O Applications E Signal Type There are six signal types available N O Normal Open N O Toggle N O Pulse N C Normal Closed N C Toggle and N C Pulse Choose the one that mostly suits the device you re using The N O Toggle or N C Toggle signal type is the output high mode that turns to output low until the monitoring is stopped Y
249. nd cost effective solution In the TCP IP mode the TwinServer and TwinDVRs are connected in a point to point connection It means that video streams are sent from TwinServer to TwinDVR A then TwinDVR A duplicates the video streams and sends them to TwinDVR B If the connection between TwinServer and TwinDVR A is broken TwinDVR B will not be able to receive video streams as well oo ee AA E Twin DVR A Router WebCam Client Figure 11 4 Page 341 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities MultiCast Mode Multicast Network is more complicated and expensive to setup In the Multicast mode the TwinServer transmits video streams in packets to a virtual buffer of the Multicast network The virtual buffer then broadcasts the video streams to all TwinDVRs under the network Each TwinDVR should be installed with two network cards One is for the hub where TwinServer is plugged in and the other for a DSL or ISDN modem with dedicated ISP service to the Internet Each TwinDVR serves its own group of WebCam Clients G WebCam Client Figure 11 5 Starting TwinServer 1 Inthe Main System click the Network button and then select TwinServer This TwinServer setup dialog box appears TT rwinserver E server Setting Fort 9650 Default P Use TOPP Lise Multicast Figure 11 6 TwinServer Settings Page 342 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities The default port 9650 is for video transmission Keep it as default or modi
250. ne subscriber to the center at least The standard version of Center V2 only allows 5 subscriber accounts On the Center V2 window click the Accounts button No 12 Figure 9 1 The Address Book window appears AGE Address Book E ay London i 1 j Georision 2 0 7 970s y New York gy Taipei Group 3 Subscriber 3 Figure 9 2 Subscriber Information The buttons of the toolbar No Name Description 1 Add A Group Adds a group 2 Add A Subscriber Adds a subscriber 3 View Edit Subscriber Highlight one subscriber and click this button to open Subscriber Address Book Address Book for viewing and editing 4 Delete A Group Subscriber Highlight a group or a subscriber and click this button to delete it 5 Find A Subscriber searches a subscriber account g Import Export Imports or exports the address book data Address Book Page 285 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 7 Subscriber Settings Highlight one subscriber and click this button to configure the settings of video and alert formats 8 Subscriber Schedule Sets up subscription schedules Creating a Subscriber 1 Click the Add A Group button No 1 Figure 9 2 to create a group 2 Click the Add A Subscriber button No 2 Figure 9 2 The Subscriber Address Book dialog box appears Subscriber Address Book Login iD TPE Password ia lt gt Cancel Name TEE Address Meihu Rd Taipei Taiwan E Mail geavision
251. ng windows are displayed in the current computer For the application your VGA card must support Twin View see Chapter 11 for details and your Windows desktop must be properly set up for the display across two computer monitors Page 294 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Preference General Layout Network Record Dispatch Server Layout Screen Resolution 1280 A 1024 Main Panel Resolution 1024 768 Event List Position 2 Bottom Right Mote Any changes of this property will be applied in nest startup Figure 9 12 Preference Layout Screen Resolution Detects the current screen resolution on your PC Main Panel Resolution Sets the Center V2 panel resolution to 1024 x768 1280 x1024 1600 x 1200 1680 x 1050 or 1920 x 1200 This function is only available when your PC screen resolution is higher than 1280 x 1024 The new resolution is effective after next login Floating Event List Moves the Event List window to a separate monitor at the bottom or right side Page 295 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Network Preference Pr AA General Layout Network Record Dispatch Server Network Settings Center Pork b Enhance Network Security Accept the Connection of Video Server Mote Any changes of this property will be applied in the nest startup Figure 9 13 Preference Network Settings Center Port Indicates the communication port used by the C
252. ns and can allow access to local GV Systems listed in the DVR list 1 Click the Password Setup button No 3 Figure 11 25 to display the Password Setup window The window is the same as the Password Setup window in Main System see Figure 1 29 except the following section W Accountis disabled ID Guest Password E ae Hint f i Level Guest Valid Group e All DVR Group Setting Figure 11 27 Password Setup To create and edit a user refer to Setting up Password in Chapter 1 To grant access to local DVRs a b C d Note Click the Group Setting button in the window The Valid Group List window appears Click the New Group button The DVR Group Information window appears Give a DVR group name and check the desired DVRs into the group Go back to the Password Setup window Use the Valid Group drop down list to select the created DVR group a os du Ea E Group List de US Figure 11 28 Valid Group List and DVR Group Information In the Password Setup window of Authentication Server the Fast Backup amp Restore tab is not available Page 359 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Starting the Server To configure the server and start the service follow these steps 1 2 3 Click the Server Setup button No 4 Figure 11 25 This dialog box appears p Server Setup Network Setting Server Port 3663 Default B Security Setting Authorized ID
253. nstructions on setup and installation refer to Audio Settings in this chapter Click the Audio button No 9 Figure 6 20 to access live audio from the server site and click the Microphone button No 10 Figure 6 20 to speak to the server site When both buttons are enabled you can perform two way communication between the client computer and the server site Page 219 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Data Rate Configuration When sounds seem to pause or break up you can configure Data Rate to improve the situation Click the Option button No 1 Figure 6 20 and select Data Rate Configure to display the following window Moving the slide bar to the Low direction will decrease the frame rate but increase the audio performance moving the slide bar to the High direction will increase the frame rate but decrease the audio performance x Video Data Rate 18 57 KB sec High Lowy Audio Data Rate Real Time Smooth server to Client 0 0 KASec Call Back 0 0 k BI5ec Figure 6 27 Data Rate Configuration DirectDraw Setup The DirectDraw setting is enabled by default Some VGA cards might not support DirectDraw and can produce distorted frames In this case disable the function from the Option button No 1 Figure 6 20 Remote Configuration Remote Configuration allows you to adjust video images start stop recording enable disable I O monitoring and activate deactivate schedules to the remote GV Syste
254. nt the camera description Transparent text only no background Opaque text and background and Invisible no text and no background Temporary Record Buffer Determines a temporary folder that holds recording videos Remote PTZ and I O Function If you have installed PTZ or I O devices on the connected main system then you will be able to control these devices through TCP IP or dial up network To use remote PTZ control Select View PTZ Device from the menu bar to bring up the PTZ control panel Use the PTZ select buttons to choose the type of camera you wish to control The control panel may look slightly different depending on camera model Page 2 5 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications PTZ select button Direction control button Zoom Focus Auto Focus Auto Pan Preset Go PT Speed PTZ speed select Addr0x80 ID address select Figure 8 10 To use Remote l O control Select View I O Module from the menu bar to bring up the I O control panel Remote View allows you to control only the output devices Click on the Output signal buttons to send signal to the output device Output signal buttons Figure 8 11 Page 276 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications Full Screen View Click Connect button and select Full Screen Mode from the menu The full screen mode provides a larger viewing area for the cameras There are four functional buttons located at the right hand
255. ntary switches allow turn on or turn off from multiple locations For example certain premises have a designated entry exit door When the staff enters the entry door the system starts monitoring When the staff leaves from the exit door the system stops monitoring Maintained Mode Push on push off button switches that stay open until thrown and then stay closed until thrown again Maintained switches are convenient for only one switch location For example in the business hour when the door is opened the system stops monitoring in the non business hour when the door is closed the system starts monitoring Page 303 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Panic Button Setup You may set up a panic alarm button at your GV System In case of emergency press the button immediately to send the associated video to Center V2 To set up a panic alarm select Panic Button in the Connect to Center V2 dialog box Figure 9 15 and click the Advance button This dialog box appears Settings for Panic Button 5 Panic Button Trigger by VO Mod 1 Pin 1 W Output Module Mod 3 Pin 4 send which Camerarsi to Center Gi gds gs gi Select All IY WE W10 414 u AE Clear All a W12 W 16 Connective Port Center Port 5547 Default Command Port 5548 Default Data Port 5549 Default Audio Port 5546 Default Connection Port 5545 Default E Cancel iw 4
256. nuously sends E mails to you when events occur You may specify the interval between E mails The default interval is 5 minutes configurable from O to 60 minutes therefore if motion lasts for more than 15 minutes it means you will receive 3 E mails If motion lasts for less than 5 minutes then you will receive only one E mail Page 35 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Option Select Auto Modem dial up to dial up automatically when the system is instructed to send E mail alerts The Disconnect Delay disconnects the system from Internet after the set number of minute s from O to 30 minutes SMTP Mail Server requires authentication lfthe SMTP mail server needs authentication select this item and enter your account name and password SMTP Server Keep the default port 25 or modify it to match that of SMTP Server Domain Name from DDNS Enter a domain name from DDNS server The email alert will be sent containing an URL link for remote playback For this function you must enable WebCam Server For related settings see Send Alert Approach Invoke to Send Alerts and Send Event Alerts earlier this chapter Choosing Video Source Video Source sets the video standard of your system NTSC or PAL Click the Configure button and then select Video Source to display the following dialog box Video Setup Determines a video standard for your system Video Standard Select a video standard used in your country Video Resolutio
257. o Closes or minimizes the ViewLog window ome IAS o 1115 o 0 2 He os e 0 1 T e H Ll l 1 f L ji Figure 4 2 Function Panel Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files The controls in the Function Panel No Name Description 1 Sample Gives the examples of Before and After effects of contrast brightness light enhancement equalization sharpness smoothness and Grayscale 2 Contrast Brightness Modifies color contrast and brightness of the video image 3 Light Enhancement Modifies light enhancement and equalization of the video image Equalization To remove the applied effect click the Undo button 4 Sharpen Smooth Modifies smoothness and sharpness of the video image To remove the applied effect click the Undo button 5 Grayscale Switches between the color and black white image 6 Copy Copies the video image 7 Undo Undoes the applied effects on the video image 8 Backup Backs up video files 9 Save AVI File Saves a video file as avi or exe format see Exporting Video later in this chapter 10 Save As Image Exports image files in bmp jpg gif png or tif format 11 Print Prints out the image 12 Print Setup Specifies various settings for printing 13 Page Setup Adjusts the page layout 14 Setting Sets up advanced functions for ViewLog see Advanced Setup later in this chapter 15 Tools Brings up these options Object Search Advanced Log Browser Delete Remote ViewLog Serv
258. o 14 Figure 4 2 and then select Delete This dialog box appears Time Period Ek Only Never Recycle Event Start Time f 1 1 2006 ii 00 00 29 End Time f 1212008 23 58 30 Select Camerals mol Camerats Files Status JE a v Camera 1 28 Ready v Camera 2 0 Ready v Camera 3 0 Ready Camera 4 0 Ready Y Camera 5 0 Ready Camera 6 0 Ready v Camera 7 0 Ready Camera 8 0 Ready v Camera 9 0 Ready Y Camera 10 0 Ready Y Camera 11 D Ready W Camera 12 0 Ready v Camera 13 0 Ready Y Camera 14 0 Ready wv Camera 15 0 Ready Ml mms A mene video Audio Event y Total Event 26 Total Size 9641 KB Delete Close View Delete Log Figure 5 13 Define the time period for file deletion Uncheck the cameras which you don t want to delete the files of Use the drop down list to select the types of events to be deleted e g video audio or both together If you only want to delete the never recycle events check the Only Never Recycle Event option Click the Delete button If you just want to delete a specific event or several events within one day select the event or period Note 1 multiple events on the Video Event list and right click to select Delete The Delete dialog box will then appear and you can follow the steps described above to delete files without setting up the time If you want to vie
259. o 1 5 minutes while the hard disk can save larger one from 1 minute to 45 minutes 1 Enable the Pre Rec Motion option 2 Click the Arrow button beside This dialog box appears Pre Record Setup q x Pre Record Performance Good a Better Best O Extra Defaut Pre Record Option per camera Total Frames E Max 30 Frames Sec Limitation 1 C Pre Recording using HDD Keep Pre Record Files 1 Video Clips 2 ouse RAM as pre record cache butter Current used frames ls 6 frame rate limit 31 Available pre recording time is 6 1 Sec coca Figure 1 6 Pre Record Performance The amount of physical memory of the computer that the system is running on determines the pre recording performance Some options are grayed out if the computer does not have enough memory for the selections This table shows the maximum pre recording frame rate and the physical memory requirements of each setup Good Better Best Extra Maximum pre recording frames per camera fps 15 fps 30 fps 60 fps 90 fps RAM required 128 MB 256 MB 512 MB 768 MB Note The recording frame rate is based on a 320x240 recording size Pre Record Option per camera Determines the number of pre record frames Total Frames Specify the maximum pre recording frames of the system Page 11 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System E Frame Sec Limitation Specify the maximum pre recording frame rate fps of a camera Dividing the Total Fram
260. o can t be played back since the recording is still in process Object Index Search You can locate frames within selected cameras and a specific time frame 1 Click the ViewLog button and then select Search Object Index to display the following search window 2116 2002 To 2116 2002 Camera Cancel Figure 1 59 The Search Window 2 Specify a time frame and cameras and then click OK to start searching The following window will be called up Page 58 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Cam04 7 15 2004 10 00 10 30 1 loj E 3 711112004 ah Fn2 2004 F 13 2004 Moving Object List 10 00 27 140 10 02 33 667 X 03 00 10 02 47 750 100316671 10 04 47 015 100448515 100512796 10 05 20 703 a Es 12 00 E 12 30 10 06 23 531 10 06 41 265 10 06 42 406 10 06 45 250 10 07 11 359 l 4 Y F ha 10 0 27 765 10 0737 543 10 08 46 093 10 08 46 406 10 08 47 750 Search Exit Figure 1 60 The Moving Object List Window left and the Record List right The Record List The list contains the search results Double click a camera folder to display all found files Click one time segment file e g 10 00 to open its included frames in the Moving Object List window The Moving Object List window Frames Double click any frame in the window to play back its video file with the Viewlog or Quick Search player m gt Click the Next Page
261. ocal host to open it Note If you have created the E Map files for remote hosts these files will also be displayed in the E Map Viewer window but won t function here They only work on WebCam that is discussed later be 0x eMap 2 Paris Taiepi Local 1 Local 2 US A e K A NS 7s O A PN Ter A Y A Camera 2 Output 1 EN Tr r F A Wo iE EN EN T Camera 4 ns 62 gt iF a if x 7 r zr a A En N 1 Jal Wo Ja Camera 1 y E re L gt a RY Teal A Taal 2 Ta Input 1 Saia E Output 3 E i LE a ka Hj K oj tE ni i 1 a A S j 3 E Ez er Sy 19 Input 2 8 u Nge _ a 7 7 E Mal toi it Wt ei te 12 E ss Output 2 U al HR li oi Lo I ie a oi Jal Tt Test EJI EA 8 ae a i y Y i A yo Figure 7 4 The E Map Viewer Window The controls in the E Map Viewer window No Name Description 1 Popup Settings Selects desired cameras and l O devices for the pop up map function 2 Toggle Popup Toggles between popup and non popup function 3 Tree View The tree view of E Map files and folders 4 Flashing Icon The flashing icon represents a triggered camera or an I O device 5 Output Icon Manually forces an output device 6 Camera Dome Icon Views the live video associated with that camera dome Page 260 Chapter 7 E Map Application
262. oe ci eds 266 Stalin EM na A A alone as 266 The E M p Server VWWINGOW nasa Ae 266 Setina E Map SENE nan ia leds 267 Remote Monitoring via E Map Server oooonnccnnnccccccononccnnnncnnononnnncnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 267 Page 255 E Map displays the monitoring area on an electronic map by which the operator can easily locate the cameras sensors and alarms triggered by motion or I O devices Topics discussed in this chapter include creating an E Map file with E Map Editor working with E Map in the Main System working with E Map on the WebCam server and E Map Server The E Map Editor The E Map Editor program allows you to import a floor plan in BMP GIF and JPG formats and use the icons of cameras and I O devices to edit a map per your requirement The E Map Editor program comes with the installation of Main System Click the Windows Start menu point to Programs select GV folder and click EMap Editor The E Map Editor window will appear Page 256 Chapter 7 E Map Application The E Map Editor Window D 800 OG 9 a E Edi or Fil Edf Mdp Host Wie y lt x f New Map 6 New York El 2 Taiwan l Kaohsiung ik Taipei Camera 1 amp Input 1 Host View aaa x El 4 TESTIO1 Cameras ET 1 0 Devices FE Module 1 File Type DYR Figure 7 1 The E Map Editor Window The controls in the E Map Editor window No Name Description 1 Up Goes back to the previ
263. on W Focus change le View change Sensitivity 3 Delay Timefsec a M Invoke Alarm M Output Module W Live disable alarm Never Recycle Demo Focus change Play 4 Cancel Figure 1 83 Scene Change Detection Setup Camera Select the camera for setup Mask region Masks off the areas where motion will be ignored Focus change Sends an alert when the camera is out of focus View change Sends an alert when the camera has been moved or the lens of the camera has been covered Sensitivity Adjusts detection sensitivity The default value is 3 Delay Time s Sets the duration of Scene Change to record to System Log Invoke Alarm Activates the computer alarm when Scene Change is detected Click the button beside to assign a wav sound file Page 78 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Output Module Activates the output device when Scene Change is detected Click the button beside to assign the output module and pin number m Live disable alarm Choose whether to invoke the warning message when Scene Change is detected Click the button beside to display Figure 1 84 C Auto After confirmation the scene change detection will use the new current Manual scenario Delay Time s 5 Cancel Figure 1 84 Figure 1 85 If you select Auto there is no warning message if you select Manual the warning message Figure 1 85 will appear when Scene Change is detec
264. on WebCam in Chapter 6 E Map Server The E Map Server is an independent application designed to create E Maps for different DVRs and run without the GV System Installing E Map Server 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD to your computer It will run automatically and a window appears 2 Select the Install V8 1 0 0 System item Click E Map Server and then follow the on screen instructions The E Map Server Window Go to Windows Start point to Programs select eMapServer and then click E Map Server This window appears EER Figure 7 10 Page 266 Chapter 7 E Map Application The controls on the E Map Server window No Name Description 1 Start Service Starts the E Map Server 2 Stop Service Stops the E Map Server 3 New Creates a new E Map file 4 Rename Renames the E Map file 5 Delete Deletes the E Map file 6 Refresh Refreshes the E Map Server window 7 Accounts Creates user accounts of the E Map Server Setting E Map Server Before starting the E Map server you have to create e map files and user accounts 1 Click the New button No 3 Figure 7 10 to create e map s For details on creating an e map file see Creating an E Map File earlier in this chapter 2 Click the Accounts No 7 Figure 7 10 button to create a user account that will use the server Remote Monitoring via E Map Server Via E Map Server you can monitor different surveillance sites on electronic ma
265. on of Main System Go to the system folder and execute Desktop exe fo DM Active exe AE DMaT exe e DimMBackUps0D exe ES hesktop StringTablg El dmClp exe RR DMS00Startup exe aj DmHealthSwr exe al TE Figure 11 17 The following GV desktop screen will appear Page 352 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Figure 11 18 The controls in the GV desktop screen No Name Description 1 Programs Accesses programs 2 Settings Adds programs to the programs menu 3 Log Off Logs off GV desktop 4 Shut Down Shuts down the computer 5 Task Manager Click to view the tasks currently running on your computer GV desktop Features The five buttons on GV desktop are discussed below Programs Click the Programs button to see the program menu The default programs are Multicam Surveillance System Main System ViewLog Backup System Repair Database Utility Remote Playback Server and eMap Editor You can add or remove new programs to the menu For the example below Paint is a new program added to the menu e Multicam Surveillance System al Video Log H Backup System Al Repair DataBase Utility Bie Remote Playback Server be eMap Editor MM Paint aS 29 8 Figure 11 19 Page 353 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Settings Click the Settings button to display the following window A valid ID and password are required a tsi ID 1 Password Export Toker we Multicam Surveillance
266. on the function panel and then select Object Search to Video Process alarm display the following window Save Image Setup Option M Play All Events M Show Mask e Find and Stop Show Search Open View Log Figure 4 12 Object Search Page 154 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files 3 Inthe Video Process drop down list select Alarm 4 Click the Setup button for further settings The following window will appear A Option Sensitivity Search Speed Figure 4 13 5 Use the mouse to outline a region for motion detection You will be prompted to enter Alarm Region Keep detection Sensitivity and Search Speed as defaults or adjust them if needed 7 Click OK to finish the settings and close the window In the Option section you have several options Play All Events Plays back the video segments found as a continuous series of images Show Mask Shows masks on the detection regions Find and Stop recommended Pauses the search process when motion is detected 9 Inthe control panel click the Search button for the search 10 When any video segment matches the search criteria of motion detection the Show button will be available Click Show to display the Event List window Show Small Picture alarm NERO aa COn ra aga Event20051209164053001 Avi p Je 1219 2005 16 41 01 968 TA 0 e 12 9 2005 16 41 06 671 Log 12 9 2005 16 41 11 437 e 1219 2005 16 41 16 375 Be 1219 2
267. onancnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononncnnos 110 Detectihd INDUT State aan id ici 111 VO Enable SENNO iia a 112 Advanced WO Pane lesinn a aa aaa a 113 Advanced FO PaN einean eana E O EE 113 TheAdyanced FO Panel a a vin a naaneiniiradennecadas 113 Creating a Group for Cascade Triggel Sinnani a a a 114 Gontiguring the Advanced VO Pane kerries ea n len 117 Setting Wo Mode SChed lE meara a 118 A eea O E S 120 Forcing OPI E E cee Aen eee 120 EANG BACKGrOUNG Magersari AAA An Ae ae 121 System Wide TOQUES testi aid aiii 121 The Advanced Logical Input Status in Mutlicam OptiON ooooncccnnnccnnnnnonnccnnncconnnancnonnncnnnnnanos 122 Managing Group OF VO DECESO nee a eee el 123 Visual AUTO MA OM sscssscisveessandvacsceieecteandesccansedeccanesissadtonicseccacassacccanssidsn0iwaasantssecuawensecnicocsetacneesainenex 124 Setting Up Visual AUtO Matin css ot 124 Using Visual AUtOMAtiON cccccccoonncnnnononnnnncnononncnnonononnnnnonononnnnnnnonnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnrnnnrnnnnnnnaraness 125 Virtual VO CONFON Gionin E aE Ea a E a aa 126 vi Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS ApplicatioOnN cooccconccconcconccoonnronanoza 120 POS System CONNCGCHUOMN acia aii 128 POS Dale SOM el rate el ees aa ohn a ied ea ates esas 129 SETING a POS SYSTEM pa a aa 130 Superimposing POS Data onto Camera creeN cccooonncnnnnconcccnonccannncnnncnnnannnncnrrrnnnnnannnnrrrrrenananans 131 POS Held Filter o e ed te rt 133 Abnormal Transaction Aleris oi
268. onnect to Remote Viewlog Service 2 IP Address 5952 Default CT Password Save Password Host Type Add current entry to Address book under this group Address book Connect Cancel Figure 4 28 2 Enter the IP Address ID and Password of the remote GV System Keep the default port as 5552 or modify it if necessary 3 Inthe Host Type select DVR 4 Click the Connect button When the connection is established you will see the ViewLog appears on your screen Then you can use all ViewLog features for playback Page 167 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Viewing Connection Status You can view connection status of each camera and disable certain camera connections when the Internet is overloaded On the function panel click the Setting button No 14 Figure 4 2 and then click the Mulit View tab This dialog box appears System Configuration Quad view Play Setting Display Database Cache Mutti View To Be Activated in a Multi views Host Mame Camera Mame IPC 1 IPC IPC 1 IPC 1 Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Local Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Y Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Disconnect e Auto retry when connection has broken Interval 10 seconds Cancel Figure 4 29 Host Name column Indicates the host name of a remote camera Unch
269. ons Page 282 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 The Center V2 Window After the installation start the application from the Windows Start menu The following monitoring window will appear No images will appear until you add and connect to subscribers 1 TPE Camer FIA TPE Camer FIX TPE Camer 4 a FIR IPE ee TPE Camer FIR Se ed 5 112 348 ENTE a A a x A A y 3 q i a f Wi de Camer me TPE FIX TPE Camer Camer P Ur A X JP Camera 5f x DA Ver as Bi 2 e atl Camera 7 OJP Camera 8 aaf IP T amera ih 50 JP Camera XK JP Camera TKJP Camera fX a A a B a SS l ae ua Pda 10 ia BRS Oy 1 Message 14 Mam Camera 1 Scene Change as 28416 P 1115 eo 1 pr na Alarm Camera 1 Scene Change Y Alarm Camera 1 Scene Change 28 5 11152006 1 20 59 PM System Stop Service 11 15 2006 gt 43 Up 8 System Start Service 11 15 2006 2 44 18 PM LoginLogom Login 11 19 2006 2 44 35 PM System start Monitoring All Type Events 111192006 244525 PM 11152006 2 44 34 PM System Start 0 Monitoring 11152006 2 44 35 PM 11152006 2 44 35 PM System Status change of monitoring cameras Ore 1 Off 2 16 11152006 2 44 35 PM 11 15 2006 2 44 35 PM Triggers Module 41 ingu 1 Trigger 111572006 2 44 35 PM 11152006 2 44 35 PM Trigger Video of Camera 1 By Module 4 inpia 1 11152006 2 44 35 PM 11152006 2 44 35 PM Attachment Record tile of Camera 1 Live
270. ontrol 4 PTZ Device Setup Senzormatic Lltra Iw ue Figure 1 67 3 Click to display the Sensormatic Setup window Sensormatic Setup i x r Setup Com Port com v Baud Rate 4800 v PT Speed f w Y Activate C Normal Figure 1 68 Page 66 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 4 Enter Com Port Baud Rate and PT Speed of the PTZ camera 5 Check the Activate item and select Object Tracking Only 6 Click OK to apply the settings Object Tracking Setup After the above PTZ setup go back to the menu bar Click the Configure button point to Object Tracking Application and click Object Tracking Setup to display the following window The left screen is the PTZ camera view and the right screen is the stationary camera view Object Tracking Contig Object Tracking Zoom In Object PTZ Selection Ren Camera 2 Fixed Camera Selection Camera 1 Setup C Zoom In Object 10 Live tuning Tilt 159 selection Par Object Tracking Track Time sec Zoom 290 a o Sensitivity q ETA j Define Detect Regi Cancel Figure 1 69 PTZ Selection m Click to set up the PTZ m Camera Click the drop down menu to choose the corresponding camera screen of the PTZ Fixed Camera Selection Click the drop down menu to choose the corresponding camera screen of the stationary camera Setup Pan Tilt and Zoom Use the slide bars to adjust
271. oot System Enables the setup for reboot time Specify how often from 1 to 14 days at the Day Interval selection field and when the Windows should reboot at the Reboot Time Restore Last Status The system will resume the last operation after rebooting e g camera recording Apply Startup Settings The system will apply your Startup settings in the System Configure window after rebooting Delay for Cancel Reboot When the item is checked a warning message will appear and count down your specified time before the reboot schedule begins Clicking the Cancel button on the prompt will cancel the rebooting WatchDog Reset if Reboot System Suspend and Fail Prior to Reboot Time if GV System finds any abnormal Windows operation that may hinder the Auto Reboot GV System will instruct a hardware reboot of Windows The feature is available only in GV 600 GV 650 GV 800 GV 900 GV 1000 GV 1120 GV 1240 and GV 1480 Note GV System must already be added to Windows Startup menu only so will the Windows automatically restart GV System after a reboot Also make sure you ve correctly connected a GV video capture card to your motherboard for the hardware watchdog feature Page 24 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Logging System Activities into System Log GV System can monitor security events by recording the login and logout of system resources No events will be recorded to the System Log until you activate the desired event
272. ord Confirmation and a Hint optional that would remind you of the password Messages entered at the Hint field will only pop up when passwords are entered incorrectly m Auto Login Allows auto login as the current user every time when the system is launched For security purposes this feature is only recommended for single user systems E Allow removing password System For this setting see Setting Up Password later in this chapter E m s Click to open the onscreen keyboard and enter the login information After setting up the Supervisor ID and Password launch the program to enter the Main System Page 4 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System GV 800 PSS VNR VEEN 123 45 6 7 8 910 111213141516 Figure 1 2 The controls in the main screen No Name 14 15 16 17 18 19 Camera Number Camera Name Date Time Storage Space Connection PTZ Control I O Control TV Out User Defined Location Name Network Camera Scan ViewLog Configure Schedule Monitor Camera Select Screen Division Exit Description Indicates the camera number matching the port number in the GV video capture card Indicates the given camera name Displays the current date and time Indicates the remaining disk space Indicates the connection status of remote applications Displays the PTZ control panel Displays the I O control panel Displays the TV Quad control panel Accesses other
273. ord System option is not checked the loss of passwords will require the reinstallation of Windows and the reset of passwords Page 33 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Changing password when logging in the GV System 1 When you log in the GV System click the Change Password button in the Login dialog box The Change Password dialog box appears Change Password ID taipei Password iw New Password Mew Password Confirmation Password We Mew Hint Forgot Password ES area code Change Password a Cancel E Cancel Figure 1 33 2 Type the new password information and click OK to save the changes Note If the user is not given the right to change password the message Change Password Hint False appears Sending Alerts thru E mail Accounts You can send E mail alerts with attached images when events occur The events triggering the E mail alerts include Motion Detection I O Trigger Scene Change Intruder Event Missing Object Unattended Object POS Loss Prevention and etc You may first set up your server to handle the sending of alerts Follow these steps to set up an E mail account 1 Click the Configure button and then select E Mail Setup This brings up the following dialog box Page 34 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Mail Setup SMTP Server Jgeovisioncomtw corm ty Text Content E Mail From E Mail To gectaipei geovision comtw com tw Charset Western Euro
274. ou should enter is N4GN Word verification is not case sensitive DynamicDNS Register Username Username Dinamicdns Username is 16 character maximum Pass ate eer username may not start with spaces or minus signs 3 Username will be your Re type Password IS Password The password is case sensitive Enter the characters as they are shown in the Word erification box below M4GN This step helps us prevent automated registrations Figure 11 1 Click the Send button and the system will display the following message if the registration is completed successfully Username dynarmcdns Hostname dynarmcdns dipmap com IP Address 418 160 63 7 Your hostname will be activated in 4 minutes Your hostname will be deleted you don t update your host address for 30 days Figure 11 2 Page 339 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Username The username you registered In this example the username is dynamicdns Hostname The hostname you created Hostname is made by registered username and dipmap com In this example the host name is http dynamicdns dipmap com This will be the domain name you use for login to GV System IP Address Your GV System s current IP address This IP address will be updated every 10 minutes In the DNS Client dialog box enter the registered username and password and then press the Save button The system will show the connection infor
275. ou are not sure what to enter for this field Enter a valid user ID and password and then click the Login button Video stream should appear when connection succeeds as shown Ta MultiCam Remote Yiewer 5 2 Connect My Favorite View BrowseLog Preference Help O a R S a Gonnet My Reworite Stop zoomi zoom Gut Lock Preferences Figure 8 3 Functions of toolbar buttons are listed in following table Button Description Connect Selects modem dial up or TCP IP connection My Favorite Adds to My Favorite Stop Terminates network connection Zoom In Enlarges video Zoom Out Shrinks video Lock Locks a particular camera Preferences Brings up the preferences setting window Page 271 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications Working with My Favorite My Favorite provides for fast access to pre set connection to main system Several settings are available for this feature To add a connection to My Favorite 1 Click My Favorite button from menu bar 2 Select Add to My Favorite from the menu The Add to My Favorite dialog box appears Add to My Favorite IP Address TOCPAP Server 192 168 0 187 Port 3550 Login ID Richard Password a Tithe Marne Figure 8 4 3 Enter the proper information and give a name to the new connection and then click OK To edit My Favorite 1 To change information in My Favorite click My Favorite button from menu bar Select Edit My Favorite from menu Select a connec
276. ou can also specify the pulse duration for pulse type signals Keep Last Toggle Status See Keeping Last Toggle Status later in this chapter Note PTZ camera and I O devices cannot be assigned to the same port at the same time Latch Trigger Instead of constant output alarm in N O and N C the Latch Trigger option provides a momentary alarm and allows you to set the alarm duration Setting up Latch Trigger On the main screen click the Configure button point to System Configure click the I O Device tab and then check Latch Trigger See the red square in this dialog box System Configure A x General Setting Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 O0 Device HotLine Network Select 0 Device M input 4 Device GV NET IO Card z Format Addi m Name f Signal Type ge Port eom y Add fou Input 4 ED CNE M e Monitor Input Address 1 Remove Hodiy W Rec opa E 30 Sec Camera M Inoke Alarm 0 Aa el Address IY Invoke to Send Alerts 1 GVNETAOCad Y Output Module Mod 3 7 Pin DI IW Register Input Event Output 1 a TS ForPTZ Hame Output Force Output Signal Type C N D C N4D Toggle i gt MAC C N C Togale pl A NIC lo iz Bec Cancel Figure 2 4 Page 104 Chapter 2 I O Applications Application Example In the above scenario Input 4 is set to N O and Latch Trigger as well When Input 4 i
277. ound color of the channel heading will be in the color you selected Page 289 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Channel Headin AA Figure 9 7 Creating a Subscriber Schedule The Center V2 operator can create schedules to monitor subscription status When subscribers don t log in Center V2 on the programmed time the operator and subscribers will get notified e When a subscriber doesn t log in Center V2 on time this message will appear on the Event List Subscriber session is not established Wait Time expired When a subscriber logs out suddenly during a service time this message will appear Unexpected logout before subscriber session is completed e To activate the computer and output alarm to notify the operator while a SMS and E mail message being sent out to a subscriber use the Notification feature For details see Notification Settings later in this chapter To set up a schedule 1 On the Center V2 window click the Accounts button No 12 Figure 9 1 to display the Address Book window 2 Highlight one subscriber and click the Subscriber Schedule No 8 Figure 9 2 to display the Schedule window Page 290 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 amp Schedule Plan Schedule E Plan 1 E Plan 2 Figure 9 8 On the Schedule window menu click Schedule select Setup Wizard and follow the Wizard instructions When the following dialog box appears during the instructions dra
278. ount 69 98 MB 83 Files 6 Object Index Information Path Empty Size and Count 0 Bytes O Files Viewlog Information Path Empty 8 Figure 11 39 Page 369 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities The controls on the MediaMan window No Name 1 Refresh 2 Copy ViewLog 3 Disk List 4 Disk Properties 5 DVR Event Info 6 MDB Info 7 Object Index Info 8 ViewLog Info Description Updates all data information on the window Selects a hard drive to copy ViewLog files Selects a disk Indicates disk information In Media Type two messages may appear e LAN indicates a hard drive is connected e Local indicates a local hard drive is connected In Status three messages may appear e Standby indicates the hard drive already specified as the recording path e Unused indicates the hard drive not specified as the recording path e Recording indicates the files are being recorded to the disk Indicates the path size and number of recorded events the dates of the oldest and latest events Indicates the path size and number of System Log files Indicates the path size and number of Object Index files Indicates the location you have backed up the EZ ViewLog player Note The DVR Event Info updates every one minute The MDB Info Object Index Info and ViewLog Info update as data changes Adding a Disk Drive 1 Run MediaManTools exe 2 Insert a hot swap hard drive or plug a portable hard driv
279. ous E Map file 2 Add Map Adds an E Map file 3 Add Host Adds a host folder of DVR and or GV Video Server 4 Load Map Imports a floor plan 5 Rename Renames an E Map file and or folder 6 Delete Deletes an E Map file and or folder 7 Map View Tree view of E Map files and or folders 8 Host View Tree view of host folders 9 Floor Plan The window displays the imported graphic file Page 257 Chapter 7 E Map Application Creating an E Map File To create and edit an E Map file follow the steps below 1 Click the Add Map button No 2 Figure 7 1 on the toolbar A New Map file will be created in Map View and the Floor Plan window separately as illustrated below E Map Editor F New Map Figure 7 2 Creating a new map 2 Click the New Map file in Map View and then click the Load Map button No 4 Figure 7 1 to import a graphic file The file will open in the Floor Plan window Figure 7 1 3 Double click the local server folder in Host View The program will automatically detect the number of cameras and I O devices already installed at the server and show up their separate icons Drag and drop these icons from Host View onto the map in the Floor Plan window The E Map Editor lets you set the orientation of camera icons and change the icons Right click any camera icon to call up a menu and select the direction where you want the camera points to Or change the camera icon into the dome icon 6 Click File in
280. ouse to outline an object in the right screen and observe if it is magnified in the left screen clearly If not use the Live Tuning buttons to adjust directions and the desired level of zooming Click OK in the lower of the window to save your settings of the tracking time the idle time for Zooming in objects and the testing results Starting Object Tracking After the above settings you can start the object tracking application Click the Configure button point to Object Tracking Application and then click Object Tracking Start to start the function Zooming in Objects While the PTZ is being applied for tracking you can still control it to Zoom in any desired area by launching the Zoom in Dialog window Click the Configure button point to Object Tracking Application and then click Object Tracking View to launch the Zoom in Dialog window overlapping in the main screen as shown below Note The Zoom In Dialog window is for the stationary camera view and the main screen is for the PTZ view Page 70 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Selection Loom in Type Fined Camera Figure 1 75 The outlined area in the Dialog window is magnified in the main screen In the Zoom In Type field select Fixed Camera In the Camera field select the assigned camera screen for the stationary camera 4 Use the mouse to outline a desired area in the Dialog window It will be magnified in the main scree
281. ove Configuring WebCam Server GV System is built in with a web sever Click the Network button and then select WebCam Server to display the following Server Setup dialog box WebCam Server Settings The Server Setup dialog box contains these tabs 1 General 2 Server 3 Video 4 RPB 5 Audio 6 JPG 7 3GPP and 8 Mobile Page 197 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam General 22 Server Setup Audio JPG sopp Mobile General Server Video RFB WebCam Options Enhance network security 2 Enable IP white list W Enable Remote Control Frame Page Title Color f Mone C Black Cancel Detaut Figure 6 1 Server Setup General WebCam Options Enhance network security Check this item to enhance network security on WebCam Please note when the feature is enabled the users using earlier version than 8 0 cannot access WebCam applications any more Enable IP White List Create a list of IP addresses allowed to connect to WebCam For details see I P White List Settings later in this chapter Enable Remote Control Check this item to use Remote Configuration and Enable Disable I O functions on WebCam Run Viewlog Server Check this item to enable the Remote ViewLog Service See Remote ViewLog on WebCam later in this chapter Frame Page Title Color Select the color of date time and camera stamps on the frame Page 198 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Serv
282. ow Check the Send SMS Alerts item This sends SMS to subscribers automatically when set alert conditions occur For details see Notification Settings earlier in this chapter E Mail Alerts You can send e mails to subscribers when alert conditions occur Setting Mailbox Before you can send e mails to a separate e mail account you need to define your mailbox correctly To setup the mailbox On the Center V2 window click the Preference Settings button No 10 Figure 9 1 and then select E Mail Setup This dialog box appears Page 317 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 HAS P Mail Setup setup Tesi Charset Western European Windows E MailTo geo tai geavision cam tw E Mail From geo geovision com tw f subject Test SMTP Server geovision corm tw Wail Content allt Test Mail Test SMTP Server requires authenitication Account ID 123 Password oeeee Alen Setup E Mail Alert Interval 10 hin Figure 9 36 In the Charset field select the set of characters and symbols that the e mail uses In the E Mail From field enter your e mail address In the SMTP Server field enter the outgoing server address If your e mail service provider requires authentication for sending e mails check SMTP Server requires authentication and define the account ID and password of your SMTP If you want to set time intervals between each e mail message when alert occurs in the Alert Setup field s
283. ow Figure11 20 appears select Windows in the Desktop Type field and then exit from the window Click the Log Off button to log off the GV desktop and enter the Windows desktop The token code and file are also required here Page 356 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Authentication Server The Authentication Server allows a remote server to restrict access to the password settings of local GV Systems When the Sever is working the previous password settings in local GV Systems will be invalid Local GV Systems will submit to the full control of the Server Installing the Server To install this application in a remote sever follow these steps 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD It will run automatically and a window appears 2 Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item 3 Click Authentication Server and follow the on screen instructions The Server Window Go to Windows Start point to Programs select AuthServer and then click AuthServer This window appears DWR List Ey London Ed Mew York 4 Taipei Ei z el TEST27 Client Mame TEST27 Client IF 127 0 0 1 Client Tel Client FAR Client Address 13 Login Time 1 462005 6 77 53 PM Status Client 114 Figure 11 25 The Authentication Server Window Page 357 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities The controls in this window No Button 1 Exit 2 Log 3 Password Setup 4 Server Setup 5 Start Stop Service 6 Find A Client
284. pean Vvinciow Western European Vvinciow Mindo e Subject Notice trom TESTIO MP Attach Image Setup E Mail Alerts Setup I Attach fea y fisoxizo x fi Pie b eile po Min Option iv Auto Modem dial up when not connect Bee aS Min to internet E w SMTP Mail Server requires authentication SMTP Server SMTP Port 25 ACCOUNT qeovision Domain name from CONS Password RRRAR C O T men Figure 1 34 2 Inthe Mail Setup section set up following fields SMTP Sever Enter your mail server name E Mail From Enter the reply E mail address optional E Mail To Enter the E mail address you want to send alerts to Charset Select the character set to be used when sending mail via the system Subject Enter a subject that would come with the alert message 3 You have the option to attach an image with the alert when sending mail Click to enable the option Select image format from the drop down list and the image size 4 Inthe Pic Field enter how many snapshots max 6 you wish to receive in an event Press the Arrow button if you wish to tag the snapshot with Time Date Camera number and Location name Select Transparent makes the tag background transparent and Color Box is for you to choose your text color 6 Click the Test Mail Account button to test if E mail function is working correctly You may click OK here or go on to set up with following options Email Alerts Setup The GV System can conti
285. possible to view images using a web browser at a client PC or from a remote site Microsoft Internet Explorer will be used as the browser through the entire chapter 1 To start the connection open an IE browser 2 Type the IP address or the domain name of the GV System to display the following window Compression Selection f Mpeg4 Encoder Viewer f JPEG Image Viewer Eh Tmp o Remote Play Back ViewLog Co Emap o POS Live View Figure 6 16 WebCam Compression Selection E MPEG4 Encoder Viewer Provides the most complete functionality of the WebCam applications allowing you to view up to sixteen cameras from different GV Systems m JPEG Image Viewer Provides least features but is suitable for the users with limited bandwidth for example users viewing with Apple Mac and operating systems using Netscape Navigator Remote Play Back ViewLog Downloads history files from the GV System onto the client PC There are two choices of video players Remote Playback and ViewLog Emap Accesses the Emap files Remote Control Accesses the GV System settings 3 Inthis example select MPEG 4 Encoder and then click the Submit button to display the following window Page 211 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Select Internet Connection MODEM OSL CABLE T 1 1 Window C 2 Windows C Multi view 1024768 C 129081024 C 1600 1200 C 16901050 C 1920 1200 MH e Figure 6 17 Select Internet Connec
286. press the Delete key on the keyboard Page 49 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Special Days Schedule 1 Click the Special Day Schedule tab 2 All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule except the following section Click the drop down list and select a date from the pop up calendar Click Apply to add the date to the schedule Figure 1 48 I O Schedule Set up a schedule to activate the monitoring of I O devices automatically All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule except the following section After setting up scheduled time and dates select the I O Monitor option to activate the schedule Stan e 110 Monitor Figure 1 49 Center V2 Schedule Set up a schedule to connect to Center V2 services automatically All settings are the same as those in Video Schedule except the following section After setting up scheduled time and dates select the Center V2 option to activate the schedule For details on Center V2 see Chapter 9 Start M Center Figure 1 50 Page 50 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System PTZ Control Panel PTZ control panel is used to control PTZ camera operations camera presets and magnification functions This control panel will not appear unless at least one PTZ camera is connected to the system Follow these steps to add PTZ cameras to the system 1 Click Configure button and select System Configure 2 Inthe PTZ Control section select PTZ Device Se
287. proach item to enable other options 4 Specify the Interval of two sent out messages The Interval time can be set up to 1440 minutes Any alert condition will be ignored by the system during the interval Page 334 Chapter 10 Short Message Service 5 Click the Account Setting button to display the following window Connection Setup Mobile Setup Connection Server IP geoken dipmap com Local Server Port 5886 Default Remote Login ID joycechang Password ies Figure 10 11 SMS Setup Connection Setup Server IP Enter the IP address of the SMS Server Server Port Enter the server port of the SMS Server or keep it as default Login ID amp Password Enter a valid ID and password registered in the SMS Server Figure 10 7 W Local Ifthe GSM GPRS modem is installed at the same server with the GV System select this item E Remote Ifthe GSM GPRS modem is installed at a separate server select this item Click OK to apply above settings 7 Click the Test Account button Figure 10 10 If the connection of both devices is established the message will appear Login SMS Server OK f the connection fails the message will appear Connect to SMS Server Fail Page 335 Chapter 10 Short Message Service Setting Mobile Numbers The Main System allows you to configure three mobile phone numbers for the SMS service When an alert condition happens the SMS messages will be sent out to the three assi
288. ps Page 26 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Camera Motion Invoke Choose which camera you wish to have auto pop up on motion triggered event Use the Mask Filter function in camera settings Figure 1 8 to adjust the area of activation E Input invoke Use this function to have an I O device trigger the auto pop up Different Text Alignment for Each Channel You can align text overlay photo overlay and camera time stamps to different positions for each channel In addition you can even change the alignment of text and photograph while the monitoring of POS or access control keeps on To access this feature click the Configure button select Text Overlay Setting to display the Text Overlay Setting dialog box and click one Camera tab to define various alignments For details on the text overlay settings see Superimposing POS Data onto Camera Screen in Chapter 3 Text Overlay Setting Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera Camera Camera E Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 POS 7 Weigand Overlay Object Camera Time Text EA Text I Photograph i Print on video file Print text on video file Il pr on screen with Aj i W Frinton screen photograph ignmer W Print on POS Live View M Print on POS Live view il El o Alignment Alignment a Jl Elle Set Font 5 W Apply Stereo Font El BE E W Enabl
289. ps from any computer accessible to Internet 1 Open the web browser and type the address of the E Map server 2 After entering the valid user name and password for login you will be prompted to select the desired e map file emp file Click OK The Remote E Map window appears Click the Login button No 1 Figure 7 5 to select the desired host s to access it videos and I O devices Note The host DVR needs to give the access privilege by enabling the WebCam Server Page 267 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications 269 Hemote VIW oaaae anaie aaa aa aAa a E innata lina lana dude lana E AA E AAA AA Aa iaa 269 Seting UB Remote VIEW sieo a tee 269 Working with My Favorite ooonccccconccncoconcncononcnnncnncnnocnncnnononcnnononrnnnnnannnnnnnnrnnonanrnnnnanrnnnnns 272 Camera Zoom FUNCION o o 273 Playing with Screen View Window FUNC HIONS oocccccnncccccccoonccnnnnccnnnnnoncconnncnnnnannnnnnnnononenans 273 Playing Back Video Files INQ VIEW ssic2 c0 2e5250crsssexcanceseeesesoacqacenaganadsseeeeceeaioeeqcee Etar Esaa 274 Preference Settings ccccccccocoonnccnnnncnccnnonncnnnnnnnnononncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 274 Remote PTZ and VO FUN O O 275 FUSO een WIG Wo Aa 277 O 277 Setting Up IP Multicast cooccccooconnccnnnccoconoonnncnnnnnonononcnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnananennnnns 278 Staring IP Ma o 278 Page 268 The system is supplied with two re
290. ption m Image Size Sets the video size from the subscriber The following chart tells how the image size set at the subscriber corresponds to different settings at Center V2 For example if Center V2 wants to receive 720 X 240 image the subscriber must set the video resolution to 720 x 480 or 720 x 240 coer eao x aao e40 x240 3201200720480 720x240 720x87 320 x 240 320 x 240 320 x 240 360 x 240 360 x 240 360 x 288 Middle 640 x 240 640 x 240 320 x 240 720 x 240 720 x 240 720 x 288 640 x 480 640 x 240 320 x 240 720 x 480 720 x 240 720 x 576 Auto Record Video Center V2 automatically records events based on the following Record Mode Record Mode m Live Mode Streams live video to Center V2 Make sure you have enough bandwidth to receive video in live To set the maximum time of a video clip to be sent to Center V2 click the Settings button The more the set minutes the bigger the file size and therefore more time is required to send the file over Internet Page 287 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Attachment Mode A defined time of event will be recorded before sending to Center V2 The attachment will be sent out immediately once your subscriber is connected to Center V2 The Attachment Mode also provides several options associated with the attachment Click the Settings button to bring up the Record Settings Attachment Mode dialog box See Attachment Mode Settings b
291. r 1 Configuring Main System DSP Spot Monitor Controller The Controller integrates the GV DSP Card with spot monitor TV monitor applications It allows screen divisions on the spot monitor differently from the main screen With the Controller you can also define the channel sequence of the display screen and adjust video images on the spot monitor Note The GV DSP 100 Card doesn t support this feature Spot Monitor Controller To open the Spot Monitor Controller follow these steps 1 Click the Configure button point to DSP Spot Monitor and then select Spot Monitor Setup This dialog box appears Spot Monitor Setup X M Use DSP as Spot Monitor at next Startup ones 0 Figure 1 89 2 Check Use DSP as Spot Monitor at next Startup and click OK 3 Restart the GV System 4 Click the Configure button point to DSP Spot Monitor and then select Spot Monitor Controller The Spot Monitor Control window appears Note When the DSP Spot Monitor Control feature is enabled DSP Overlay will be disabled in the Main System Page 82 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Advanced Layout Spot Monitor Controller Advanced Layout Video Setting DW C Bly 4 cos Figure 1 90 Spot Monitor Controller m DIV 1 16 Screen division option You can modify the channel sequence by typing the number directly on each division Click Apply or OK to apply your settings Right Arrow button Sets the chann
292. r can activate another trigger For example you might have a group called Entrance that contains all I O devices installed at entrances The Entrance group might contain other sub groups each of which contains just the related I O devices in various geographic locations d ES Group containing all I O devices installed at entrances Es Input Input 2 installed at the front entrance 2 18 Output Output 1 sub group at the kitchen 8 Output 2 Outputs Output 3 sub group at the garage Figure 2 14 When Input 2 is triggered it will trigger the sub groups of Output 1 and Output 3 and Output 1 will trigger Output 2 in a cascade series Creating a Group 1 Right click on Advanced I O List and then select Add A Group This dialog box appears Group Information E S Group Mame Cancel Host 1 Group Motity Setting M Invoke Alarm Buzzer lt a e Enable advanced logical inputin Multicam Figure 2 15 Group Name Names the group Invoke Alarm Invokes the computer alarm on I O trigger Select a sound from the drop down list m Enable advanced logical input in Multicam See Setting Advanced Logical Input Status later in this chapter 2 Click Save to apply the settings and return to the panel 3 To create a cascading hierarchy drag the desired inputs outputs from the left Standard I O List to the group Note In the cascading hierarchy each input can only be
293. r filters the transaction conditions based on your criteria and displays the results under the created column To set up the function follow these steps 1 2 Click the Configure button point to POS Application Setting and then select POS Field Filter The following window appears POS Capture Data Setting POS 1 e Plew Delete li coat Lose Prevention Se Ting Figure 3 5 POS Capture Data Setting Click the New button The following dialog box appears Page 133 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application 3 4 Caption Data Setting x key Yord Coke Capture Data Type With Comma fe g 1 000 le With Decimal Sign A MOB File Entry Mame Coke can Figure 3 6 Setting search criteria Key Word Enter a meaningful keyword that matches exactly one of transaction items texts in the receipt The field is case sensitive Suppose we enter Coke Every text matching to Coke will be screened out Capture Data Type Select the type of data followed by the specified transaction item text Numeric Currency or Alphabetic If the specified transaction item text is followed by a price amount choose Numeric or Currency If it is followed by alphabets choose Alphabetic m With Comma if there are commas in a price amount check the option With Decimal Sign If there are decimal signs in a price amount check the option With Space The option is onl
294. r plan For this application subscribers must already create their own E Maps using the E Map Editor and activate WebCam Server To configure E Map alert at the Center V2 right click one online subscriber on the Subscriber List No 4 Figure 9 1 and select E Map For details on E Map see E Map Application Chapter 7 on the Surveillance System Software CD Alarm Report For every event the Center V2 operator can generate a report to evaluate certain conditions Creating an Alarm Report 1 Inthe Event List window select an event and click on the report column This dialog box appears Page 319 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Managing Alarm 2006101 7 000024 Subscriber ID 2 Message Time 104072006 2 27 43 PM Message Record file of Camera 3 Live Procedure Report Time Real Time Figure 9 37 In the Reporter field type the name and click Start to begin the report There are 6 report categories Click the desired category tabs for report Event Type Selecta type to classify the event Description Select a description for the event Notification Select the authority being notified and enter the notified time Arrival The button becomes available after you select a notified authority Enter the arrival time of the authority Measures Select the measure taken to deal with the event Other The button is available only when the e mail and or SMS alert are configured 4 When you f
295. r the alarm is finished click the right arrow button and uncheck Latch Trigger Then the camera view will keep remaining on the monitoring window for the specified time For example the alarm is triggered for 5 minutes and you set 10 minutes which means the total display time will be 15 minutes Camera send by Wiegand capture device will monitor Specifies the duration of the camera view remaining on the monitoring window when the access control system connected to GV Video Server is triggered For details see Chapter 8 CMS Configurations in the GV Video Server User s Manual EH Image Quality Adjusts the video quality Moving the slide bar to the right side for the better quality and the bigger image size E Enable Direcdraw Enables an enhanced image performance for live video Start up Auto Run when Windows Starts Automatically runs Center V2 when Windows starts E Login SMS Server when Start Service Automatically logs in SMS Server when Center V2 starts You will be prompted to enter the IP address Port ID and Password of the SMS server Channel Caption E Fontand Color Click the Settings button to change the font and color of the captions Use the subscriber setting color as background Checks the option to apply the caption settings For details see Changing the Color of Channel Heading earlier in this chapter Layout This function transfers the Event List window to a separate computer while the monitori
296. r you want to place the POS Live View windows as your previous arrangement click the Live View Menu button point to Arrange Views and select Custom View POS Color Text You can use different colors and time periods to identify any desired transaction items When the transaction item is identified the feature can trigger the alarm and send out the alert message The identification is recorded in the System Log for later retrieval as well For example if the liquor is prohibited from being sold in the midnight a seller can use this feature to prevent from any unintentional sale Setting Up POS Color Text 1 Onthe main screen click the Configure button point to POS Application Setting and select POS Filed Filter Setup The POS Capture Data Setting dialog box Figure 3 5 appears 2 Click New This dialog box appears Color Keyword Setting Key Word liquor Calor ee jw only work between 23 00 a 00 00 n cane Figure 3 12 Key Word Type the text to be identified in the transaction data The keyword setting is case sensitive Color Specify a color to identify the defined text Page 139 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application only work between Specify the time period to identify the defined text in the transaction data Prevention Setting button in the POS Capture Data Setting dialog box Figure 3 5 box appears liquor Loss Prevention Setting e Enable Alarm e Alarm Output
297. rames In this case disable the function from the Get Data List button Searching Object Index You can locate and play back the Object Index files through the WebCam RPB For the details of Object Index see Retrieving Images Using Object Index in Chapter 1 1 Click the Get Data List button and then select Search Object Index This window appears CAMERA 1 2005 02 03 08 00 08 30 CAMERA 1 Ay 2005 02 02 E 2005 02 03 08 10 03 968 08 10 15 840 Search Figure 6 43 The Search Object Index Window 2 Click the Search button The Search window appears 3 Select the desired cameras and then click Search The found files will display in the left side of the Search Object Index window Expand the files to access the thumbnail view Double click one displayed image The related video will play on the RPB Page 236 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Advanced Search The advanced search function in the WebCam RPB lets you easily locate an event by search criteria The search results can be displayed in a text form and or a statistic chart Click the Get Data List button and select Advance Search to open the following advanced search window ix Data Query Display Set Font ID Start Time End Time CAMERA I Kant find record Figure 6 44 Advanced Search Display This option on the menu bar lets you choose which way to display search results a text form or a statisti
298. rd f E Hint i Level E J User cannot change password Force Password change at next logon F Disable userifdo notlogin after day 5 Exportthis ID for I Remote Control 6v Kkeyboard Login this ID automatically Single user mode Restore Recoverable video Esmera Eventllog cs Ol Mil oi gf 13 IY 2h 6h 10h 14 IY ah 711 15 IY 4 of 12M 16 Control Center Multican Multicast Remote ets Webcam New Remove Search Remote Playback Fast Backup amp Restore iY Allow removing password system Cancel Figure 1 82 Note If you open the event files avi directly from local disks the valid ID and password are also required to access the block out areas For more information on retrieving the block out areas in the exported files see Exporting Privacy Mask in Chapter 4 Page 77 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Scene Change Detection The Scene Change Detection can detect when a camera has been tampered physically This feature can generate an alert whenever someone or something has covered the lens of the camera or when the camera has been moved or when it is out of focus 1 Click the Configure button and then select Scene Change Detection Setup The Scene Change Detection Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the desired cameras for setup and then click the Configure tab This dialog box appears Scene Change Detection Setup y Camera Gar E Camera 1 a Mask regi
299. re PC and then to re build paths for the files recorded by GV System Note 1 2 The repair and the search function will not apply to the files that have been renamed manually Use this Utility if encountering any of the following scenarios in ViewLog 1 Aquestion mark appears right before a video file in the Video Event list 2 When you click the Playback button no video is displayed even a file is selected Page 194 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 197 Configuring WebCam ServVer ooonccccccoocccccccoccnncccocconcnnnnnnnnononnnnnonancnnnonanrnnnononcnncnnons 197 Webb am Server SENGS ii dadas 197 IP WV ite St Setas aid 206 CUTE Fee NS OUI Si tapia 206 FIP Server Sin GS ii tadas 209 NetWork POr into malisima oda ld 210 Starting WebCam at the Client PC ccoooocccccooncnncconccnncnnnccnnncnonnononcnanonononanos 211 Single View MPEG 4 Encoder Viewer ocoooocccccccoccnncccoccnnconononncononcnnnonancnnnnnanens 213 Administrating Host Seve di ts 214 Taking a Snapshot from a Live Video 22 c cceccscesesseeeececsecceseeseceecscccsseseeeeeececocaseeeeteestnees 215 A A e na 215 EDO ANOV O road 216 ATA A A 216 A eee a toe One we ree MC en tee oa eet oe ee eee ae eer nee er 217 VISUAL NAM o 219 A Sanadeen nae chanbacetecnantchens Sanndtuns Sotalid ant heal satire as 219 TWO Way FUG O ti ate sees dr asta eed erect ete 219 Data Rate Configura tostada 220 DirectDraw SEUD sctccie s
300. rnnnnananannnnonnnas 167 ACCESSING Ine MEMOS WIE WEOG reaa da 167 VIEWING Connection Status iiss cesccivis Ses cath ax a e N dyuacipiadedccles A a ea 168 RESUMO BACKUP cari a 168 Playing Back over Internet Using Remote Playback oooooonccconnnnccccconcconccccnonannccnnnannnrrnnaaannnnnnas 170 Working with Remote Playback Server at the Server PC oooonnccccccccncnnnnnnnannncnccnnnncnonononononnanannos 170 Working with Remote Playback Client at the Client PC ooonccncccccccnnccccconcnnncnnnancnnnnonononnnnnnancons 172 Touch Screen SUD O iia nica 179 Fast Key Retener ic 180 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting FilesS coonconccconcconocoocorooannonaroas 103 Backing Up Files Using Backup SySteM oooooooccccccconnnononononnnoncnnnnnncannnnnnnnrr cnn rn rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnos 183 Backing Up Log Data Using System LOG sissscsscccecccecessccseeccesewsse cases cetensesiaveveceweceseccsseieeeiesesenest et 186 Backing Up Files Using VIEWED nai tu avrceweenarsvdewacesradeemuscavswcdstesenueceasaseceedtenereawes 187 Backing Up at the Client PE aan elena aaah 190 Deleting Files Using Backup System ccccsseeeeeeeesseseeeeeseeessneeeeeeeseeseseeeeeeoesnennaeseeeeenenees 191 Deleting Files USING ViGWLOG inicio cesisaibane s 192 Repairing Damaged File PathnS ccccsscssseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeeeaaseeeeeeeeneeenseeeeeeseoeenaeseeeenes 193 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam ccssscceese
301. rs and files are made available you must download LAN ViewLog and install GV codec to your local computer first 1 Atthe local computer go to Windows My Network Places Find the server where the GV System is located 2 To download LAN ViewLog locate LANViewLogCtrl exe from the system folder Figure 4 25 1 and copy and paste this program to your local computer 3 To install GV codec locate the Install Codec folder in the system folder and run InstallCodec exe To view video files 1 Atthe local computer execute LANViewLogCtrl exe to bring up the LAN ViewLog Controller window Figure 4 25 2 B Co GW650 Ioj x LAN ViewLog Controller File Edit view Favorites 0 Back gt Bi Address CGveso GO tlkeyReference_WiewLog jpg 2 Lock vee Testa Wrest Piqv stiviewLog500 exe Stand by gt gt Key View exe sl Loga S Map mcan 2 LoadDEShareDil dl MDB I El Add Delete Play Figure 4 25 1 Figure 4 25 2 Page 165 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files 2 Click the Add button to bring up the Add ViewLog dialog box TL 192 168 0 1 7 8 qv6S0 ViewLogS00 exe A Figure 4 26 Click the Browse button and locate ViewLog500 exe in the server computer 4 Click the Detect button to load video files from the server computer If you see a Red Cross sign instead of green checks Figure 4 27 go back to your Windows Sharing And Security in the server PC and che
302. rt 8554 UDP Port 17320 17380 Protocol TCP IP Streaming Video Streaming Remote Playback RPB and etc For the 3G enabled mobile phone that is NOT based on Windows OS you can receive live video from the GV System without installing the related mobile applications first For 3GPP configurations see WebCam Server Settings earlier in this chapter Page 242 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam PDA G View is a remote view application for Pocket PC device It can run on PDA using Windows Mobile 5 0 and 2003 G View Installation G View V2 is included in the Surveillance System Software CD This application should be installed ina PDA device with Microsoft Pocket PC operating system 1 Plug your PDA via USB or COM port to a computer installed with Microsoft ActiveSync The Microsoft ActiveSync program should come with your PDA software CD Consult your PDA user s manual 2 Run Microsoft ActiveSync in the connected computer Make sure both the PDA and computer are synchronized 3 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD to the computer It will run automatically and pop up a window Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item and then click Microsoft PDA Viewer V2 Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation Page 243 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Connecting to GV System Once G View V2 is installed into your PDA you can use it to monitor your GV System Make sure your PDA
303. s Meihu Rd Taipei Taiwan Mote Motity Setting send SMS notification to the clients network administrators W when connection is abnormal Set Up three mobile numbers in above Information section e send SMS notification to the client s operators when 2 connection is abnormal Figure 10 7 Client Information 2 Type alogin ID and password They will be the ID and password for the client to log in the SMS Server Figure 10 11 3 In the Information section type the client s related information You can specify three mobile numbers of the client s network administrators for SMS notification 4 Inthe Notify Setting section you can send a SMS to the client in the case of gt Internet disconnection between the client and the SMS Server or gt Improper program shutdown in the client The recipients can be gt The client s network administrators define three mobile numbers in above Information section gt The client s operators See Setting Mobile Numbers later in this chapter For the users of Dispatch Server and Vital Sign Monitor refer to the CMS User s Manual Clicking the Question mark can view the specified mobile numbers at the client site 5 Click Save for above settings Page 332 Chapter 10 Short Message Service Disabling a client You can disable subscription services to an individual client when subscription expires In the Account Settings window Figure 10 6 right click the desired client and then
304. s can play back its related video For details on the settings in the Video Object Setup dialog box see Object Index Setup earlier in this chapter Page 60 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Note 1 Only faces tilting within the range of 15 vertically and 30 45 horizontally can be detected 2 The face to be detected must cover at least 1 10 of the screen 3 Only full face images can be detected Detecting Unattended and Missing Objects The Object Monitor program can detect any unattended and or missing object within the camera view by highlighting its location Detecting Unattended Objects To detect any unattended objects within the camera view follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button and then select Object Index Monitor Setup to display the Camera Applied Object Index Monitor window 2 Check the desired cameras for the application The checked cameras will also be applied for the settings of Object Index 3 Click the Configure button to display the Video Object Setup window see Object Index Figure 1 57 4 Click the Object Monitor tab in the upper part to display the following window Page 61 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Yideo Object Setup Object Index Object Monitor Camera camera 1 Wask Filter B e Setup Unattended Object vii Accept Define Object 2 Save Reference Image T Never Recycle 2 Embed alarm region into recorded Berii E je
305. s example the images of the PTZ camera show in the camera 2 screen 4 Use the slide bars of Pan Tilt and Zoom to set up the View 1 as shown below Then click the Add button to apply the settings The View 1 will show in the upper left corner of the right screen View Add Remove Remove All Figure 1 77 5 Click the drop down menu to set up View 2 3 and 4 one at atime Refer to step 4 for the View 1 Page 72 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System 6 Specify Idle Time sec indicating the zooming duration in seconds selection Idle Mode Idle Timerseci view 1 fo 2 Figure 1 78 7 Click the drop down menu of the Idle Mode item The seven options included inside are None View 1 View 2 View 3 View 4 Tracking and Refresh View E None After zooming the PTZ camera will remain on the same view until the next zooming command Tracking After the idle time the PTZ camera will start tracking if it is also being applied for the tracking function View 1 2 3 4 After the idle time the PTZ camera will go back to the preset View 1 2 3 or 4 Refresh View After the idle time the 4 views will be refreshed 8 Click Test to check your settings Use the mouse to outline a desired area in one of the four views The area will be magnified in the left screen 9 Click OK to apply the displayed selections and close the window Starting Object Zooming After the above settings you can start the object zoo
306. s from yellow to red color when motion detected Blinking represents the camera is detecting motion F7 is the shortcut key of this operation Tip To take a snapshot of the current frame position your cursor over on the Camera Name When the Hand button appears click to open the Save As dialog box shown as below Save and tag the frame with Time Date Camera number and Location name Select Transparent will make the tag background transparent and Color Box is for you to choose your text color Page 40 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Save in Sy GV SRT 0104 6 ER l Commres FTP WebHTML __ tables template La ViewLogso0_CommrRes _ WwebTemp Specify file name File name Select file type Save as type dex File dcx Lancel Click to tag time date M Time Date Click to tag camera number Camera Click to tag location name Location Transparent Text Background Transparent E Color Box Figure 1 39 Playing Back Video Files The ViewLog button is used for playing back video and audio files This function is discussed in Chapter 4 Instant Playback You can instantly open ViewLog to trace the event s of a certain time length without interrupting the morning gt To instantly play back the event s of one single channel click on the Camera Name and then select the time length gt To instantly play back the events of all channels
307. s in the 640x480 video image gt Enable De Interlace Render See Configuring Global Recording Parameters in Chapter 1 This feature requires the VGA card of DirectX9 Make sure to upgrade your VGA card driver and DirectX version 6 Unable to record audio even though all setups and configurations are done correctly gt Audio recording is not available in the 640x480 video resolution See Wave n Device Camera Audio Install in Chapter1 7 Can t invoke hotline alerts gt GV System only supports external modem using Zyxel or Lucent chipset gt Make sure Modem Device and Com Port are set up properly See Modem Configure Configuring Hotline Network Notification in Chapter1 Page 373 Troubleshooting 8 A mark appears in the ViewLog s event list window gt These files may already been deleted in the previous Recycle run Exit Main System and run RepairLog500 exe under the system folder to remove these files from the database 9 Unable to play back audio in ViewLog gt The video you select may not have any audio records gt The speaker icon at the lower right corner is not enabled See Figure 4 1 in Chapter 4 gt Audio can only be played back at 1X speed Remote Application 1 Remote View is unable to display video from GV System gt This symptom may appear when Remote View is installed in Windows XP SP1 or later Windows XP no longer includes Wavelet decoder after Service Pack 1 You may download
308. s triggered e Camera 1 starts recording for 30 seconds and stops itself until the next input trigger see the Rec Video option Computer Alarm sounds once see the Invoke Alarm option The output Module 3 Pin 7 is triggered simultaneously based on the Latch Trigger mode see the illustrations below Following illustrations can help you understand different output signals see Purple Square in the above dialog box working with the Latch Trigger option 1 N O Normal Open Latch Trigger Once the input triggers the output the output will be triggered for a short moment and then turn off itself N C N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O N O N O N O 2 N O Toggle Latch Trigger Once the input triggers the output the output will keep triggering until a new input trigger N C N C N C N C Input Output N O N O N O N O 1st Input Trigger 2nd Input Trigger Page 105 Chapter 2 I O Applications 3 N O Pulse Latch Trigger Suppose you set the Pulse time to 60 second Once the input triggers the output the output will remain ON for 60 seconds before turning off itself N C N C N C N C 60 60 sec sec Input Output N O N O N O N O Keeping Last Toggle Status This feature can memorize the current output state when the monitoring is stopped or the system is restarted For example suppose the output is lights When remaining on the premises you stop monitoring but the triggered lights remain ON not affecte
309. see Chapter 4 E POS Table Specify the playback software for playing back POS events Import Previous Days of Live Log Browser Specify how many days of data to be loaded to the System Log Set Location Click the Set Location button to specify a storage path The available free space will be displayed in left hand side Keep Days Set the number of days to keep log files Recycle Enable the system to delete old log files to make space for new files when HDD free space is below 500MB To view and learn more about System Log see System Log later in this chapter Popping Up a Camera Window on Motion Detection Using this feature you may view the pop up camera at the moment when event occurs To set up click the Configure button and then select Camera Popup Setting This brings up the following Camera Popup Setting dialog box Camera Popup Setting X Owell Time 5 SEC Interrupt Interval Sec Camera Motion Invoke Wi lsa I 13 2 iw 6 fw io 14 La fw wit 15 If 4 Ta 12 W16 Check All Clear All Mod 1 af Clear al Input 1 ao p Input Invoke Camera 1 J Figure 1 25 Dwell Time Specify the amount of time a pop up camera window to remain in the foreground Interrupt Interval This feature is useful when more than one camera is set for pop up notification If cameras are all activated at the same time specify the interrupt interval here would allow you to set the amount of time between camera pop u
310. software applications offered by the system ViewLog Quick Search Remote Playback System Remote Playback System WebCam version and Q View Following is a comparison table for these applications This is not a complete comparison table because many of these features are dealt with in details throughout the manual However this table may help you to decide which application to use under a given situation Application ViewLog Quick Search Remote Playback System Remote Playback System WebCam version Q View Description Plays back video files on the servers and computers within the LAN as well as supporting the Backup function A more convenient tool that allows you to search video files recorded on motion alarm or POS events Plays back files through network connection Offers most complete playback features among the five This application is a management system itself It can download and play back history video files from several servers over Internet See Playing Back over Internet Using Remote Playback later in this chapter No additional software installation is necessary Just play back by your web browser See Remote Playback on WebCam in Chapter 6 Plays back files saved at the remote site It comes with the installation of any GV remote applications Remote View IP Multicast and Center V2 for instant playback This feature is discussed in Chapter 8 This chapter discusses ViewLog Quick Search and Remo
311. sor has 999 seconds Clicking the Stop button will stop the operation and turn over the control privilege to the next user waiting online If you want to enable or disable I O devices to the remote GV System click the Enable Disable 1 O button For this the remote GV System must grant the privilege first Enable the Enable Remote Control option in Figure 6 1 Page 218 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Visual Automation You can remotely change the current status of the electronic device by simply clicking on its image Moreover you can manage the settings of Visual Automation This feature is only available when the Visual Automation is configured ahead on the GV System gt To access this feature click the I O Control button No 4 Figure 6 20 and select Visual Automation gt Right click the green I O icon on the left corner to manage the alert areas such as displaying embossing and changing colors to alert areas gt Click the alert areas on the image to force the outputs to be triggered remotely TNT Figure 6 26 Visual PTZ Other than the PTZ control panel you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image To access this feature click the PTZ Control button and select Visual PTZ For details on using the Visual PTZ Control Panel see Visual PTZ in Chapter 1 Two Way Audio To make two way audio possible both hardware and software must be properly set up and installed For the i
312. splay POS data on the POS Live View window Alignment Select to set the position of text overlay on the screen Photograph E Print text on video file or on screen with photograph Enable this option to overlay the photos with access text onto the live video or recorded file Print on POS Live View Enable this option to display the photos on the separate POS Live View window Alignment Select to set the position of photo overlay on the screen Enable clean time When the option is enabled after the specified time in seconds that if GV System hasn t received the transaction data from your POS system the already displayed data will disappear from the camera screen e the cashier stops entering the transaction data m Transaction end dwell time Specify the amount of time in seconds that POS data stays on a view screen before the next transaction Page 132 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application Camera Time Text Print on video file Enable this option to display camera ID and location name on the recorded video file Alignment Select how you want the camera information to be aligned on a view screen Set Font Click the Set Font button to set up the font for POS and Camera Time text The option Apply Stereo Font makes texts stand out from the background by giving white edge to the texts POS Field Filter POS Field Filter allows you to create a column of a transaction item in System Log It furthe
313. stem transaction item content and price amount value Then click OK to start searching For this example we like to search all the transaction types related to Coke registered in the device POS 4 from 00 00 00 to 13 43 19 on 2004 07 13 Its price amount may be greater than or equal to gt 1 and less than or equal to lt 99 If we select the Statistic option and click OK here we will get the sum or the average price of all the discovered transaction events not a list of these events Page 238 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Remote ViewLog on WebCam Through WebCam Server you can remotely play back the recorded files by using the video player ViewLog This provides you another playback option other than the Remote Playback application see Remote Playback on WebCam earlier in this chapter 1 The GV System needs to allow the remote access first Click the Network button select WebCam Server and enable Run ViewLog Server 2 Atthe client PC open a browser and type the address of the remote GV System The Compression Selection page Figure 6 16 appears 3 Select Remote Play Back ViewLog and click the Submit button This page appears Select Internet Connection O Remote Play Back viewLog 1024x768 O 1280x1024 O 1600x1200 O 1680x1050 O 1920x1200 Figure 6 47 4 Select ViewLog select the desired screen resolution and click the Submit button This dialog box appears
314. t If Enable Mask is enabled masks will be displayed on the detection regions If the alarm settings in step 7 are selected the following options will be enabled E Invoke Alarm Activate the computer noise alarm when an object enters a defined region Click the button next to the item to assign a wav sound file Output Module Enable an installed output device when an object enters a defined region Assign the output module and pin number m Never Recycle When the item is checked the alarm triggered events won t be recycled even when disk space is full To test your settings of counting select Live from the drop down list and then click the Test button Notice how the number changes in the Counting Result section when objects pass through the detection regions There are three options in the drop down list Live tests your current settings Door Demo and Traffic Demo are pre recorded events showing how the application counts objects in two actual DVR examples Page 29 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Mapping PTZ Cameras This option assigns a PTZ camera to its corresponding camera channel for either the local or the remote applications For local applications see Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels later in this chapter For remote applications this option will let you control PTZ cameras through the WebCam or Center V2 server 1 Click the Configure button and select Camera Mapping PTZ Dome This dialog box appe
315. t Time Both 2005 09 25 bo 00 00 2005 09 27 23 59 59 Cancel Advance Search DSSS CE DSSS oS ES Add New Command Import Export 4 Mote all commands are operated by OR Figure 1 46 Page 47 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Recording Schedule You can program recording I O devices and Center V2 services to turn on and off at specific time each day Click the Schedule button and select Schedule Edit to display the following window Note lt s necessary to edit Center V2 schedule once you activate other schedule settings otherwise the connection to Center V2 will be stopped automatically after 15 minutes The window has three major tabs Video Schedule A schedule starts the surveillance system automatically m I O Schedule A schedule starts I O surveillance automatically Center V2 Schedule A schedule starts the connection to Center V2 services automatically CenterV2 Schedule I O Schedule Setup Schedule Add period time schedule Video Schedule a Ab e Monitor Invoke Weekly Schedule 7 Rec Roundcthe clack 7 a Special Day Schedule E 4 Pager E Mail 4 Output Remote e view Apply Day s Oneration s PMi 13 00 AM 05 00 Mon Tue Med Thu Fri REC Pager E Mail R 1 234 AM 08 00 Phi 20 00 Sat Sun FEC Fager E Mail R 1 2 3 4 Schedule List Window Ex Camera Tabs a eRecord PagerfE Mall Remote View PO Monitor Centerv2 _ Cancel Figure 1 47 Page 48 C
316. t conditions include 1 Video Lost 2 I O Module Lost 3 I O Trigger Normal 4 Trigger Emergency 5 Connection Lost 6 Subscriber Login 7 Subscriber Logout 8 Camera Motion 9 Surveillance System Abnormality 10 Intruder 11 Missing Object 12 Unattended Object 13 Scene Change 14 POS Loss Prevention 15 Disk Full 16 Stop all camera monitoring 17 Stop I O Monitoring 18 Start Monitoring All Type Events 19 Stop Monitoring All Type Events 20 Wait Time Expired and 21 Unexpected Logout Alert Approach NH Invoke Alarm Select a computer alarm from the drop drown list Or select User Define from the list to import one desired wav sound Click the Arrow button beside to test the assigned alarm Output Module Select an installed output model and pin number to alert the Center V2 operator Send E Mail Alerts Enables e mail alerts to send e mails to subscribers Click the Edit button to edita message For E Mail settings see E Mail Alerts later in this chapter m Send SMS Alerts Enables SMS alerts to send SMS messages to subscribers Click the Edit button to edita message For SMS Server settings see SMS Alerts later in this chapter Page 314 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Text Format of SMS ASCII for English text limited to 160 characters Unicode for other languages limited to 70 characters Note For E mail and SMS alerts ensure to set up e mail addresses and mobil
317. talled the backup feature provides the direct burn function It allows you to directly burn the files onto CD DVD without the steps of assigning the burning software and pasting the backup files to the CDR Writer program Page 188 3 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files gt If Nero software of version 7 0 is installed the backup feature allows you to directly burn the files to blu ray media Using OS Burning This option is only available when you use Windows XP or Server 2003 It burns files using the inbuilt software of the operation system Note that your hard disk needs at least 1 G buffer space Media Information This section indicates free and used space on CD DVD media or the local disk Click the Add Time Frame button to define a time period for backup Select Backup Time _ Time Period Select Camerats 4 start Time fi 1 20 2006 00 00 00 Camera 1 Camera 2 End Time 11321 12006 23 59 59 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera Y Camera amp Camera 9 Only Mever Recycle Event Camera 10 Object Index Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Information Database Files Search End Total Event Total MDE Total Object Index Used Size Video Audio Event Figure 5 9 Time Period Specify the time periods for backup Select Camera s Click to select the camera s for backup The number of video and audio files o
318. tatus in Mutlicam OptiON cccccccccoonnncccnnnccnnnnnancconnncnnnonannnnos 122 Managing Group OF VO Devi Sorrido did 123 ViISUal AUTO Mali di 124 Setting Up Visual Automall sii coai 124 Using WISUANAUIO MV slide 125 Virtual VO Controls daras 126 Page 100 This chapter discusses how you can set up and control the I O devices connected to GV System 1 0 applications include these features Configure I O devices Move PTZ to a preset location on input trigger Support access control systems of Momentary and Maintained modes Arm and disarm I O devices without interfering the monitoring Centrally manage I O devices across the wide area by the Advanced I O Panel Setting Up I O Devices Devices necessary for I O applications are GV Net GV Net card GV NET IO card GV IO and GV Relay For details see Chapter 2 in the Installation Guide To connect an I O device to GV System you need to configure the settings On the main screen click the Configure button point to System Configure and then click the I O Device tab This window appears System Configure x General Setting Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 Camera 8 Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 140 Device HotLine Network Select 1 0 Device gt Device ano y Format Adar Name Signal Type A i Port com y Ad bar eno CNC I Tomer
319. te Playback System in details Playing Back on ViewLog The ViewLog would play back recorded video files without affecting recording There are two ways to launch ViewLog Page 142 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Start Video Log from the GV folder Windows Start menu Programs Inthe Main System click the ViewLog button and then select Video Audio Log Or press F10 on the keyboard 1 2 cam 4 ee i HF F a we 7 SR y cet Wi Pi a i E 3 T p en i i camera 1100 3 E BETO gee r A E J E aro gt z EA E e Ep Me ESL 14413 Figure 4 1 The ViewLog Window By default when you open ViewLog it will play the last event of camera number 1 Without further settings you could already play back the event by clicking the Play button No 12 Figure 4 1 on Playback Panel Click the View Mode button No 5 Figure 4 1 to switch the current view mode to a multi channel view Use controls on Playback Panel to view the event in the way you want Move the slider in Playback Meter No 10 Figure 4 1 forward and backward to navigate video frames To play back multiple events keep pressing CTRL on the keyboard and highlight the desired events on the Video Event List No 4 Figure 4 1 Then click the Play button to play these events To select events from different dates click the date from the Date Tree No 3 Figure 4 1 Events of that date will b
320. ted Under Delay Time s you can define the duration of Scene Change to invoke the message The range of delay time is from 1 to 99999 seconds m Never Recycle When the item is checked the Scene Change events will not be recycled by the system E Demo See three examples of Focus Change and View Change Click the Play button to see the demonstration Note When the event of Focus Change or View Change has been detected it will be recorded as Scene Change in System Log for later retrieval Live Log Browser Recycle Log 7 25 2000 18 53 Monitor System Login Counter POS 1 Pos 3 Time Device Information Event 89 2000 7 40 54 Phi Camera 1 LA Motion 8292000 7 40 57 Ph Camera 1 E 89 2000 7 40 58 Ph Camera 1 892000 7 41 03 PM Camera 1 i Figure 1 86 System Log Page 79 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Advanced Motion Detection To avoid false motion detection the Advanced Motion Detection feature provides three solutions e Create up to 5 levels of motion detection sensitivity in one region e Mask off unwanted areas for monitoring such as cloud and tree movement e Ignore motion when the lighting condition is poor 1 Click the Configure button and then select Advanced Motion Detection Setup The Advanced Motion Detection Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the desired cameras for setup and then click the Configure tab This dialog box appears Advanced Motion Detection Setup W Enable
321. the Subscriber list No 4 Figure 9 1 select Event Log and then click a desired log type adi gseoo System System Start Live View 1 Camera 1 11 15 2006 11 33 46 AM System System Start Live View 1 Camera 1 11 15 2006 11 32 35 AM 1 System Start 1 0 Monitoring 11 15 2006 11 32 13 AM 11 15 2006 11 32 13 AM System Status change of monitoring cameras On 1 Off 2 16 11 15 2006 11 32 13 AM 11 15 2006 11 32 13 AM System Stop O Monitoring 11 15 2006 11 31 51 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 51 AM System Stop all cameras monitoring 11 15 2006 11 31 51 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 51 AM System Start LO Monitoring 11 15 2006 11 31 36 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 36 AM System Status change of monitoring cameras On 1 Off 2 16 11 15 2006 11 31 36 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 36 AM Attachment Record file of Camera 1 Live 11 15 2006 11 31 26 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM Trigger Video of Camera 1 By Module 1 Input 1 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM Trigger Module 1 Input 1 Trigger 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM System Stop all cameras monitoring 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM System Stop 1 0 Monitoring 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM System Start Monitoring All Type Events 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM 1 LoginLogout Login 11 15 2006 11 31 16 AM System System Start Service 11 15 2006 10 37 59 AM System System Stop Service 11 15 2006 10 36 01 AM System System Start Service 11 15 2006 10 35 58 AM 1
322. the designated GV Server Type the IP address or domain name ofthe GV Server Type a valid user name and password with privilege to use this function Leave all port settings as defaults at 4550 5550 and 6550 respectively unless otherwise necessary Click the OK button Then the created GV Server will appear in the drop down list Editing Host Server Select the GV Server you wish to edit from the Host drop down list All information of the selected server will be displayed Change the information in the fields as required and click the OK button Then the information is updated and connection is switched to the edited GV Server Removing Host Server Select the GV Server you wish to remove from the Host drop down list and then click the Delete button to remove it Taking a Snapshot from a Live Video Click the Snapshot button No 8 Figure 6 20 to display the following Snapshot window Click the Print button to print out the displayed image Or click the Save button to save this image in a client PC Figure 6 22 Take a Snapshot Pop up Setup The Single View MPEG4 Encoder Viewer can be set to pop up as soon as motion is detected or I O devices are triggered To enable the function follow these steps 1 Click the Change Server button No 1 Figure 6 20 and then select Alarm Notify to display the following dialog box Page 215 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Alarm Notify x W Motion Motif
323. the options in the General Setting tab Startup The Startup options instruct the system to enable selected features at Main System startup Start Monitor Select one of the following monitor control modes at startup Monitor All Allows you to monitor all cameras and l O if available at startup It is the same as to manually click Monitor button and select Start All Monitoring For details see Start Stop Monitoring later in this chapter Schedule Monitor Allows you to monitor cameras by schedule Alternatively you may click Schedule button Schedule Start Refer to Recording Schedule later in this chapter I O Monitor Allows you to monitor all I O devices Alternatively you may click the Monitor button and then select I O Monitoring Note By adjusting Monitor Control you may record or invoke alert methods of each camera with individual settings See Adjusting Individual Camera later in this chapter to set up your Monitor Control Multicast Server Allows connection to IP Multicast one of the remote application at startup Or click the Network button and select Multicast Server Page 7 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System TCP Server Allows connection to Remote View another remote application by TCP Or click the Network button and select TCP Server m WebCam Server Allows connection to WebCam Server at startup Or click the Network button and select WebCam Server Modem Server Allows connection to Remote View b
324. the specified transaction type Start Time Enable this function and use the drop down list to specify date and time Rule Specify to search forward or backward from the set date Advanced Setup The Setting button on the Function Panel allows you to configure 1 Quad View 2 Play Setting 3 Display and 4 Cache Click this button to open the System Configuration dialog box Page 158 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files Quad View Select four desired cameras to display in Quad View mode System Configuration l Cuad wiew Play Setting Display Databaze Cache biutti view To Be Activated in a Quad wiew H IPC 1 Camera 1 IPC 1 Camera 2 IPC 1 Camera 3 IPC 4 Camera 4 Cancel Figure 4 19 Play Setting System Configuration q Quad view Play Setting Display Database Cache Multi views General Play Method Auto play next event Auto play the latest event when Viewlag starts Default view mode when vievlog starts View mode Single View Advanced Playback Method Frame by Frame without audio J i Realtime Network speed and buttering Choose Connect Speed LAM video download and playback simultaneously Interval 10 Seconds E Cancel Figure 4 20 Page 159 Chapter 4 Playing Back Video Files General Play Method Auto play next event The next events can be put in sequence for auto playing Auto Play the latest event when Viewlog st
325. the window menu and select Save to DVR or Save to File to save the created E Map file Creating an E Map File for a Remote Host With E Map Editor you can create E Maps for your local host as well as remotely for other hosts E Maps created for remote hosts are saved and viewable only at the server where they are created And they are only functional when connected to the WebCam server 1 Click the Add Host button No 3 Figure 7 1 on the toolbar Anew host folder then is added in Host View 2 Right click the Host in Host View and then select Host Settings to display the following dialog box Page 258 3 4 Host Settings p x Chapter 7 E Map Application Location Mame New Tork Address emap dipmap com Cancel H of Cameras 16 H of Modules E Module 1 E of Inputs E of Outputs Webcam Command Part 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Part 6550 Figure 7 3 Host Settings installed at the host and port information Then click OK Follow the steps instructed in Creating an E Map File to create a file for the remote host Type the remote host s name IP address how many cameras l O modules inputs outputs are Page 259 Chapter 7 E Map Application Starting E Map After creating an E Map file go to the Main System Click the ViewLog button and then select E Map to display the following E Map Viewer window Double click any E Map file of the l
326. tified when events occur outside the scheduled period of time Configuring Center V2 On the Center V2 window click the Preference Settings button No 10 Figure 9 1 and select System Configure to display the following Preference window This window contains these tabs 1 General 2 Layout 3 Network 4 Record and 5 Dispatch Server General Preference General Lapout Network Record Dispatch Server Monitor Option Manual close channel Postemotiorr Camera send by 10 trigger will monitor Sec Camera send by Wiegand capture device wall monitor 10 Sec Image Quality E Normal Enable Directora Start up C Auto Run when Windows Starts C Login SMS Server when Start Service Channel Caption Font and Color Settings C Use the subscriber setting color as background Figure 9 11 Preference General Settings Monitor Option E Manual close channel Closes the triggered camera view manually m Close the camera view when motion stopped Closes the triggered camera view automatically when motion stops Post Motion Specifies the duration of the camera view remaining on the monitoring window after motion stops Page 293 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 Camera send by I O trigger will monitor Specifies the duration of the camera view remaining on the monitoring window when an I O device is triggered To keep the camera view remaining on the monitoring window even afte
327. tings to the weekends enable the Weekend Apply option and select recording mode for the weekend Use the radio button at the bottom to define whether your weekend includes Sunday and Saturday or Sunday only 5 Click OK to apply the settings Note If the End time field is disabled the span will run to the start of the next span Page 17 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Geo Mpeg4 ASP Advanced Settings The Geo Mpeg4 ASP codec supports a number of advanced settings that allow experienced users to fine tune the encoding process In Figure 1 12 check the Apply Advanced Codec Setting option and then click the daa button beside This window appears GEO MPEG4 ASP advanced setting Setting Video 2 Subpixel precision 2 Cuantizer 4 PtzDome hair pixel J o 2 inter frame threshold 2 2 blax keyframe interval Frames per second OK Cancel A Figure 1 14 Setting Setting Click the drop down list to select High speed Recommend or High compression rate for default configurations Or select User defined to define encoding settings yourself Subpixel precision Click the drop down list to select Full Half or Quarter pixel Full pixel Fastest compression speed medium compression rate and normal image quality Half pixel Fast compression speed high compression rate and better image quality Quarter pixel Slow compression speed highest compression rate and better image qua
328. tion 4 Select the type of Internet Connection you re using Modem users are limited to Single Window while broadband users have the option of 2 Windows or Multi View In this example select 1 Window and then click the Submit button 5 Your IE browser starts loading the MPEG4 Encoder interface When the loading is completed click the Play button and type a valid user ID and password Please enter your user name and password User Name Password Forgot Password Change Password Figure 6 18 Entering a valid ID and password Page 212 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 6 Ifthe Enhance network security option was selected in WebCam Options see Figure 6 1 you will be prompted to enter a security code In this example type 4qghtfa and then click OK If the connection is established you will see video streaming in the MPEG4 Encoder Viewer Word Yerification Enter the characters as they are shown in the box below Figure 6 19 Enter a security code Single View MPEG 4 Encoder Viewer ty E 8 Figure 6 20 Single View MPEG4 Encoder Viewer Page 213 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam The controls in the Single View Viewer No Name 1 Option 2 Change Camera PTZ Control 3 I O Control 4 Full Screen File Save 5 6 7 Change Quality 8 9 Snapshot Audio 10 Microphone 11 Stop 12 Play 13 Countdown Timer Description Brings up these op
329. tion Connecting to GV System The following operations may vary slightly for different modules 1 Execute SSView in your smartphone 2 When the message SSView V2 or SSView V3 appears select Login The Login screen appears Page 251 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam 3 Enter the IP address and port number of your GV System login username and password Select Connect When the message Host Connected appears it means you have connected to your GV System successfully Select Image View The Camera List screen appears 6 Highlight one camera and then select Open Camera for live view My Server You can create edit and remove a list of servers for a quick connection Select the My Server option and then select SSView to have these features Other Functions In addition to live view SSView offers other useful functions such as changing camera channels zooming in a camera view rotating images and seeing Server and WebCam information Select the SSView option to have these features Page 252 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Fast Key Reference The Multi View Window Key Function Ctrl Z Minimize the MultiView window Ctrl Open the Host Information window Ctrl E Open the Edit Host window Ctrl C Open the Configure window Ctrl H Open the Camera Status window Ctrl X Close the MultiView Ctrl Q Switch screen divisions Ctrl F Switch to full screen view Ctrl S Take a snapshot Ctrl M Turn the
330. tion you wish to edit Edit My Favorite Richard TCRAP Server My Connect IF Address 192 180 0187 Port ES Delete Connect Now Figure 8 5 Page 272 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications Go to My Favorite Once a connection is added it is listed in menu Click the connection from menu to login a system Camera Zoom Function Click the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons in the toolbar to enlarge and shrink a particular camera view here are the steps 1 Click on the view screen you wish to zoom 2 Click the Lock button from the toolbar to lock the camera 3 Click either the Zoom In or the Zoom Out buttons and then click on the locked camera Playing with Screen View Window Functions All live video is displayed in the screen view window shown as follow Camera Description Rec Button Play Save Camera Lock Icons appear in view screen represent Button Description Time Indicator Indicates current date and time Color of the text and the background can be changed in Preferences Rec Starts stops pauses and resumes recording Play Save Plays and saves recorded video files Camera Lock Locks the image to apply zoom in zoom out function Note The Rec button saves the video files only temporarily as a buffer file therefore saves only one video clip at atime If you wish to save the files permanently use Play Save to save the video clip in AVI format Page 273 Chapter 8 Live View
331. tions 2 Click OK to apply the settings Page 366 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Backing up and Restoring Settings You can back up the configurations you made in Main System and restore the backup data to the current system or import it to another GV System Backing up the settings 1 In the FBR window Figure 11 34 click the Backup System Settings icon This dialog box appears oe Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System Fast Backup amp Restore Digital Surveillance System s Settings Please choose one ofthe selections below Backup System Settings Y AAA E General POS Metwork Figure 11 37 2 Check which settings you want to back up and press the Next Step button The Save As dialog box appears 3 Select the destination drive to store the backup file When the backup is complete this message will appear Successfully Backup MultiCam System Settings Page 367 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Restoring the System You can restore the current system with the backup of configuration file Also you can copy this backup file to configure another system with the same settings as the current system Open the backup file exe you previously stored A valid ID and password are required to display this window ee Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System Fast Backup amp Restore Digital Surveillance System s Settings Please choose one ofthe selections below Ha seno EEIT Restore MultiCam System
332. tions Alarm Notify Data Rate Configure Remote Config Change Server Show Camera Name and Image Enhance Selects the desired camera for display Displays the two choices of PTZ control PTZ Control Panel PTZ Automation Displays the two choices of I O control panels I O Control Visual Automation Switches to full screen view Saves live video in the local computer Adjusts video quality in 4 levels Takes a snapshot of the displayed live video Enables live audio from the remote GV System Enables speaking to the remote GV System Terminates the connection to the remote GV System Connects to the remote GV System Indicates the remaining time when you log in as Guest When the time Is up you will be logged out automatically Administrating Host Server This option allows you to add edit and remove a GV Server from the Host drop down list The drop down list is used to switch the connection to a different GV Server listed inside Click the Option button No 1 Figure 6 20 to display the following dialog box The Host drop down list Page 214 Change Server ioe Default Mew Host Mame Mew Server IF Address 127 0 04 Liser Mame Password Command Port 4550 Data Port 5550 Audio Port 6550 Figure 6 21 Change Server Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Adding Host Server To add a host server to the drop down list click the New button In Host Name field type a name to identify
333. to Current HultiCam System Figure 11 38 Click the Restore Multicam System icon and then check which backup settings you want to restore 3 Press the Next Step button to start restoring When the restoration is complete this message will appear Successfully Restore MultiCam System Settings Page 368 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Hot Swap Recording The program Media Man Tool provides a hot swap feature allowing a non stop recording You can add and remove a hot swap or portable hard drive to the GV System while the monitoring keeps on When the new drive is added it will be configured to the recording path automatically Additionally you can back up ViewLog player and files to play back at any computer Note The hot swap feature supports the disk capacity of 800 MB at least The Media Man Tool Window This program comes with the installation of Main System Run MediaMenTools exe The following window will appear D Y 3 MeiliaManToo s Def Exit Tools View Help y E e Ci D Sp ER gt Fit Media Type Local E Free Space G a nm File System FAT32 EVA Uca 4 Free Space 799 17 MB a MDB Used Total Space 5 85 GB Status Unused m Other Used DYR Event Information Path ENDATA El Size and Count 12 88 MB 3 Files Oldest event 112 2001 15 54 43 5 Never recycle events are excluded Latest event 1112 2001 15 59 08 MDB Information Path E DATA EiDatabase Size and C
334. to have it displayed on the upper left hand corner of the camera screen You may choose No for no heading ID to show only camera ID or ID Name to show both camera ID Name Send Alerts Approach Click the arrow button to choose whether to be notified by E mail telephone or SMS when alert conditions occur under the surveillance area For the telephone setup see Configuring Hotline Network Notification later in this chapter For the E mail setup see Sending Alerts thru E Mail Accounts later in this chapter For the SMS setup see Short Message Service in Chapter later in this chapter Exit Option Check the box to enable the feature Press the blue Arrow button to switch between Select Auto Shutdown and Auto Restart Windows Auto Shutdown closes Windows OS after exiting GV System Auto Restart Windows restarts Windows OS after exiting a GV System PTZ Control Adds PTZ cameras to the system See the later section of PTZ Control Panel for operation details Monitor Option NW Start Delay Starts monitoring after x second s when the system is activated m Post Rec Motion Keeps on recording for a set period of time 1 10 seconds after motion stops Page 10 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System m Pre Rec Motion Records video for a set period of time before motion starts This feature allows you to choose RAM or HDD as a pre recording buffer The difference between the two is that RAM can save smaller pre record from 1 second t
335. ton is only available after you change the default video resolution see Choosing Video Source later in this chapter Click to select recording resolutions E Frame Sec Allows you to adjust camera s recording frame rate There are three options available Smart High and Low Smart The system will distribute as many frame rates as possible to the camera where motion occurs High The system will distribute high percentage of frames not a definite frame number to the selected camera while the other cameras will share rest of the frame rates Assuming that all cameras are in action selecting High ensures this camera always receive higher frame rate than the rest of the cameras Effect can be seen in live mode Low The system will distribute low percentage of frame rates to the selected camera Assuming that all cameras are in action certain cameras are of least importance The system can be set Low in order to allow frame rate to go to more important cameras Frame Rate Button Allows you to set the maximum recording frame of this camera so as to save storage space Page 14 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Rec Frame Rate Setting x Limit Video Frame Rate Jv hax Frame Rate Rec of Motion Framesisec 10 Vv Max Frame Rate Rec of Mon Motion for Economic Round the Clock emen Figure 1 10 Frame Rate Settings Max Frame Rate Rec of Motion Set the maximum frame rate on motion detection For ex
336. ton to display the following dialogue box to display the POS Capture Data Setting window Figure 3 5 DYD Player Loss Prevention Setting x e Alarm Conditions And E gt 100000 w Alarm Output modue 1 Output r Alert Wessage Abnormal Transaction cael Figure 3 8 Loss Prevention Setting Alarm Conditions Check this option and define the price range for an alarm condition For than or equal to lt 100000 the assigned alarm will be activated this example when the price amount in a transaction is great than or equal to gt 10000 and less Page 135 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application Alarm Output Assign an installed output module for the application Alert Message Enter a desired alert message To set up a notification type E Mail Hotline SMS refer to Send Alerts Approach in Chapter 1 Codepage Mapping This feature is to support special characters and symbols display When your transaction text appears on the screen incorrectly your POS system may use different character code from GV System s To change a character code follow these steps 1 In Figure 3 3 enable Use Codepage Mapping and then select a character code from the drop down list Note The codepage is related to Script in the Set Font option see Figure 3 4 When this option is disabled it means there are no codepages matching your script setting 2 To verify the c
337. tup to enable the camera drop down list 3 Select the make and model from the list and press the PTZ Control button to bring out the camera setup dialog box slightly different for other camera models 4 Inthe dialog box select Activate This is important Without this step the PTZ camera will not be added to system 5 Click OK and then go back to main screen Now you should see PTZ Control button on main screen Click the button to bring out the on screen control panel shown as follows PTZ Switch Lxt Close AO q ai gt Pan Tilt Control e be le Zoom Control G to Focus Control EME A Option lacar 0 ji Address Select Preset Switch Panel Figure 1 51 PTZ Switch Changes the PTZ device to be controlled Close Closes the control panel Pan Tilt Control Allows camera to pan back and forth continually among preset points Zoom Control Allows camera to zoom in or out Focus Control Adjusts the camera focus Option Functions included in the Option may be different in terms of various PTZ devices Consult the manual of the connected PTZ device Address Select Specify the address of the PTZ Preset Switch Panel Moves the PTZ to the preset positions by clicking on the preset number Page 51 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Note Each dome will need to be addressed correctly Refer to the dome manufacturers documentation for details Auto Switching PTZ Control Panels The f
338. twork LAN 2 Click the Network button in Main System and select Multicast Server to allow connection from client PC Follow this same step to set up all GV Systems you wish to connect to IP Multicast 3 Goto Windows Start Program system folder and then IP MultiCast System from menu Run the system at the client PC 4 Click the Search button from toolbar so IP Multicast finds all GV Systems available for connection within the network Systems connected to IP Multicast are listed at the lower left pane with their server IP 5 Click the Live bar to view the desired system You may be asked to enter Login ID and Password Make sure your ID is given the privilege to view All cameras open to the ID will be displayed 6 To end a connection click the Stop button from toolbar Functions of toolbar buttons are listed in following table Button Description Search Finds all main systems available for connection within the network Back Goes to previous surveillance screen Forward Goes to next surveillance screen Go To Selects a specific system Stop Ends a connection Lock Camera Locks a particular screen view Live Channel Click to view or to hide a connection Icons found at the left pane represent Button Description Live x Click to view available cameras in the selected system Flag Green flag represents the system is connected red means disconnected Page 278 Chapter 8 Live Viewing Using Remote Applications The rest
339. unction allows the corresponding PTZ control panels to be called up automatically when you switch to different PTZ camera screens To enable the function follow the steps below 1 Click the Configure button and then select System Configure to display the System Configure window 2 Inthe PTZ Control section click the Arrow button point to PTZ Panel Switch and click Auto Figure 1 52 3 When the Camera Mapping Setup window Figure 1 29 appears specify the brand name and hardware address of each PTZ camera Then click OK for the application Page 52 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System PTZ Automation Other than the PTZ control panel you can display a Visual PTZ Control Panel on the image T RA bein aami A las As 111 SRS tidi Pat AS SET rico iA l Visual PTZ Control Panel Figure 1 53 1 To control the PTZ you must map one channel to the PTZ camera first For this click the Configure button and select Camera Mapping PTZ Dome For details see Steps 1 4 in PTZ Control Panel earlier in the chapter To access the new control panel click on the desired Camera Name on the top left corner of every channel and select PTZ Automation A separate PTZ control window will appear To change the panel settings click the green PTZ button on the top left corner of the PTZ control window to have these options PTZ Control Type m Type 1 In this mode when you place the mouse arrow on the four directions
340. ur router In order for UPnP to be enabled the following must be true e Windows XP Service Pack 2 is required e Windows XP must be configured to use UPnP see below UPnP must be enabled on your router consult your router s documentation Page 206 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Enabling UPnP in Windows XP 1 3 4 Go to Windows Start click Start button point to Settings and select Network Connections This window appears Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help ay Y Back v Q Y Dd pe Search gt Folders gt Y gt i HA Address e Network Connections gt Name type Status Device Name Phone or Host Address Owner LAN or High Speed Internet ek Local Area Connection LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Realtek RTL8139 Family System Figure 6 10 Right click one Local Area Connection select Properties and click the Advanced tab This dialog box appears L Local Area Connection Properties x General Authentication Advanced windows Firewall Protect my computer and network By limiting or preventing access to this computer from the Internet Figure 6 11 Click the Settings tab and click Exceptions tab This dialog box appears x General Exceptions Advanced Windows Firewall is turned off Your computer le at risk of attacks and intrusions from outside sources such as t
341. utton and select Connect to Center V2 This dialog box appears Connect to Center 2 l Center IF 127 0 0 1 bi User ID Password E e Save Password e Normal Mode C Panic Button Login after 30 second W Monitor all type events Hy Exit Advance Figure 9 15 Connect to Center V2 Enter the IP address of the Center V2 the user ID and password created in Center V2 See Creating a Subscriber s Account earlier in this chapter Click the Connect button When the connection is established Center V2 will start receiving videos or attachments from the subscriber Normal Mode Setup To further define the communication conditions between the subscriber and Center V2 select Normal Mode on the Connect to Center V2 dialog box Figure 9 15 and then click the Advance button for setup The setup window includes these tabs 1 General 2 Camera 3 Other and 4 I O Device Page 298 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 General The settings define the retry modes and communication ports between GV System and Center V2 Advance Settings General Camera Other 170 Device Connection Broken Codec Maximum Retriez 0 Geo Mpeg4 Retry Interval F Seconds le Geo Mpeg ASP W Retro until connected Geo H264 Ret in the background Connective Port Center Port and Default Command Port 5548 Default Data Port 5549 Default Audio Port 5546 Default Connect
342. v Minimize or Logout ar W FullScreen Enter i FullScreen Exit O Snapshot Multicam Wiewlog Remote ew Webcam Control Center Privacy Mask Other Mew Remove search Remote Playback Fast Backup amp Restore Allow removing password system OK Cancel Figure 1 31 Adding a new user 1 Click the New button at the lower left hand corner to bring up the New Account dialog box IO Password Password Confirmation Hint Level Figure 1 32 2 Enter the user s ID name and password Re enter the same password in the Password Confirmation field 3 Give a Hint optional that would remind you of the password Page 32 4 O Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Select the user s authorization level Supervisor PowerUser User or Guest By default users belonging to the Supervisor level have full rights over GV System settings PowerUsers have the same permission and rights as Supervisors except that they cannot edit user information and delete the password system described later Users belonging to the User level are restricted to all system settings and have only limited access to certain functions Users in the Guest level can only view videos Click OK to add the user Editing an exiting user Only supervisors are allowed to do it 1 Select a user from the user list to display its properties Or right click on any of the user levels User PowerUser Supervisor and then select
343. ve 14 Inactive 16 Inactive feception Figure 6 59 This screen displays the status of camera activity Three messages indicate the current camera status Normal The camera is turned on and not recording Inactive The camera is turned off Recording The camera is recording Page 247 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam l Mode Phone You can monitor your GV System remotely with e Mode phone or e Mobile phone supporting xhtml chtml or html and capable of GPRS When using i Mode services you do not pay for the time you connected online but will be charged by the volume of data transmitted and or received Therefore i Mode will NOT receive live video streaming instead it will receive one image at a time and will not receive another unless it is requested to do so To request another image simply press the Enter key on your i Mode phone The images are in GIF or JPEG format with resolution of 96x72 pixels Activating the i Mode Function In the Main System click the Network button select WebCam Server click the JPG tab and check the Create JPEG GIF file s as shown in Figure 6 6 Your GV System must use a global IP address and be accessible from the Internet Connecting to GV System After activating the i Mode function you can now receive live images from the GV System via an Mode phone The interface and operation of your i Mode phone may be different from the following example since th
344. ve microphones connected to the MIC input of GV System for this operation To record a sound file follow these steps 1 Click the Rec button to bring up the following dialog box 37 Sound Sound Recorder Al ES File Edit Effects Help Position Length 0 00 sec 0 00 sec E a Figure 1 17 2 Click the Record button to start recording Speak the message script clearly to the microphone Click Stop button when it is done 3 Click the Play button to listen to the recording To save this sound file click File select Save as and then click the Change button This brings up the Sound Selection dialog box shown as Page 20 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Sound Selection El ES Hame untitled ae Remove Format PLM z Attributes 2 000 Hz 8 Bit Mono AEBS OF Cancel Figure 1 18 4 Select PCM 8 000 Hz 8 bit Mono the only format supported for this feature and then click OK To find a sound file click the Browse button to locate the file Add the path of the file to the field and the file will be sent with the telephone calls TCP Server Allows you to setup TCP server Enable Assign IP to enable the drop down list Select the network card from drop down list and your IP address will be displayed in Bind IP The default port number for TCP server is 3550 you may assign different port by entering the port number in the Port field Multicast Server Allows you to setup the Multicast
345. ve View window Setting Up Live View To change the display status on the POS Live View window click the Live View Menu button No 4 Figure 3 10 and select Live View Setup This dialog box appears Live View Setup X View Setting C Max Transactions in Each view 10 E hax Rows in Each View 3 Mode Setting f Single View Moli view Save Customized Position cancel Figure 3 11 View Setting m Max Transactions in Each View Enter the number of transactions you want to keep on the POS Live View window For example if you enter 99 there are always 99 transactions kept on the window When the 100 transaction is entered the oldest transaction data will be deleted to remain the max transaction number to 99 Max Rows in Each View Enter the number of transaction rows you want to keep on the POS Live View window which includes any materials printed by POS System e g data and time Mode Setting Select one single POS Live View window or multiple windows to display on the screen Page 138 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application m Save User Define Arrange Position Allows you to freely place the multiple windows on the screen To use this feature 1 Drag the windows to the desired places on the screen 2 Open the Live View Setup dialog box and click this option When this warning message appears Are you sure to save User Define Arrange Position click Yes to save your arrangement Wheneve
346. vice column Modem Svr Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops GV System s Modem Server TCP Svr Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops GV System s TCP Server Multicast Svr Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops Multicast Server WebCam Svr Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops WebCam Server Connect to Center Start Stop Appears when GV System connects or disconnects with the Security Center Twin Svr Start Stop Appears when a user starts or stops Twin Server Connect to Center V2 Start Stop Appears when GV System logs in or out Center V2 Connect to VSM Start Stop Net Down Net Resume Appears when GV System logs in or out VSM when the connection of both fails or resumes Page 43 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Connect to SMS Start Stop Net Down Net Resume Appears when GV System logs in or out the SMS server when the connection of both fails or resumes E Send Email Alert Appears when an e mail alert is sent out Send SMS Alert Appears when an SMS alert is sent out Device This column shows the individual camera number Mode This column shows whether actions are being taken in local side or remote side Login This function shows whom and when has logged in and out from the GV System and WebCam server Live Log Browser ID Time User Login User Logout Status Mode Note 12 78 2003 9 35 75 PM 1 Success Local 12182003 9 37 32 PM 1 Success Local 1218
347. w e You can enable live view of any camera by right clicking it in the subscriber s list and then selecting Live View Camera 1 Sep 06 17 51 31 Ba Centerv2 E 4 1 qe z as Ea 1 e Live view E 13 Module 1 Figure 9 30 Page 312 Chapter 9 Central Monitoring by Center V2 e When a subscriber is in focus you can enable live view to all its cameras Click a subscriber in the list and select Focus on this subscriber only When the subscriber is in focus click the subscriber again and then select View All Cameras Live All cameras of this focused subscriber display live view Camera 2 ERK Camera 1 ik ig ail go l E Centerv2 or Cancel Focus ler T i eral E view All Cameras Live era 2 1 a e E 1 Module 1 Figure 9 31 Recording and Playing Back Instantly e When a camera is enabled for live view you can start and stop recording by clicking the button on the channel heading e Assoon as you stop recording you can double click the attachment of the event in the Event List for instant playback Output Alerts When alert conditions occur you can activate the output devices installed either at the Center V2 site or at the subscriber site Forcing Outputs of Center V2 To configure output devices at the Center V2 site click the I O Device button No 7 Figure 9 1 on the Center V2 window and then select I O Device from the menu Current
348. w the history of file deletion click the View Delete Log button To view the information of files from a desired camera right click the camera and select Event View Page 193 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files Repairing Damaged File Paths The only way to correctly delete video and audio files is through the operation you ve just performed in the previous section If you move or delete a video file using Windows Explorer or Windows File Manager GV System will not know what you have done unless you ve run the Repair DataBase Utility This Utility comes with the installation of Main System Follow these steps to repair the paths 1 Go to the Windows Start menu select Programs point to the GV folder and then select the Repair DataBase Utility TheA valid ID and password are required When the Select Camera for Repair Database dialog box appears select the desired cameras to fix the file paths Click OK This dialog box appears Plies Default Path Status Result Cova J Reserve NeverRecycle Flag Repair all information twill spend long time Search Hard disk Exit Search the user defined path for log to rebuild the database Figure 5 14 The RepairDB Dialog Box Click the Use Default Path button to start the path re building at the locations specified to save the files in the Main System For details see Log Storage in Chapter 1 Click the Search Hard Disk button to search the enti
349. will appear Fast Backup amp Restore MultiCam System i ioj xj Fast Backup amp Restore Digital Surveillance System s Settings Please choose one ofthe selections below Select Skin Style Customize Features Backup System Settings Figure 11 34 FBR Window Page 364 Chapter 11 Useful Utilities Selecting a Skin The GV System provides two skin options silver default and conventional The skin change will only apply to the screens of Main System ViewLog and remote applications The dialog boxes won t be affected You can also change the screen image of startup splash non active video and video lost Changing the Skin Syle 1 In the FBR window Figure 11 34 click the Select Skin Style icon The option menu appears 2 To use one skin style for all applications simply select All use Conventional Style or All use Silver Style To change the skin style of a single application point to the desired application and then select the skin style you want to apply 3 Close the FBR window and start the GV System to see the change Customizing the Screen Images You can replace the screen images of Startup Splash Non Active Video and Video Lost with your own Before you start remember that each screen image has its specified size Create your own image according to these specifications eo Startup Splash Bit Depth 24 Width 319 and Height 272 e Non Active Video Bit Depth 24 Width 720 and Height 576
350. work General Setting Camera 1 Lamera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera b Camera r Camera Hame Video Resolution 3202240 Camera ss Brightness 1100 Contrast H 150 Rec Control Saturation E 2 Recording Quality Frames Sec Motion Detect Motion Sensitivity cla Mask Filter E H e Maniar Central W Rec video EE Detect an W Apply Advanced Codec Setting f le evoke Alarm Notify i W Invoke to Send Alerts Low F P S W Output Module E Fin 1 sch ey Cancel Figure 1 8 Camera Settings Page 13 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Several settings could be configured here Camera Name The name entered here will appear in the upper left hand corner of the camera screen Rec Control The Rec Control section allows you to set each camera s recording quality The camera s recording quality is based on its resolution and compression rate Higher quality picture will require more storage space A ply to all cameras Adjust recor ding quality Rec Control ei Recording Quality 4 B Resolution button Frames Sec Ti Smart High y Frame rate button Smart recording option Select high low frame rate Figure 1 9 Recording Quality Allows you to adjust the video quality in 5 levels Higher value means lower compression rate Resolution Button This but
351. ws remaining hard disk space m Recycle Log Indicates the recording date of the next video file to be erased NW Set Location Press Set Location to select location to save video files to m Recycle When this option is selected it will cause the oldest files to be deleted when the system requires storage space for new surveillance videos If it is not selected the system will stop recording when disk space is full Keep Days Set to keep the files in storage for a set number of days Users may specify to recycle at 1 to 999 days If designated storage space is not big enough to keep all video files for the defined days Recycle setting then overrides the Keep Days setting Page 9 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Note For storage space GV 250 or above requires 800MB GV 900 requires 1GB GV 1000 GV 1120 GV 1240 and GV 1480 require 1 2GB at least When one partition fell short than minimum video files will automatically be saved to next available hard disk when total available storage space is lower than minimum the system will stop recording and show a Disk Space Low Message Multicam Surveillance System x Disk Space Low Please check Log Location Figure 1 5 To solve the space shortage problem you may add more hard disk space to the system or to delete backup your video files for more storage space To correctly delete or back up video files see Chapter 5 for more details Caption Enters heading
352. x Motion 107 FAO 2000 2 36 12 PM Lamera 4 3 Motion 108 FAO 2000 2 36 12 PM Camera 5 fa Motion 103 AO 2000 2 38 12 PM Camera b ia Motion 110 AO 2D00 2 36 12 PM Camera f a Motion 111 23022000 2 38 12 PM Camera E Lia Motion 4 Figure 1 40 ID This column shows the event ID number generated by the system Time This column shows the time when a motion or I O monitor event occurs Device This column shows camera ID or I O device associated with the event Information This column shows the I O module number Event These event messages mean Motion Appear if motion occurs in the associated camera Monitor Video Lost Appears if video lost occurs in the associated camera m Monitor Video Resume Appears if video resume in the associated camera E Signal On Appears if one of the input device connected to the associated I O module are activated Signal Off Appears if one of the input device connected to the associated I O module are terminated I O error Appears if associated I O module failed I O resume Appears if associated I O module resume to action Page 42 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System Missing Object Appears if objects miss from a defined camera view Unattended Object Appears if unattended objects show up within a defined camera view Intruder Appears if there are objects entering a defined region Disk Full Appears if storage space is full System This function shows which functions are be
353. y a modem Or click the Network button and select Modem Server E Connect to VSM Allows connection to VSM Server Or click the Network button and select Connect to VSM Twin Server Allows connection to Twin Server at startup Or click the Network button and select Twin Server Twin Server is discussed in Chapter 11 Connect to CenterV2 Allows connection to CenterV2 Or click the Network button and select Connect to CenterV2 Enable Directdraw Overlay Enables full screen at startup For the related applications see Switching to Full Screen View later in this chapter m Enable De interlace Render Avoids interlace of the odd and even video lines This feature affects only single view mode with the resolution of 640 x 480 and 720 x 480 After enabling the feature you must restart the GV System to apply it Note 1 The Enable Directdraw Overlay and De interlace Render features can greatly enhance image quality If your VGA card supports DirectX9 enable both settings 2 You may see a warning message Directdraw Create Overlay Failed when trying to use WebCam Remote Control to connect to a server The message indicates the server has the Enable Directdraw Overlay feature enabled It only means the remote side will not see the images with DirectDraw applied It is safe to press YES to continue the connection Tip To check the version of your DirectX search for the file name dxdiag Open the file and find the related
354. y available when you choose Alphabetic If there is space among a series of characters check the option MDB File Entry Name Enter a file name to store the data Click OK to apply the above settings Open System Log In System Log for this example you can see the last column created for the transaction item Coke The transactions matching the search criteria will be displayed under the created column Page 134 Chapter 3 Point Of Sale POS Application 040 2004 0r2004 O 2004 0 2004 O 2004 0 2004 O 2004 0 2004 0 2004 0 2004 rat 0r2004 02004 02004 in on tn tn Cn ta tn n Cn tm on Cn mn Cn Live Log Browser Recycle Log 7420 2004 11 42 Manitor System Login Counter P S2 Content Event Coke 1 00 SUBTOTAL 1 00 Filterl CASH 1 00 ITEMS FURCHASED 1 Thank You FOR TESTING AND SAVING WITH US St STORE Rgo l Ch 1234 Tr 3049 ee ee ee se ee ei stop Tran Saas a aa a an aa cam a ce a a N atart Tra CALYPSO E Figure 3 7 A created column in System Log Abnormal Transaction Alerts Bx r i When an abnormal transaction of the specified transaction item occurs this function can automatically activate the output device and send out assigned E Mail SMS Pager alerts follow these steps 1 2 To set up this function Click the Configure button point to POS Application Setting and then select POS Field Filter Click the Loss Prevention Setting but
355. y in any DVD player that supports writable DVD disks To enable this option files recorded by the GV Hybrid DVD card need to be selected first see the Select Camera s option and a DVD RW disk is required as well Page 190 Chapter 5 Backing Up and Deleting Files Backing Up at the Client PC The program DMBackUp500 exe located in the system folder makes it possible to back up video files ata client PC Before you start make sure both your system folder GV 650 folder for example and video files you wish to save are made available to network users and done through proper setups in Windows Sharing And Security After the folder and files are made available follow these steps 1 At any client computer go to My Network Places in Windows 2 Find the server computer where the GV System is located and then locate DMBackUp500 exe in the system folder as shown below assuming that the system is running GV 650 on drive C Address CAGY6S0 lan Desktop StringTable STRIMGTABLE File As OMSDOStartup exe Application Application Application DMBackUpS00 exe Application Application a OmHealthSwr exe Application Figure 5 10 Executing DMBackUp 500 exe Double click to run the program You should be promoted with the DMBackUp dialog box as shown in Figure 5 1 Follow the same steps as instructed in Backing Up Files Using Backup System This backs up files to the client PC Page 191 Chapter 5 Backing Up and De
356. y is C Smartphone Viewer V2 Install MSViewV2 exe to your smartphone Consult your smartphone user s manual for how to install a program to the smartphone Activating the MSView V2 Function You must activate the Mobile server Figure 6 8 in the Main System to allow the smartphone application Page 249 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Connecting to GV System The following operations may vary slightly for different modules 1 Execute MSViewV2 exe in your smartphone Figure 6 61 appears 2 Select Control and then Connect Figure 6 62 appears 3 Enter the IP address and port number of your GV System a login ID and password Select Control and then Connect Once the connection is established the live image will appear You can use the scroll key on your smartphone to navigate camera channels See Figure 6 63 Image ie Welcome his View nl g Live Connect IP mobile dipmap corr Port OS UsrName 1 Password Movie We 2 Snapshot Path snapshot Figure 6 64 MSView Main Screen Figure 6 65 Entering GV System Info Figure 6 66 Viewing live camera Other Functions In addition to live view MSView offers the functions such as zooming in out a camera view and rotating images Select the MSView option to have these features Page 250 Chapter 6 Viewing Live Video Using WebCam Symbian Smartphone With the SSView V2 V3 application it s also possible to monitor your GV System remotely via S
357. ymbian based smartphone Two solutions are provided for the Symbian Smartphone eo SSView Version 2 for Symbian OS edition 7 0 e SSView Version 3 for Nokia S60 2 Installing SSView Version 2 Version 3 To install SSView Version 2 for Symbain OS edition 7 0 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD It will run automatically and pop up a window 2 Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item Select Symbian Smart Phone Viewer V2 and follow the on screen instructions 3 Locate SSViewV2 jar in the Symbian Phone Viewer V2 folder created in your computer The default directory is CASymbain Phone Viewer V2 4 Install SSViewV2 jar to your smartphone Consult your smartphone user s manual for how to install a program to the smartphone To install SSView Version 3 for Nokia S60 2nd 1 Insert the Surveillance System Software CD It will run automatically and pop up a window 2 Select the Install V 8 1 0 0 System item Select Symbian Smart Phone Viewer V3 only for Nokia S60 2nd and follow the on screen instructions 3 Locate SSViewV3_2nd sis in the Symbian Phone Viewer V3 folder created in your computer The default directory is CASymbain Phone Viewer V3 4 Install SSViewV3_2nd sis to your smartphone Consult your smartphone user s manual for how to install a program to the smartphone Activating the SSView V2 V3 Function You must activate the Mobile server Figure 6 8 in the Main System to allow the smartphone applica
358. ytrame Frame Hue E 15 646 Kbytes 1343 Kbytes _ HDD Calculator Calculator cone Figure 1 37 Camera drop down list Select a camera channel for the application Codec Selection Select a desired type of compression Image Adjustment Brightness Contrast Saturation Hue Move the slide bars to adjust image attributes Click the finger button to apply the displayed values to all cameras Recording Quality Move the slide bar to increase or decrease the picture quality Click the finger button to apply the selected quality to all cameras m Image Size Keyframe indicates the compressed file size while Frame shows the partly compressed file size after quality and image adjustment Note The smaller image size means higher video compression and smaller file size thus extending the recording capacity Page 38 Chapter 1 Configuring Main System WebCam Center V2 Control Center Advanced Yideo Attributes hiulticam WebCam Centery2 Control Center Codec Selection cen Mpeg Compressed Image Quality Guantizer 4 Bits per Second Medium _ m __Defaut 204383 Kbisec Cancel Figure 1 38 Quantizer The bigger the Quantizer the poor the image quality Quality The default Quantizer for High is 2 for Medium is 4 and for Low is 6 The adjustment rules between Quantizer and Quality is Quantizer for High lt Quantizer for Medium lt Quanitzer for Low m Bits per second Indi

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents